JP2015006305A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine which can achieve with one driving means an operation mode in which either a first moving member or a second moving member is stopped while moving the other.SOLUTION: With respect to an opening/closing first gear 451 and an opening/closing second gear 452, a state (transmission state) in which a rotary driving force of a drive motor is transmitted is formed by their engagement to perform opening/closing operation of operation members 491 and 492, whereas with respect to a rotation first gear 461 and a rotation second gear 462, slippage (sliding) between a cylindrical surface 461a1 and a non-formed surface 462a1 is used to form a state (cut-off state) in which the rotary driving force of the drive motor is not transmitted to stop rotation operation of both case bodies 471 and 472. Thus, an operation mode in which one of two moving members is stopped while moving the other can be achieved with one drive motor.

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a movable member formed to be movable, a driving unit that generates a driving force for moving the moving member, and a transmission that transmits the driving force generated by the driving unit to the moving member And a moving member comprising a first moving member and a second moving member, and the first moving member and the second moving member are moved by one driving means (patent) Reference 1).

JP 2011-139766 A

  However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when the first moving member and the second moving member are moved by one driving means, the driving means generates a driving force and the driving force is not generated. Since the two driving states are formed to switch the operation modes of the first moving member and the second moving member, both the first moving member and the second moving member move together or both stop. There is a problem that only the operation mode to be formed can be formed, and one of the first moving member and the second moving member cannot be moved while the other is stopped. That is, in order to stop the other while moving one, it is necessary to separately provide a driving means for moving one and a driving means for moving the other.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and a game that can achieve an operation mode in which one of the first moving member or the second moving member is stopped while the other is stopped by one driving means. The purpose is to provide a machine.

  In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 is a movable member formed to be movable, a driving means for generating a driving force for moving the moving member, and a drive generated by the driving means. Transmitting means for transmitting force to the moving member, wherein the moving member includes a first moving member and a second moving member, and the transmitting means transmits the driving force of the driving means to the first moving member. It is possible to simultaneously form a transmission state transmitting to the two moving members and a blocking state blocking transmission of the driving force from the driving means to the first moving member.

  The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the transmission means transmits a driving force generated by the driving means to the first moving member, and the driving means includes: A second transmission member that transmits the generated driving force to the second moving member, and the first transmission member has teeth that transmit the driving force from the driving means at least partially or entirely. The first drive means side member and at least a part of the teeth which are formed so as to be able to mesh with the first drive means side member and which transmit the driving force transmitted from the first drive means side member to the first moving member or A first moving member side member formed on the entire circumference, and at least one of the first driving member side member or the first moving member side member has the teeth not formed, or the first driving member side member or It is impossible to mesh with the other of the first moving member side member. That includes a non-forming portion.

  The gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein the second transmission member forms a transmission state in which the driving force of the driving means is transmitted to the first moving member. In this case, it is possible to form a blocking state that blocks transmission of driving force from the driving means to the second moving member.

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, when the driving force of the driving means is generated, the driving force is transmitted to the first moving member and the second moving member by the transmitting means, and the first moving member and the second moving member are transmitted. The moving member is moved. In this case, the transmission unit can simultaneously form a transmission state in which the driving force of the driving unit is transmitted to the second moving member and a blocking state in which transmission of the driving force from the driving unit to the first moving member is blocked. Therefore, the operation mode of stopping the first moving member while moving the second moving member can be achieved by one driving means. As a result, it is possible to reduce the product cost by reducing the number of driving means, while making it possible to exhibit the effects of the movement and stop of the first moving member and the second moving member.

  According to the gaming machine of claim 2, when the driving force of the driving means is generated, the driving force is transmitted to the first moving member by the first transmitting member and the second moving member by the second transmitting member. The first moving member and the second moving member are moved respectively.

  In this case, the first transmission member is formed such that the first driving member side member and the first moving member side member can be engaged with each other. Therefore, when the first driving member side member is rotated by the driving force of the driving member, The first moving member side member meshed with the first driving means side member is rotated, and the driving force is transmitted to the first moving member through the rotation of the first moving member side member. Is moved. In addition, since one of the first driving means side member or the first moving member side member includes a non-forming portion in which teeth are not formed, the first driving means side member is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and the first driving means side member is rotated. When the non-forming portion is arranged at the meshing position of the first driving means side member and the first moving member side member, the first driving means side member and the first moving member side member are incapable of meshing, and the driving means Transmission of the driving force to the first moving member is blocked (a blocked state is formed). That is, the formation of the blocking state by the first transmission member can be performed independently of the transmission of the driving force to the second moving member by the second transmission member. Thereby, the operation | movement aspect which stops a 1st moving member, moving a 2nd moving member can be achieved by one drive means.

  As described above, according to the gaming machine described in the gaming machine 2, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine according to claim 1, the first transmission member includes the first driving means side member and the first moving member side member, Since at least one of the first driving means side member or the first moving member side member is configured not to form teeth and a non-forming portion is provided, the relative relationship between the first driving means side member and the first moving member side member Depending on the correct rotation position (rotation position of the non-forming part), it is possible to switch between the blocking state and the transmission state. In other words, since the configuration for achieving the switching of the state does not require an actuator device and can be configured only from gears, the structure can be simplified and the product cost can be reduced.

  According to the gaming machine of the third aspect, when the transmission state in which the second transmission member transmits the driving force of the driving unit to the first moving member is formed by the first transmission member, Since it is possible to form a cut-off state that cuts off transmission of the driving force to the two moving members, an operation mode in which the second moving member is stopped while moving the first moving member can be achieved by one driving means. That is, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine according to claim 2, in addition to the effect (that is, the effect that the first moving member can be stopped by moving the second moving member while the first moving member is stopped), An operation mode of stopping the second moving member while moving the one moving member can be achieved by one driving means. Thereby, while reducing the number of drive means and reducing the product cost, the variation of the operation modes of the movement and stop of the first moving member and the second moving member can be increased, and the effect of the production can be enhanced. it can.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a front schematic diagram of a game board. It is a front perspective view of an operation unit. It is the disassembled front perspective view of the operation unit which looked at the disassembled operation unit from the front. It is the disassembled front perspective view of the operation unit which looked at the disassembled operation unit from the front. It is the disassembled front perspective view of the operation unit which looked at the disassembled operation unit from the front. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front perspective view of a rotation operation unit. It is a rear view of a rotation operation unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the rotational operation unit as seen from the front of the exploded rotational operation unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the rotational operation unit as seen from the front of the exploded rotational operation unit. (A) is a front view of a case body, (b) is a front view of a fixing member. It is a schematic diagram which illustrates typically the support structure by the case body of a 1st gearwheel, a 2nd gearwheel, and a 3rd gearwheel. It is a front perspective view of a compound operation unit. It is the disassembled front perspective view of the compound operation unit which looked at the compound operation unit which decomposed | disassembled front. It is a disassembled perspective view of the composite operation unit in a state where a part of the composite operation unit is disassembled. It is a front perspective view of an opening / closing first gear, an opening / closing second gear, a rotating first gear, and a rotating second gear. It is the elements on larger scale of the compound operation unit explaining the process of assembling the opening and closing 1st gear and the opening and closing 2nd gear, the rotation 1st gear, and the rotation 2nd gear to the 1st axis and the 2nd axis in time series. It is the elements on larger scale of the compound operation unit explaining the process of assembling the opening and closing 1st gear and the opening and closing 2nd gear, the rotation 1st gear, and the rotation 2nd gear to the 1st axis and the 2nd axis in time series. It is a disassembled front view of the compound operation unit for demonstrating the relative displacement state of the opening-and-closing 2nd gearwheel and a slide rack member with respect to a back arm body. It is a front view of the compound operation unit which illustrated opening and closing operation and rotation operation of an operation member in time series. It is a front schematic diagram of the compound operation unit which shows typically the meshing state of an opening-and-closing 1st gear and an opening-and-closing 2nd gear, and the meshing state of a rotation 1st gear and a rotation 2nd gear, respectively. It is a front schematic diagram of the compound operation unit which shows typically the meshing state of an opening-and-closing 1st gear and an opening-and-closing 2nd gear, and the meshing state of a rotation 1st gear and a rotation 2nd gear, respectively. It is a front schematic diagram of the compound operation unit which shows typically the meshing state of an opening-and-closing 1st gear and an opening-and-closing 2nd gear, and the meshing state of a rotation 1st gear and a rotation 2nd gear, respectively. It is a front view of the 1st joint operation unit and the 2nd joint operation unit in the state where the 1st engagement member and a pair of 2nd joint members are arranged in the retreat position. It is a front view of the 1st joint operation unit and the 2nd joint operation unit in the state where the 1st engagement member and a pair of 2nd joint members are arranged in the joint position. (A) is a front view of a 1st joint operation unit, (b) is a bottom view of the 1st joint operation unit in the arrow XXXb direction view of Drawing 33 (a). It is a disassembled front perspective view of a 1st joint operation | movement unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of the first combined operation unit. It is a rear view of a drive part. (A) is a front perspective view of a slide mechanism part, (b) is a back perspective view of a slide mechanism part. It is the front perspective view of the slide mechanism part which looked at the disassembled slide mechanism part from the front. It is the back perspective view of the slide mechanism part which looked back at the disassembled slide mechanism part. (A) is a front view of the first coupling operation unit in a state where the first coupling member is disposed at the retracted position, and (b) is a first coupling in a state where the first coupling member is disposed at the retracted position. It is a rear view of an operation unit. (A) is a front view of the 1st joint operation unit in the state where the 1st joint member was arranged in the joint position, (b) is the 1st joint in the state where the 1st joint member was arranged in the joint position It is a rear view of an operation unit. It is a front perspective view of the 2nd combined operation unit. (A) is a front view of a 2nd joint operation | movement unit, (b) is a rear view of a 2nd joint operation | movement unit. It is a front view of the 2nd combined operation unit. It is the model figure which looked at the 1st joint operation unit and the 2nd joint operation unit in the state where the 1st joint member and a pair of 2nd joint members are arranged in the joint position. It is a front perspective view of the annular operation unit in a state where the annular forming member is disposed at the retracted position. It is a front perspective view of the annular operation unit in a state where the annular forming member is arranged at the coupling position. It is the exploded front perspective view of the annular operation unit which looked at the exploded annular operation unit from the front. It is the exploded back perspective view of the annular operation unit which looked at the exploded annular operation unit from the back. (A) is a front perspective view of a link member, (b) is a rear perspective view of the link member, and (c) is a partially enlarged front perspective view of the link member at a portion Lc in FIG. 50 (a). FIG. 50D is a side view of the link member viewed in the direction of the arrow Ld in FIG. It is a partial expanded rear view of an annular motion unit. It is a back surface schematic diagram of a ring operation unit which illustrates typically a ring operation unit in which a pair of ring formation members are arranged in a retreat position. FIG. 53 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the annular motion unit taken along line LIII-LIII in FIG. 52. It is a back surface schematic diagram of a ring operation unit which illustrates typically a ring operation unit in which a pair of ring formation members are arranged in the middle of a retreat position and a joint position. It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of the annular | circular shaped operation unit in the LV-LV line | wire of FIG. It is a back surface schematic diagram of the annular motion unit which illustrates typically the annular motion unit in which a pair of annular formation members are arranged in a joint position. FIG. 57 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the annular motion unit taken along line LVII-LVII in FIG. 56. It is a front perspective view of the rocking | fluctuation operation | movement unit in the state in which the arm member was projected to the projecting position. FIG. 10 is a front perspective view of the swing operation unit 800 in a state where the arm member 820 is retracted to the retracted position. It is a front perspective view of the swing operation unit in a state where the arm member is retracted to the retracted position. It is the disassembled front perspective view of the rocking | fluctuation operation | movement unit which looked at the rocking | fluctuation operation | movement unit decomposed | disassembled front. (A) is a rear view of the swing operation unit in a state in which the arm member is disposed at the retracted position, and (b) is a partially enlarged rear view of the swing operation unit in the portion LXIb of FIG. 61 (a). is there. (A) is a rear view of the swing operation unit, and (b) is a partially enlarged rear view of the swing operation unit in the portion LXIIb of FIG. 62 (a). (A) is a rear view of the swing operation unit, and (b) is a partially enlarged rear view of the swing operation unit in the portion LXIIIb of FIG. 63 (a). (A) is a rear view of the swing operation unit, and (b) is a partially enlarged rear view of the swing operation unit in the portion LXIVb of FIG. 64 (a). It is a top view in the assembly state of the intermediate case body, back case body, and front case body in 2nd Embodiment. FIG. 66 is a cross-sectional view of the intermediate case body, the back case body, and the front case body taken along line LXVI-LXVI in FIG. 65. (A) is a side view of a link member, (b) is a top view in the assembly state of an intermediate case body, a back case body, and a front case body. It is a back perspective view of a raising / lowering base body. It is a back surface schematic diagram of a ring operation unit which illustrates typically a ring operation unit in which a pair of ring formation members are arranged in a retreat position. FIG. 70 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the annular motion unit taken along line LXX-LXX in FIG. 69. It is a back surface schematic diagram of the annular motion unit which illustrates typically the annular motion unit in which a pair of annular formation members are arranged in a joint position. FIG. 72 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the annular motion unit taken along line LXXI-LXXI in FIG. 71. (A) is a side view of the link member in 3rd Embodiment, (b) is a top view in the assembly state of an intermediate | middle case body, a back case body, and a front case body. It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of the annular motion unit in which a pair of annular forming members is disposed at the coupling position. It is a disassembled back perspective view of the 1st combined operation unit in a 4th embodiment. (A) is a front view of the first coupling operation unit in a state where the first coupling member is disposed at the retracted position, and (b) is a first coupling in a state where the first coupling member is disposed at the retracted position. It is a rear view of an operation unit. (A) is a front view of the 1st joint operation unit in the state where the 1st joint member was arranged in the joint position, (b) is the 1st joint in the state where the 1st joint member was arranged in the joint position It is a rear view of an operation unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of the 1st combined operation unit in a 5th embodiment. (A) is a front view of the first coupling operation unit in a state where the first coupling member is disposed at the retracted position, and (b) is a first coupling in a state where the first coupling member is disposed at the retracted position. It is a rear view of an operation unit. (A) is a front view of the 1st joint operation unit in the state where the 1st joint member was arranged in the joint position, (b) is the 1st joint in the state where the 1st joint member was arranged in the joint position It is a rear view of an operation unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of the 1st combined operation unit in a 6th embodiment. (A) is a front view of the first coupling operation unit in a state where the first coupling member is disposed at the retracted position, and (b) is a first coupling in a state where the first coupling member is disposed at the retracted position. It is a rear view of an operation unit. (A) is a front view of the 1st joint operation unit in the state where the 1st joint member was arranged in the joint position, (b) is the 1st joint in the state where the 1st joint member was arranged in the joint position It is a rear view of an operation unit. (A) to (c) is an exploded perspective view of the combined operation unit in the seventh embodiment, (A) to (c) is an exploded perspective view of the combined operation unit in the eighth embodiment. (A) to (c) is an exploded perspective view of the combined operation unit in the ninth embodiment. (A) is a front view of the 1st coupling member in 10th Embodiment, (b) is a bottom view of the 1st coupling member in the arrow LXXXVIIb direction view of Fig.87 (a). (A) is sectional drawing of the 1st coupling member in the LXXXVIIIa-LXXXVIIIa line in Fig.87 (a), (b) is sectional drawing of the 1st coupling member in the LXXXVIIIb-LXXXVIIIb line in Fig.87 (a). FIG. 88C is a cross-sectional view of the first coupling member taken along line LXXXVIIIc-LXXXVIIIc of FIG. 88A. (A) is the elements on larger scale of the 2nd joint operation unit, (b) is a top view of the 2nd joint member in the arrow LXXXIXb direction view of Drawing 89 (a). (A) is sectional drawing of the 2nd coupling member in the XCa-XCa line of Drawing 89 (b), and (b) is a sectional view of the 2nd coupling member in the XCb-XCb line of Drawing 90 (a). is there. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the 1st coupling member and the 2nd coupling member in the state arrange | positioned in a coupling position.

  Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIG. 1 to FIG. 35, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described as a first embodiment. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer shape that is substantially the same as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball ball game is played when a ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 has a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side of the front frame 14 are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower dish unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. 14 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window part 14c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central part thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes forward and the upper surface is opened, and prize balls and rental balls are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the sphere thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4). A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the contents of the effect of super reach. The

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around it (for example, a corner portion). These light-emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game during the game by changing or controlling the light-emitting mode by turning on or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpot or reach effects. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has built-in light emitting means such as LEDs and can display the payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, on the lower side of the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 (see FIG. 2) can be visually recognized from the front surface of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin that is chrome-plated is attached to an area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, Loans are made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing a ball that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface. Yes. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 that is operated by a player to drive a ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is disposed.

  Inside the operation handle 51, a touch sensor 51a for permitting driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of movement (rotation position) based on a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation. The resistance value of the variable resistor A ball is fired with a strength corresponding to (shooting strength), and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

  In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the right direction. By sliding the ball release lever 52 in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “a thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of nails (not shown) for ball guidance, windmills, rails 61 and 62, and general prizes. It is configured by assembling a mouth 63, a first prize opening 64, a second prize opening 640, a first variable prize winning device 65, a second variable prize winning device 650, a through gate 67, a variable display device unit 80, etc. It is attached to the back side of the frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side. The general winning port 63, the first winning port 64, the second winning port 640, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650, and the variable display device unit 80 are formed in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. And is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by a tapping screw or the like.

  The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the strip-shaped metal plate is located on the inner side of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and rear. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area formed on the front surface of the game board 13 and defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 that connects the rails (a winning opening is provided and fired). Area where the falling sphere flows).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere, and the ball launched at a predetermined momentum or more hits the return rubber 69 and gains momentum. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated.

  First symbol display devices 37A and 37B each having a plurality of LEDs and a 7-segment display as light emitting means are disposed in the lower left portion of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left portion in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37 </ b> A and 37 </ b> B are configured to be selectively used depending on whether the ball has won the first prize opening 64 or the second prize opening 640. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the first symbol display device 37A operates. The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

  In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B indicate, by means of LEDs, whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the process of changing the probability, in the short time, or in the normal state by a lighting state, or whether the pachinko machine 10 is changing, by a lighting state. , Indicating whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probable jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, or a symbol that is out of place by a lighting state, indicating the number of held balls by a lighting state, and a 7-segment display device, Displays numbers and errors. The plurality of LEDs are configured to have different emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of each LED, and the combination of the emission colors may suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

  In the present pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed in response to winning of the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and also determines the type of the big hit if it is determined to be a big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the lottery result is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the variation, but if it is a jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed. .

  Here, the “15R probability variation jackpot” is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot of 15 rounds, and “4R probability variation jackpot” is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of four. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after. In addition, “15R normal jackpot” is a jackpot that shifts to a low probability state after the maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds and hits a short time during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). is there.

  In addition, the “high probability state” means a state in which the jackpot probability thereafter increases as an added value after the jackpot ends, that is, when the probability change is in progress (probability change), in other words, a game that easily shifts to the special game state. It is a state of. The high probability state (during probability change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the hit probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640. The “low probability state” refers to a time when the probability of jackpot change is not occurring, and a state where the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state where the jackpot probability is lower than that at the time of probability change. The short time state (short time medium) of the “low probability state” means that the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains as it is, and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased, and the second prize opening 640 is obtained. It means the state of the game where the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state is a game state (a state where neither the big hit probability nor the second symbol hit probability is increased) which is neither probabilistic nor short in time.

  During probability change and time reduction, not only does the probability of winning the second symbol increase, but also the time for opening the electric accessory 640a associated with the second prize opening 640 is changed, and the time is longer than normal. Is set. When the electric accessory 640a is in the opened state (open state), the ball wins the second winning opening 640 as compared to the case where the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). Easy state. Therefore, during the probability change or the short time, it becomes easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640, and the number of jackpot lotteries can be increased.

  In addition, during the probability change or during the short time, it is not necessary to change the opening time of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second prize opening 640, or in addition to changing the opening time, It is good also as what changes the frequency | count that the accessory 640a opens more than usual. In addition, the probability of winning the second symbol is not changed during the probability change or in the short time, and the electric accessory 640a is released at the time when the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened and once. It is good also as what changes at least one of the frequency | counts. In addition, during the probability change or in the short time, the time of opening the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 or the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a per time is not counted, and the second symbol hit Only the probability may be changed so as to increase compared to the normal rate.

  The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning ports 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is synchronized with the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B by using a winning (start winning) at the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 as a trigger. It is composed of a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) that performs variable display, and an LED that displays the second symbol in a variable manner with the passage of a sphere of the through gate 67 as a trigger. A second symbol display device (not shown) is provided. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 is constituted by a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4). One symbol row is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol). These third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol column, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is like that. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B in accordance with the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4). The decorative display according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Instead of the display device, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel.

  Each time the sphere passes through the through gate 67, the second symbol display device alternately turns on the symbol “◯” and the symbol “X” as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time. A variable display is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning symbol is a winning symbol, the symbol “◯” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation of the second symbol is displayed. Further, if the winning lottery results, the symbol of “x” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation of the third symbol is displayed.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol “◯”), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is displayed for a predetermined time. It is configured to be in an activated state (opened) only.

  The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or during the shorter time than when the game state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and during the time reduction, since the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, the winning lottery can be performed more than during normal. Therefore, since the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, it is possible to give the player a lot of opportunities for the electric winning component 640a of the second winning opening 640 to be in an open state. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to win the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and during the short time.

  It is to be noted that the probability of winning is increased during probability change or time reduction, and other methods such as increasing the opening time and the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 640a per hit are also used to reach the second prize opening 640 during probability change or time reduction. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for displaying the variation of the second symbol is set shorter than normal during probability change or short time, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, The opening time and the number of opening times of the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board on the right side in the lower area of the variable display device unit 80, and a part of the ball flowing down to the right side of the game board can pass through the balls launched to the game board. It is configured. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery of the second symbol is performed. After winning the lottery, the 2nd symbol display device displays a variation, and if the winning lottery results, the symbol “○” is displayed as the variable display stop symbol, and the winning lottery result may be off For example, the symbol “x” is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display.

  The total number of passes through the through-gate 67 of the sphere is held up to a maximum of 4 times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-described first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and at the second symbol hold lamp (not shown). Is also displayed. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  Note that the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol. A part of the symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of balls held for passing through the ball of the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). Further, the number of through gates 67 to be assembled is not limited to one, and may be plural (for example, two). Further, the assembly position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and may be the left side of the variable display device unit 80, for example. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol hold lamp may not perform lighting display.

  Below the variable display unit 80, a first winning port 64 through which a ball can win is disposed. When a ball wins the first winning port 64, a first winning port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused by the first winning port switch being turned on. A jackpot lottery is made (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

  On the other hand, a second winning port 640 through which a ball can win is disposed on the right side of the first winning port 64 in front view. When a ball wins the second prize opening 640, a second prize opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused by the second prize opening switch being turned on. A jackpot lottery is performed (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

  Each of the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 is also one of winning ports from which five balls are paid out as winning balls when a ball is won. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the first prize opening 64 and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the second prize slot 640 are configured to be the same. The number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the first prize opening 64 is different from the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins to the second prize opening 640, for example, the ball to the first prize opening 64 The number of prize balls to be paid out when a prize is won may be three, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the second prize opening 640 may be five.

  The second winning opening 640 is accompanied by an electric accessory 640a. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable. Normally, the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), and it is difficult for the ball to win the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, when the symbol “◯” is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol that is triggered by the passage of the ball to the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a is in an open state (enlarged) State), and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640.

  As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than that during normal change during the probability change and the short time, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short. "Is easily displayed, and the number of times that the electric accessory 640a is opened (enlarged) is increased. Further, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a also becomes longer than during the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state where the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and during the short time compared to the normal time.

  Here, the probability of winning a big hit is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state when the ball wins the first winning port 64 and when the ball wins the second winning port 640. However, the probability that a 15R probability variation jackpot is selected as the jackpot type selected when the jackpot is won is higher when the ball wins the second winning slot 640 than when the ball wins the first winning slot 64. Is set. On the other hand, the first winning port 64 does not have an electric accessory as in the second winning port 640, and the ball is in a state in which a ball can always be won.

  Therefore, during normal times, the electric winnings associated with the second winning opening 640 are often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640. Then, the ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called “left-handed”), and a lot of opportunities for lottery wins are obtained by winning at the first winning opening 64, resulting in a big hit It is advantageous for the player to aim for this.

  On the other hand, during the probability change or during the short time, passing the ball through the through gate 67 makes it easy for the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 to be in an open state and to easily win the second winning opening 640. Therefore, the ball is fired toward the second prize opening 640 so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called “right-handed”), and is passed through the through gate 67 to open the electric accessory. In addition, it is more advantageous for the player to aim for a 15R probability variation jackpot by winning the second winning opening 640.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment launches a ball to the player in accordance with the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is probable, short, or normal). Can be changed between “left-handed” and “right-handed”. Thus, the player can be changed in the way the ball is hit, so that the game can be enjoyed.

  A first variable winning device 65 is disposed on the lower right side of the first winning port 64, and a horizontally elongated first specific winning port (large opening port) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. Further, a second variable winning device 650 is disposed on the lower left side of the first winning port 64, and has a circular shape having the same size as the other winning ports 63, 64, and 640 at a substantially central portion thereof. A second specific winning opening 650a is provided. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning at the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 becomes a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has passed, The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on, and a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. As this special gaming state, the special winning openings 65a and 650a that are normally closed are opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or 10 balls have been won).

  The specific winning ports 65a and 650a are closed when a predetermined time elapses, and after the closing, the specific winning ports 65a and 650a are opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning ports 65a and 650a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which the opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is given out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a gaming value (game value). Is done.

  Specifically, the first variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally-long rectangular opening / closing plate covering the first specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid for driving the opening / closing operation forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. (Not shown). The first specific winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state where the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big win, the large opening opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate downward, and the ball is temporarily formed in an open state in which it is easy to win the first specific winning opening 65a. It operates so as to alternately repeat the closed state and the closed state.

  Specifically, the second variable winning device 650 is an opening that is a guide path that guides the ball to the second specific winning port 650a and an opening that is on the opposite side of the guide path from the second specific winning port 650a side. 651, a driving member 650b for opening and closing the opening 651, and a small opening solenoid (not shown) for driving the driving member 650b to open and close in the horizontal direction about the lower side of the opening 651 And. The second specific winning opening 650a is normally in a closed state where the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the small opening opening solenoid is driven to tilt the driving tool 650b to the right, and an open state in which the ball is likely to win the second specific winning opening 650a is temporarily formed. It operates so as to alternately repeat the state of closed time.

  Note that the special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. When the game area is provided with a large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning openings 65a and 650a, and the LED corresponding to the jackpot is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning openings 65a and 650a are set for a predetermined time. A large opening provided separately from the specific winning ports 65a and 650a is triggered for a predetermined time when the ball wins into the specific winning ports 65a and 650a while the specific winning ports 65a and 650a are opened. A gaming state that is released a predetermined number of times may be formed as a special gaming state. Further, the number of the specific winning openings 65a and 650a is not limited to one, and one or a plurality of plural (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is the lower right side of the first winning opening 64, For example, the left side of the variable display unit 80 is not limited to the lower left side of the first winning port 64.

  A sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate paper, an identification label or the like is provided at the lower right corner of the game board 13, and the certificate paper or the like attached to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. 35 (see FIG. 1).

  The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 71 and a second out port 72. Balls that flow down the game area and have not won any of the winning holes 63, 64, 65a, 640, 650a are discharged through the first out port 71 or the second out port 72 (not shown). Guided to the road. The first out port 71 is disposed below the first winning port 64, while the second out port 72 is disposed on the left side of the second specific winning port 650a. That is, the second out port 72 is disposed on the opposite side of the first out port 71 with the second specific winning port 650a interposed therebetween.

  Therefore, a sphere that flows down the game area and reaches the lower end (inner rail 61 or outer edge member 73) of the game area on the right side (right side in FIG. 2) in front of the second specific prize opening 650a, 61 or the outer edge member 73 is flowed along the inclination of the outer edge member 73 and guided to the ball discharge path through the first out port 71, while the lower end of the game area (inner rail 61 on the left side of the front view from the second specific winning port 650a). ) That has reached () flows down along the inclination (curvature) of the inner rail 61 and is guided to the ball discharge path through the second out port 72.

  A number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (acts) such as a windmill are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control apparatus 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This seal seal is made of a brittle material. If the seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100, 102, or if the substrate boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are removed. Cut to the side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

  The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out a ball by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated, for example, to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. In the main control device 110, the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as jackpot lottery, display setting in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device are performed by the MPU 201. Execute.

  Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

  The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. And a work area (work area) in which values are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by a main process (not shown), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, a second symbol display device, a second symbol holding lamp, and a lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 made up of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the MPU 201 via the input / output port 205. Send.

  The input / output port 205 includes a switch group (not shown), various switches 208 including a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115. Are connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. . The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotation (rotation position) of the handle 51, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (lighting units 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and fluctuating effects (fluctuation). Display) and setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as a notice effect. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. Main controller 110, display controller 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, other device 228, frame button 22 and the like are connected to input / output port 225, respectively. Other devices 228 include drive motors 340, 430, 522, 640, 740, 830.

  The sound lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and uses the determined display mode as a command. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the player operates the frame button 22, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or the super reach is performed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the production contents at the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the rear image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113.

  Further, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display command received from the display control device 114, The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 can produce a variation effect of the third symbol. The display is controlled. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by the display command, thereby matching the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the voice output from the voice output device 226. be able to.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM deletion switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in the voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 as necessary voltages.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to device 111.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 5, the layout (arrangement) of each component such as the winning ports 63, 64, 65 a, 640, 650 a and the out ports 71, 72 in the game board 13 will be described. FIG. 5 is a schematic front view of the game board 13. In addition, in FIG. 5, while each structure, such as winning opening 63, 64, 65a, 640, 650a, is illustrated typically, a part of game board 13 is partially expanded and illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the inner rail 61 has a portion disposed on the lower right side (a portion on the right side of the first out port 71) in a front view of the game area and extends linearly. It is formed to be inclined upward in the direction away from the 1-out port 71.

  Between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62, a resin outer edge member 73 that defines the outer edge of the game area together with the two rails 61 and 62 is disposed. The The outer edge member 73 has an arcuate wall 73a formed by providing an arcuate wall surface extending from the outer rail 62 on the inner surface side, and is continuously provided below the arcuate wall 73a in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 5). A vertical wall portion 73b formed by providing a wall surface extending linearly along the inner surface side, and extending linearly while being inclined downward toward the inner rail 61 and continuously provided below the vertical wall portion 73b. It consists of the inclined wall part 73c formed by providing the wall surface provided in an inner surface side.

  In this way, the game area defined by the inner rail 61, the outer rail 62, and the outer edge member 73 has a substantially circular part (lower right part in FIG. 5) formed in a substantially rectangular shape and expanded outward. Shaped. Specifically, a region defined by the linear portion of the inner rail 61 disposed on the right side of the first out port 71 and the inclined wall portion 73c and the vertical wall portion 73b of the outer edge member 73 is substantially rectangular. Formed.

  Thereby, compared with the case where the game area is formed in a substantially circular shape obtained by extending the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, the game area as a whole is provided by the provision of a substantially rectangular area (lower right portion in FIG. 5). The area can be enlarged. Therefore, the enlarged area is used as a space for arranging the general winning port 63, the first winning port 64, the second winning port 640, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650, the through gate 67, and the like. Or it can utilize as a space for forming the path | route which flows down a ball | bowl, and the freedom degree of arrangement | positioning, such as each winning opening 63, 64, 65a, 640, 650a, the flow path | route of a ball | bowl, can be raised. As a result, the position of the lower edge of the third symbol display device 81 can be lowered (lower side in FIG. 5), so that the size of the third symbol display device 81 can be increased accordingly.

  That is, in the conventional pachinko machine, the first winning port 64, the second winning port 640, and the variable winning device 65 are arranged in series along the vertical direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 5) below the third symbol display device 81. It was. For this reason, the necessary space below the third symbol display device 81 is increased in the vertical direction, and the increase in size of the third symbol display device 81 is hindered.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming board 13 of the present embodiment, an enlarged portion of the gaming area (substantially rectangular area, the lower right portion in FIG. 5) is formed as an arrangement space such as a prize opening or a flow path of a ball. It can be used as a space. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the second winning opening 640 and the first variable winning device 65 are arranged not in the immediate vicinity of the first winning opening 64 but in the enlarged portion of the game area described above. Accordingly, since the position of the first winning port 64 can be lowered downward, the size of the third symbol display device 81 can be increased.

  Further, according to the gaming machine 13 of the present embodiment, the second specific prize opening 650a is not directly below the first prize opening 64, but on the one side in the width direction of the game area with respect to the first prize opening 64 (variable prize apparatus). The ball is not allowed to pass between the position that is offset to the opposite side of 65 (left side in FIG. 5) and abuts against the inner rail 61 (the lower edge of the game area) (that is, between the second specific prize opening 650a and the inner rail 61). Is located). Accordingly, since the position of the first winning port 64 can be lowered downward, the size of the third symbol display device 81 can be increased.

  In this case, according to the gaming board 13 of the present embodiment, the path for discharging the ball from the gaming area to the ball discharge path is provided at two places (the first out port 71 and the second out port 72). Further enlargement of the three-symbol display device 81 is possible.

  That is, in order to increase the size of the 3rd symbol display device 81, the position of the lower edge of the 3rd symbol display device 81 is lowered downward, and accordingly, the position of the winning opening needs to be lowered. For example, when the position of the first winning port 64 is lowered, the guide plate member 74 (a member that guides the right-handed ball (the ball that has passed rightward of the variable display device unit 80) to the second specific winning port 650a. ) Also needs to be lowered in order to secure a space for the ball to flow down from the first winning port 64, and as a result, the position of the second specific winning port 650a also needs to be lowered.

  However, if the position of the second specific winning opening 650a is lowered too much, it is not possible to secure a space for flowing the ball below the second specific winning opening 650a (between the inner rail 61). In other words, the ball that has flowed down without winning the prize winning opening cannot be discharged from the out opening arranged below the first winning prize opening 64. For this reason, there is a limit to lowering the position of the second specific prize winning opening 650a downward, which becomes a factor that the third symbol display device 81 cannot be sufficiently enlarged.

  On the other hand, according to the game board 13 of the present embodiment, as described above, in addition to the first out port 71, the second out port 72 sandwiches the second specific winning port 650a and the first out port 71. (Ie, the first out port 71 and the second out port 72 are respectively disposed on the right side and the left side of the second specific winning port 650a), so that the ball flows down in the game area. The ball that has reached the lower end (inner rail 61 or outer edge member 73) of the game area on the right side (right side in FIG. 5) from the second specific winning opening 650a is inclined to the inner rail 61 or outer edge member 73. The ball that reaches the lower end (inner rail 61) of the game area on the left side of the front view from the second specific winning port 650a is allowed to flow down along the inner rail 61. Flow along a slope (curvature) Is allowed, it can be discharged from the second out-port 72 to the spherical discharge passage.

  Thus, by providing two paths (first out port 71 and second out port 72) for discharging the ball from the game area to the ball discharge path, the second specific winning port 650a (inner rail) 61), it is unnecessary to secure a space for the sphere to flow down. Therefore, since the position of the 2nd specific prize opening 650a can be lowered further (closer to the inner rail 61 or connected), the position of the guide plate member 75 can be lowered accordingly, and consequently Since the position of the first winning port 64 can be lowered, the size of the third symbol display device 81 can be further increased accordingly.

  In the present embodiment, the second prize winning port 640 and the first specific prize winning port 65a are arranged offset to the right side of the board surface, and the second specific prize winning port 650a is offset to the left side of the board surface and close to the inner rail 61. By being arranged (or abutting), it is possible to more effectively perform the effect by the rotary operation unit 300.

  That is, when the player makes a right strike, only the right side of the board on which the ball flows down is noticed by the player, and in particular, for the ball that has not been awarded to the second prize opening 640, The downflow is rarely noticed by players. In this case, in this embodiment, among the spheres that have passed to the right of the variable display device unit 80, the sphere that has passed from the right to the left above the second winning opening 640 has passed above the guide plate member 74, It flows down toward the second specific prize winning opening 650a. For this reason, even when the second prize opening 640 has not been won, an opportunity to win the second specific prize opening 650a is generated, and the second prize winning expectation to the second specific prize opening 650a is expected to be the second. It is possible to make the player pay attention to the sphere that has passed from the right to the left above the winning opening 640 (the line of sight is directed). Accordingly, the player's line of sight can be directed toward the center of the board surface below the variable display device unit 80. As will be described later, in the present embodiment, the rotary operation unit 300 is disposed on the back side of the first winning opening 64, and the rotary operation unit 300 is visible through the game board 13 (through the game board 13). Therefore, when a ball that has not been won at the second prize opening 640 flows down toward the second specific prize opening 650a, the player also visually recognizes the effect by the rotation operation unit 300, and the rotation operation is performed. The production effect of the unit 300 can be enhanced.

  As described above, in the game board 13, the base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and the player can visually recognize the rotary operation unit 300 disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side. Is possible. Here, the rotation operation unit 300 is a device that is operated in response to winning in the first winning opening 64 or in response to a result of a lottery by winning, and on the back side of the game board 13 (base plate 60), It is arranged at a position corresponding to one winning opening 64.

  Therefore, for the player who follows the ball flowing toward the first winning port 64, especially when the ball wins the first winning port 64, the rotation operation is performed behind the first winning port 64. Since the effect by the unit 300 can be visually recognized, the effect accompanying the winning of the ball to the first winning opening 64 can be effectively performed. The detailed configuration of the rotation operation unit 300 will be described later.

  In this case, since the second winning port 640 and the first variable winning device 65 are offset with respect to the first winning port 64 in the left-right direction (the width direction of the game area, the right direction in FIG. 5), The positions of the first winning port 64 and the rotary operation unit 300 can be lowered (lower side in FIG. 5), and as a result, the rotary operation unit 300 is located at a position corresponding to the first winning port 64 and the gaming board 13. Even when it is disposed on the back side of the (base plate 60), the size of the third symbol display device 81 can be increased.

  That is, when the first winning port 64, the second winning port 640, and the first variable winning device 65 are arranged in series in the vertical direction as in a conventional pachinko machine, the position corresponding to the first winning port 64 In this case, the rotation operation unit 300 is disposed on the back side of the game board 13 (base plate 60) because the rotation operation unit 300 interferes with the second winning port 640 and the first variable winning device 65. The space required for the arrangement of the winning port 64, the second winning port 640, and the first variable winning device 65 is increased in the vertical direction, which obstructs the increase in the size of the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, according to the game board 13 of the present embodiment, as described above, the second winning port 640, the first variable winning device 65, and the second variable winning device 650 are in the horizontal direction with respect to the first winning port 64. Since it is arranged offset (in the width direction of the game area), the interference between the second winning port 640, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650 and the rotary operation unit 300 can be avoided. Thus, the position of the first winning port 64 can be lowered downward, and the size of the third symbol display device 81 can be increased.

  In particular, the first variable winning device 65 is offset to the right side by using a substantially rectangular area on the lower right side of the game area, so that the offset amount can be sufficiently secured and the second variable With respect to the winning device 650, the second out port 72 is provided in addition to the first out port 71, so that the position can be lowered downward without taking into account the space below for the ball to flow down. it can. Thereby, since the space for arrange | positioning the rotation operation unit 300 can be ensured more widely, the contradictory subject of the enlargement of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 and the enlargement of the rotation operation unit 300 can be solved. As a result, the effect of both the effect by the third symbol display device 81 and the effect by the rotary operation unit 300 can be enhanced.

  Here, the rotation operation unit 300 is formed in a substantially circular shape that can rotate around the first winning port 64. Thereby, the whole circumference | surroundings surrounding the 1st winning opening 64 can be made into the area | region for production. That is, the player can visually recognize the effect by the rotary operation unit 300 on the back side of the first winning port 64. Therefore, in the case where the production starts with the winning of the first prize opening 64 as a trigger, the production is performed in an area centered on the first prize opening 64 where the ball has entered, whereby the first prize opening 64 is obtained. The production effect of the production accompanying winning a prize can be enhanced.

  In addition, when the player starts to win a ball to the first winning opening 64 when the state (for example, the rotation position or the lighting state) of the rotation operation unit 300 becomes a predetermined state, A game ball can be made to enter the center of the object (the rotary motion unit 300 in a predetermined state) that is being visually recognized by the player, and the effect of staging by the rotary motion unit 300 can be enhanced. .

  Furthermore, since the rotary operation unit 300 is formed in a substantially circular shape as described above, the space around the rotary operation unit 300 can be effectively used, and the arrangement space for other prize winning holes and the like can be efficiently used. Can be secured. In particular, the space for arranging the second variable winning device 650 can be efficiently secured. In other words, the first variable winning device 65 can be offset to the right side with respect to the first winning port 64 by using the area that is enlarged in a substantially rectangular shape on the lower right side of the game area. While it is relatively easy to secure, the second variable winning device 650 is difficult to secure a sufficient amount of offset to the left with respect to the first winning port 64 because the inner rail 61 is curved in an arc shape. Become. In this case, since the rotary operation unit 300 has a substantially circular shape, a space for disposing the second variable winning device 650 is efficiently provided between the inner rail 61 and the lower left side of the rotary operation unit 300. Can be secured.

  Further, since the rotational operation unit 300 is formed in a substantially circular shape centering on the first winning opening 64, the rotational operation unit 300 can be disposed at the approximate center in the width direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 5) of the game area. it can. That is, the center of the rotational operation unit 300 can be arranged on the imaginary line where the distance between the lower edge of the third symbol display device 81 and the inner rail 61 (the distance in the vertical direction in FIG. 5) is maximum. Therefore, the space of the game area can be effectively utilized while increasing the size of the third symbol display device 81, so that the space for disposing the rotation operation unit 300 can be secured more widely and the rotation operation can be performed. The unit 300 can be increased in size efficiently.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the second winning port 640 is not directly below the first winning port 64, but on the other side in the width direction of the game area with respect to the first winning port 64 (the first variable winning device 65 side). The right side of FIG. In this case, the second winning opening 640 is disposed in such a posture that the opening 641 faces the other side in the width direction of the gaming area (the first variable winning device 65 side, the right side in FIG. 5). Accordingly, it is not necessary to provide a space for allowing the ball to flow down to win the second winning port 640 above the second winning port 640, and accordingly, the position of the lower edge of the third symbol display device 81 correspondingly. Can be lowered downward. As a result, the size of the third symbol display device 81 can be increased.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the second specific prize opening 650a is not directly below the first prize opening 64, but on the one side in the width direction of the game area (the first variable prize) with respect to the first prize opening 64. Opposite to the device 65, the left side of FIG. In this case, the second specific winning opening 650a is arranged in such a posture that the opening 651 faces the other side in the width direction of the gaming area (the first variable winning device 65 side, the right side in FIG. 5). Accordingly, it is unnecessary to provide a space for the ball to flow down to win the second specific winning port 650a above the second specific winning port 650a, and accordingly, the lower edge of the third symbol display device 81. The position of can be lowered downward. As a result, the size of the third symbol display device 81 can be increased.

  That is, when the opening 641 of the second winning opening 640 and the opening 651 of the second specific winning opening 650a are arranged in a posture facing the upper side of the game area (upper side in FIG. 5), a space for allowing the ball to flow down is provided. It is necessary to ensure the position directly above the openings 641 and 651, and accordingly, it is necessary to raise the position of the lower edge of the third symbol display device 81, and the size of the third symbol display device 81 is hindered. On the other hand, when the openings 641 and 651 face the other side in the width direction of the game area as in this embodiment, a space for flowing down the ball is obliquely above the openings 641 and 651 (upper right side in FIG. 5). Therefore, the position of the lower edge of the third symbol display device 81 can be lowered downward. As a result, the size of the third symbol display device 81 can be increased.

  As described above, when the openings 641 and 651 face the other side in the width direction of the game area, the electric winnings 640a and 650b are not placed directly above the second prize winning opening 640 and the second specific winning prize opening 650a. It can arrange | position to the side of the winning opening 640 and the 2nd specific winning opening 650a. That is, it is not necessary to secure the space for arranging the electric winnings 640a and 650b directly above the second winning port 640 and the second specific winning port 650a, and accordingly, the position of the lower edge of the third symbol display device 81 is lowered. Can be lowered. As a result, the size of the third symbol display device 81 can be further increased.

  Furthermore, since the openings 641 and 651 face the other side in the width direction of the game area, it is not necessary to provide a pair of electric accessories 640a and 650b for opening and closing the openings 641 and 651, and only one side is provided. be able to. As a result, the capacity required for the driving means (for example, solenoid) for driving the electric accessories 640a and 650b can be reduced, and the component cost can be reduced. At the same time, energy consumption can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the opening 641 faces the other side in the width direction of the game area, it is possible to prevent the difficulty of winning the prize to the second prize opening 640 from excessively decreasing. That is, in this embodiment, since the position of the lower edge of the 3rd symbol display device 81 is lowered, the arrangement space for the winning opening etc. is limited, and the arrangement positions of the second winning opening 640 and the through gate 67 are limited. The interval is narrowed. Therefore, compared with the conventional pachinko machine in which the first winning port 64, the second winning port 640, and the first variable winning device 65 are arranged in series in the vertical direction, the difficulty level of entering the second winning port 640 is more difficult. There is a risk of lowering the gameability. Therefore, when the opening 641 is formed so as to face the other side in the width direction of the game area, it is possible to prevent the ball from winning from directly above the second winning opening 640 and the electric accessory 640a is in the open state. It is possible to make it possible to win a prize at the second winning opening 640 only. As a result, it is possible to prevent the difficulty of winning a prize to the second prize opening 640 from decreasing, and to improve the game playability.

  In addition, since the opening 651 faces the other side in the width direction of the game area, even if the distance from the opening 651 of the second specific winning opening 650a to the second specific winning opening 650a (the horizontal dimension in FIG. 5) is increased, It does not affect the distance between the third symbol display device 81 and the second specific prize opening 650a. Therefore, while increasing the size of the third symbol display device 81, the sensor device 652 for detecting the winning of a ball to the second specific winning opening 650a is disposed between the opening 651 and the second specific winning opening 650a. Can do. Thereby, since the detection speed that the ball has won the second specific winning opening 650a can be increased, it is possible to enhance the player's feeling of exaltation accompanying the winning.

  In addition to this, it is possible to prevent over-winning to the second specific winning port 650a. That is, in the case where the second specific prize opening 650a is configured to be closed when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls has won the opened second specific prize opening 650a, It is desirable that the driving member 650b is closed as soon as the ball wins. However, when the sensor device 652 is disposed behind the base plate 60, the distance from the opening 651 to the sensor device 652 is increased.

  Therefore, the period until the tenth sphere passes through the opening 651 and reaches the sensor device 652, that is, the period during which the driving agent 650 b is in the open state, becomes longer. There is a possibility that a state where a prize can be won is formed in the second specific prize opening 650a over a long period of time and the game is not fair.

  On the other hand, according to the game board 13 of the present embodiment, as described above, the sensor device 652 that detects the winning of the ball to the second specific winning opening 650a is between the opening 651 and the second specific winning opening 650a. Therefore, the period until the sensor device 652 detects the sphere that has passed through the opening 651 can be shortened. This makes it difficult for the eleventh and subsequent balls to win from the opening 651, thereby preventing over-winning.

  Here, in the gaming board 13 of the present embodiment, the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a are arranged offset in the left and right (other side and one side) directions of the gaming board 13, respectively. This allows the player to make a left-right distinction and contributes to improved game playability.

  That is, in the game board 13 of this embodiment, it is easier to win the first specific prize opening 65a by passing the right side of the variable display unit 80, while the variable display device is provided to the second specific prize opening 650a. The arrangement is such that the player who passes the left side of the unit 80 is more likely to win a prize. Which specific prize opening is to be opened is determined by the jackpot stop pattern at that time, and the player will divide left and right in order to aim at the specific prize opening on the side to be opened.

  Which specific prize opening is opened can be set in units of the number of times (round) for each jackpot stop symbol, so only the first specific prize opening 65a or the second specific prize opening 650a may be opened each time. On the other hand, the first specific winning port 65a and the second specific winning port 650a may be alternately opened every number of times (rounds).

  Therefore, the player needs to confirm which specific winning opening is opened in rounds, and to distinguish between the left and right in order to aim at the opened special winning opening. This has the effect of attracting attention not only to the other side but also to the other side. That is, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player pays attention only to one side or the other side of the game board 13 and to create a situation in which the rotary operation unit 300 disposed behind the first winning port 64 enters the field of view. Thus, attention can be paid to the rotary operation unit 300, and the effect of the presentation can be improved.

  Also, by making the decision to divide left and right for each jackpot number (round), it is possible to prevent the player from being bored, and by allowing the player to divide left and right, the same posture A feeling of fatigue caused by playing a game can be alleviated.

  Next, the operation unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. First, with reference to FIGS. 6 to 9, a housing structure for the units 300 to 800 in the back case 210 will be described.

  6 is a front perspective view of the operation unit 200, and FIGS. 7 to 9 are exploded front perspective views of the operation unit 200 when the operation unit 200 is viewed from the front. 8 illustrates a state in which the swing operation unit 800, the annular operation unit 700, and the first combined operation unit 500 are mounted on the back case 210. In FIG. 9, in addition to the mounting state illustrated in FIG. Further, a state in which the second combined operation unit 600 and the composite operation unit 400 are mounted on the back case 210 is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 6 to 9, the operation unit 200 is opened on one side (the front side in FIG. 7) from the bottom wall portion 211 and the outer wall portion 212 erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion 211. A back case 210 formed in a box shape is provided. The rear case 210 is formed in a rectangular frame shape when viewed from the front by forming a rectangular opening 211a at the center of the bottom wall portion 211 thereof. The opening 211a is formed in a size corresponding to the outer shape of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) (that is, the third symbol display device 81 can be disposed).

  The operation unit 200 includes a rotation operation unit 300, a composite operation unit 400, a first combined operation unit 500, a second combined operation unit 600, an annular operation unit 700, and a swing operation unit 800 in the inner space of the rear case 210. It is accommodated and is configured as one unit.

  Specifically, the first combined operation unit 500 is at a position above the opening 211a, the annular operation unit 700 is at a position below the opening 211a, and the swing operation unit 800 is at a position at the left and right of the opening 211a. These are respectively disposed on the bottom wall portion 211 of the back case 210 (see FIG. 8).

  In contrast to the state shown in FIG. 8, the second combined operation unit 600 is disposed on the front surface side of the annular operation unit 700, and the composite operation unit 500 is disposed on the front surface side of the swing operation unit 800 in a stacked state. And accommodated in the back case 210 (see FIG. 9). In contrast to the state shown in FIG. 9, the rotary operation unit 300 is disposed in a stacked state on the front side of the second combined operation unit 600 and accommodated in the back case 210 (see FIG. 6).

  Thus, in the present embodiment, a predetermined operation unit (for example, the second combined operation unit 600) is arranged in a stacked state in which another operation unit (for example, the rotation operation unit 300) is superimposed on the front side. Therefore, in a front view, at least a part of the predetermined operation unit (for example, the front case body 612 of the second combined operation unit 600, see FIG. 42) can be shielded by another operation unit.

  In other words, when the game board 13 is formed of a light transmissive material and the player can visually recognize the operation unit disposed on the back side of the game board 13, only a necessary part of the predetermined operation unit is required. Can be visually recognized by the player, and other parts can be shielded from the player by other operation units. Thereby, since it is not necessary to design the predetermined effect member shielded by the other operation unit on the assumption that the whole is visually recognized by the player, the degree of freedom in the design can be improved. .

  Next, an outline of an operation mode of each of the units 300 to 800 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 13. In the description of FIGS. 10 to 13, FIGS. 6 to 9 are appropriately referred to.

  10 to 13 are front views of the operation unit 200. FIG. 10 shows a state in which the ring forming member 790 of the ring operation unit 700 is arranged at the coupling position, and FIG. 11 shows a state in which the arm member 820 of the swing operation unit 800 is arranged in the extended position. 12 shows a state in which the first engagement member 539 of the first coupling operation unit 500 and the second coupling member 630 of the second coupling operation unit 600 are arranged at the coupling position. In FIG. The state in which 492 is disposed at the overhang position is illustrated.

  The ring operating unit 700 includes a pair of ring forming members 790 and moves (displaces) the pair of ring forming members 790 between the retracted position shown in FIG. 8 and the coupled position shown in FIG. In the retracted position shown in FIG. 8, the pair of ring forming members 790 are retracted to the back side of the rotational operation unit 300 while being distributed to the left and right, and are not visible to the player (see FIG. 6). On the other hand, at the coupling position shown in FIG. 10, the pair of ring forming members 790 is disposed at the center of the opening 211a of the back case 210 (that is, the front of the third symbol display device 81) and coupled to each other (a pair of pairs). The annular shape is formed by the annular forming member 790 of FIG.

  The swing operation unit 800 includes a pair of arm members 820 formed so as to be swingable (rotatable). The pair of arm members 820 are disposed between a retracted position shown in FIG. 8 and an extended position shown in FIG. Operate (displace) with. In the retracted position shown in FIG. 8, the pair of arm members 820 are retracted to the back side of the combined operation unit 400 and are invisible to the player (see FIG. 6). On the other hand, at the projecting position shown in FIG. 11, the pair of arm members 820 project their tips into the opening 211a of the back case 210 (that is, the front of the third symbol display device 81).

  The first coupling operation unit 500 and the second coupling operation unit 600 include a first engagement member 539 and a pair of second coupling members 630, respectively. The first engagement member 539 and the pair of second coupling members 630 are illustrated in FIG. 9 is moved (displaced) between the retracted position shown in FIG. 9 and the coupling position shown in FIG. In the retracted position shown in FIG. 9, the first engaging member 539 is retracted to the back side of the composite operation unit 400, and the second coupling member 630 is retracted to the back side of the composite operation unit 400, and is visually recognized by the player. It is disabled (see FIG. 6). On the other hand, in the coupling position shown in FIG. 12, the first engagement member 539 and the pair of second coupling members 630 are disposed at the center of the opening 211a of the back case 210 (that is, the front of the third symbol display device 81). Combined with each other.

  The composite operation unit 400 includes four members (operation members 491 and 492) formed so as to be able to swing (rotate), and these four members (operation members 491 and 492) are moved to the retracted position shown in FIG. And is moved (displaced) between the overhang positions shown in FIG. In the retracted position shown in FIG. 9, the four members (operation members 491 and 492) are retracted to the side of the opening 211a of the back case 210 (that is, the third symbol display device 81), and each of the two members is a set. It arrange | positions at the attitude | position arranged in a straight line along the up-down direction. On the other hand, at the projecting position shown in FIG. 13, the four members (operation members 491 and 492) project their tips into the opening 211a of the back case 210 (that is, the front of the third symbol display device 81). , And are arranged in a posture extending radially from the center of the opening 211a.

  The rotation operation unit 300 includes a rotation member 330 formed to be rotatable, and rotates the rotation member 330. As shown in FIGS. 10 to 13, the rotating member 330 of the rotating operation unit 300 is rotated at a fixed position, and the operating members 491 and 492 of the combined operation unit 400 are in the extended position or the retracted position. Since it is arranged in the forefront at any position, it is always visible from the player via the game board 13 (see FIG. 2).

  Each of these operation units 300 to 800 is formed so as to be able to operate independently, and as described above, the operation units 300 to 800 are arranged in a stacked state (stacked). Those arranged in different layers can be operated simultaneously. That is, as illustrated in FIGS. 10 to 13, not only each of the operation units 300 to 800 can be operated alone, but also these operations can be combined, so that the effect of production can be enhanced.

  The rotation operation unit 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 to 19. FIG. 14 is a front perspective view of the rotational operation unit 300, and FIG. 15 is a rear view of the rotational operation unit 300.

  As described above, the rotary operation unit 300 is arranged on the back side of the game board 13 (base plate 60) at a position corresponding to the first winning port 64 (see FIG. 2 or FIG. 5) (position overlapping in front view). An effect member to be installed, a receiving port 361 is opened in the center of the front, and a ball won in the first winning port 64 is received from the receiving port 361 and guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through a guide passage 380. To do.

  On the front side of the rotary operation unit 300, a rotary member 330 having an annular shape when viewed from the front and a decorative member 370 that is a resin member for decoration are disposed, and a receiving port 361 is provided at a substantially central portion of the rotary member 330. (Fixing member 360) is arranged. The rotating member 330 is formed of a light-transmitting resin material so as to be rotatable. The rotating member 330 transmits the lighting and blinking of the LED disposed on the back side thereof to the front side and is rotated to thereby receive the first prize. A predetermined effect is performed around the mouth 64 (see FIG. 2 or 5).

  FIGS. 16 and 17 are exploded front perspective views of the rotary operation unit 300 as viewed from the front. Note that FIG. 16 illustrates a state where only the rotating member 330 is disassembled. In FIG. 17, the decorative member 370 is not shown, and a part of the first gear 351 and the third gear 353 are partially viewed in cross section.

  As shown in FIGS. 16 and 17, the rotary operation unit 300 includes a case body 310 that forms a skeleton on the back side, an electric decoration base 320 that is fixed to the case body 310, and a front surface of the electric decoration base 320. A rotating member 330 disposed on the side, a plurality of gears (first gear 351, second gear 352, and third gear 353) for transmitting the rotational driving force of the driving motor 340 to the rotating member 330, and A fixing member 360 for fixing the first gear 351 of the plurality of gears to the case body 310 and a decorative member 370 disposed around the case body 310 are mainly provided.

  The case body 310 has an electric decoration base attachment portion 311 formed in a substantially circular shape in front view corresponding to the electric decoration base portion 320, and a gear attachment portion formed by retreating to the back side from the electric decoration base attachment portion 311. 312, the electric decoration base mounting portion 311, and the mounting base 313 extending outward from the outer edge of the gear mounting portion 312, respectively, which are integrally formed from a resin material.

  The electrical decoration base attaching part 311 is fastened and fixed with an electrical decoration base 320 on the front side and a decorative member 370 on the outer peripheral side with fastening screws. The gear attachment portion 312 is formed by connecting three concave portions having a substantially circular shape in front view that are formed corresponding to the outer shapes of the first gear 351 to the third gear 353, and the first gear 351 is formed in each of the concave portions. The third gears 353 are housed (arranged).

  An opening 311 a is formed on the inner peripheral side of the electric decoration base mounting portion 311 above the portion of the gear mounting portion 312 that houses the first gear 351. By forming the opening 311a in the case body 310, the rotating member 330 (fastened portion 333) is connected to the first gear 351 (fastening seat portion 351d) from the back side of the case body 310 through the opening 311a by a fastening screw. Can be fastened and fixed. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the fastening screw from being exposed to the front side of the rotating member 330 and to improve the appearance thereof.

  In the gear mounting portion 312, a passage port 314, a fastened portion 315, an insertion portion 316, and a guide convex portion 317 are formed in the concave portion in which the first gear 351 is accommodated. The passage port 314 is a passage that communicates with the receiving port 361 of the fixing member 360, and guides a sphere that has flowed from the receiving port 361 of the fixing member 360 to a guide passage 380 formed on the back side of the case body 310.

  The guide passage 380 is formed as a passage through which a sphere can pass between the attached member and the back surface of the case body 310 by attaching a U-shaped member to the back surface of the case body 310. (See FIG. 15). The guide passage 380 communicates with the passage port 314 on the back surface of the case body 310 and extends downward.

  The mounting base 313 is provided with an insertion hole, and the fastening operation screw inserted into the insertion hole is fastened to the front case body 612 of the second coupling operation unit 600, whereby the rotational operation unit 300 is second coupled. It is fastened and fixed to the back case 210 via the operation unit 600 (see FIGS. 9 and 42).

  The fastened portion 315 is a portion to which a fastening screw for fastening and fixing the fixing member 360 to the gear attachment portion 312 is fastened (a concave portion in which a female screw is engraved on the inner periphery). A pair is formed at positions that are asymmetric (see FIG. 18). The insertion part 315 is used to insert a fastening screw for fastening and fixing the gear attachment part 312 (case body 310) to the front case body 612 (see FIGS. 9 and 42) of the second coupling operation unit 600 on the back side. It is a through hole and is formed above the passage opening 314.

  The guide convex portion 317 is a rail-shaped portion for guiding (guiding) the rotation of the first gear 351 and protrudes from the front of the gear mounting portion 312 as an annular convex portion when viewed from the front. An annular guide recess 351e corresponding to the guide portion 317 is formed on the back surface of the first gear 351 (see FIG. 19), and the guide protrusion 317 is fitted into the guide recess 351e. The rotational position of the first gear 351 relative to the gear mounting portion 312 is defined.

  Here, the gear mounting portion 312 is disposed at a position where the passage port 314 is shifted downward from the center (an eccentric position) in a circular area in a front view formed by being surrounded by the guide convex portion 317. The to-be-fastened portion 315 is disposed on the left and right sides of the passage port 314, and the insertion portion 316 is disposed above the passage port 314. Thereby, as will be described later, the rigidity of the case body 310 and the fixing member 360 can be ensured while efficiently securing a space for fastening and fixing in a limited space.

  A shaft portion 318 projects from the gear mounting portion 312 in a recess in which the second gear 352 is accommodated. The shaft portion 318 is a shaft body for supporting the second gear 352, and is inserted into a shaft hole 352 a drilled in the center of the second gear 352. In the present embodiment, it is possible to omit providing a stopper for the second gear 352 at the tip of the shaft portion 318 inserted through the shaft hole 352a of the second gear 352. Details will be described later.

  A drive motor 340 is disposed on the back surface of the gear attachment portion 312 at a position corresponding to the concave portion in which the third gear 353 is accommodated. The drive motor 340 is disposed with its drive shaft 340a protruding in front of the gear mounting portion 312 (in the recess in which the third gear 353 is accommodated), and the third gear 353 is fixed to the drive shaft 340a. The

  The electrical decoration base 320 is formed in an annular shape when viewed from the front, and a substrate portion 321 on which a plurality of LEDs 321a are mounted on the front side, and a front surface of the substrate portion 321 and a plurality of front surfaces of the substrate portion 321 are provided. And a partition portion 322 that partitions the region.

  In detail, the partition part 322 has a predetermined interval between the ribs 322a and 322b, and the inner edge rib 322a and the outer edge rib 322b which are annular in front view and extend along the inner edge and the outer edge of the substrate part 321. An intermediate rib 322c that is concentrically formed in a front view and a plurality of radiating ribs 322d that extend radially outward from the center of the ribs 322a to 322c intersect in a grid pattern. Arranged. The plurality of radiation ribs 322d are arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction (approximately 30 degrees in the present embodiment).

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the electric decoration base 320 is divided into a total of 24 regions, 12 on the inner peripheral side and 12 on the outer peripheral side by the partitioning portion 322, and each of the partitioned regions includes One or two LEDs 321a are disposed. Accordingly, when each LED 321a is individually turned on or blinked, the difference in brightness between the area associated with the illumination or blinking and the area not associated with can be increased, and as a result, the production effect is enhanced. be able to.

  The rotary member 330 includes a rotary main body 331 having an annular shape when viewed from the front, and a cylindrical outer wall portion 332 extending in the axial direction from the outer edge of the rotary main body 331, which are light transmissive. It is integrally formed from a compatible resin material. The inner diameter of the opening formed at the center of the rotating body 331 corresponds to the outer diameter of the fixing member 360, and the fixing member 360 is accommodated in the opening of the rotating body 331 in the assembled state (see FIG. 14).

  Fastened portions 333 are formed at a plurality of locations (three locations in the present embodiment) on the back surface of the rotating body 331. The to-be-fastened portion 333 is a portion to which a fastening screw for fastening and fixing the rotating body 331 (the rotating member 330) to the first gear 351 is fastened (a concave portion in which a female screw is engraved on the inner periphery). They are arranged at the same distance from the center of 331 and at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction.

  A plurality of annular protrusions 331a to 331e that are formed in an annular shape in front view and are concentrically arranged on the front surface of the rotating body 331, and radiate radially outward from the centers of the annular protrusions 331a to 331e. A plurality of radiation projections 331f extending in a straight line are projected. The plurality of radiation protrusions 331f are arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction (approximately 30 degrees in the present embodiment). That is, in the present embodiment, the circumferential interval of the radiation projections 331f is matched with the circumferential interval of the radiation ribs 322d of the electrical decoration base 320.

  The rotary main body 331 is formed to have a uniform thickness (thickness dimension) as a whole, and the portion where the annular projections 331a to 331e or the radiation projection 331f are projected is thicker by the projected amount ( (Thickness dimension) is made thicker (larger). Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to transmit light at the portion where the protrusions 331a to 331f are provided.

  In this case, in the assembled state of the rotary operation unit 300, the outer edge rib 322b of the partition member 322 is located at the position corresponding to the annular protrusion 331e located at the radially outermost position (the position overlapping in the front view), and the annular protrusion 331d. Next, the intermediate ribs 322c of the partition members 322 are respectively arranged at positions that are located radially outward and corresponding to the positions between the annular protrusions 331d and 331c (positions that overlap in front view). .

  Thus, since the area | region corresponding to each area | region divided by the division member 322 of the electrical decoration base 320 is divided by each protrusion 331a-331f in the rotation member 330, each LED321a of the electrical decoration base 320 is shown. When the lights are individually turned on or blinked, the difference in brightness between the areas associated with the lights and blinks and the areas not associated with can be increased, and as a result, the effect of production can be enhanced.

  As described above, the division of the region is achieved by projecting the annular protrusions 331a to 331e and the radiation protrusion 331f from the front and increasing the thickness dimension as described above. Thereby, for example, it is not necessary to perform printing for partitioning the area in front of the rotating member 330 or dispose another member, and the entire rotating member 330 can be formed in a single color, thereby reducing the product cost. Not only can be improved, but the effect of the production can be enhanced.

  In the rotating member 330, the inner diameter of the outer wall portion 332 is set to be substantially the same as or slightly larger than the outer diameter of the partition member 322 (outer edge rib 322b) of the electric decoration base 320. It is set as the structure by which the division member 322 of the electrical decoration base 320 is fitted by the circumference side. Thereby, it can suppress that the light of LED321a leaks from the outer peripheral side of the division member 322, and can perform light irradiation to the front side efficiently. In addition, when the rotating member 330 is fastened and fixed to the first gear 351, the partition member 322 is fitted in the outer wall portion 332, so that the inner fitting state is achieved by setting the inner fitting state. Can be rotated relative to each other. In other words, each of the fastened portions 333 of the rotating member 330 can be aligned with each of the fastening seat portions 351d (insertion holes) of the first gear 351 by simply rotating both of them, and the radial position can be adjusted. Therefore, the workability can be improved accordingly.

  The first gear 351 has an opening in the center, and a first body 351a having an annular shape in front view in which the fixing member 360 can be inserted into the opening, and teeth engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the first body 351a 351b, a first flange portion 351c projecting in a flange shape from the outer peripheral surface of the first main body 351a at a position closer to the front side (rotating member 330 side) of the first gear 351 than the teeth 351b, and a third flange portion thereof A plurality (three in this embodiment) of fastening seat portions 351d projecting from the outer peripheral surface of the first main body 351a at a position closer to the front side (rotating member 330 side) of the first gear 351 than the 351c, and the first main body 351a. And a guide recess 351e (see FIG. 19) through which the guide protrusion 317 of the gear mounting portion 312 is inserted, and the fixing member 360 is fastened and fixed to the gear mounting portion 312. In, rotatably held between its fixing member 360 and the gear attachment portion 312.

  Since the first gear 351 is formed by extending the first flange portion 351c from the outer peripheral surface of the first main body 351a, the rigidity of the first gear 351 can be increased by the first flange portion 351c. In particular, in the present embodiment, since the first flange portion 351c is connected to the axial end surface of the tooth 351b, the rigidity of the tooth 351b can be increased. As a result, it is possible to improve the transmission efficiency and to improve the durability of the teeth 351b and 352b by making the meshing state with the second gear 352 appropriate. Further, as will be described later, the first flange portion 351c also serves to prevent the second gear 352 from coming off, and accordingly, parts for retaining can be omitted and the cost of parts can be reduced.

  The fastening seat portion 351d is a portion that is fastened and fixed to the fastened portion 333 of the rotating body 331 (the rotating member 330), and is disposed at a position corresponding to each fastened portion 333 of the rotating body 331. That is, each fastening seat portion 351d is provided with an insertion hole for inserting a fastening screw to be fastened to the fastened portion 333, and the insertion holes are the same distance from the center of the first gear 351. It is disposed at a position that is unequally spaced in the circumferential direction. Therefore, the first gear 351 and the rotating member 330 can be fastened and fixed only at one phase position. Therefore, when the rotating member 330 is assembled to the first gear 351, the operator makes a mistake in the circumferential position. Can be avoided.

  In order to allow the first gear 351 and the rotating member 330 to be fastened and fixed only at one phase position, the insertion holes of the fastening seat portions 351 are not necessarily located at the same distance from the center of the first gear 351. It does not need to be arranged. The insertion holes of the fastening seat portions 351 may be arranged at positions that are equally spaced in the circumferential direction and that are different in distance from the center of the rotating body 331.

  However, as in the present embodiment, it is preferable that the insertion holes of the respective fastening seat portions 351 are disposed at the same distance from the center of the first gear 351. That is, since the length dimension (extension length) of each fastening seat portion 351d can be made the same, when the first gear 351 is injection-molded from a resin material, the moldability can be improved. is there.

  Here, in order to fasten and fix the fastening screw from the back side of the case body 310 to the fastened portion 333 of the rotating member 330 through the insertion hole of the fastening seat portion 351d, it is necessary to form an opening 311a in the case body 310. There is. In this case, when the insertion holes of the fastening members 351 are arranged at different distances from the center of the first gear 351, the movement trajectories of the insertion holes are different, and the opening width of the opening 311a is increased accordingly. However, according to the present embodiment, the movement trajectory of each insertion hole can be made the same, so that the opening width of the opening 311a can be minimized.

  The second gear 352 includes a second main body 352a having a circular shape when viewed from the front, teeth 352b engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the second main body 352a, and a shaft hole 352c formed in the center of the second main body 352a. The shaft portion 318 of the gear attachment portion 312 is inserted into the shaft hole 352c, so that the gear attachment portion 312 is rotatably held in a state of being engaged with the first gear 351.

  The third gear 353 includes a third main body 353a having a circular shape when viewed from the front, teeth 353b engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the third main body 353a, and the front side of the third gear 353 with respect to the teeth 353b (the rotating member 330). And a third flange portion 353c projecting in a flange shape from the outer peripheral surface of the third main body 353a at a position of the third main body 353a, and the drive shaft 340a of the drive motor 370 is fixed to the third main body 353a. It is held on the drive shaft 340 a of the drive motor 340 while being engaged with the two gears 352.

  Therefore, when the drive motor 340 is rotationally driven and the third gear 353 is rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the second gear 352, the second gear 352 is rotated, and the rotation of the second gear 352 is the first. The first gear 351 is rotated by being transmitted to the first gear 351. As a result, the driving force of the drive motor 340 is transmitted to the rotating member 330 fastened and fixed to the first gear 351 via the fastening seat portion 351d and the fastened portion 333, and the rotating member 330 is rotated.

  As in the case of the first gear 351, the third gear 353 is formed by projecting the third flange portion 353c from the outer peripheral surface of the third main body 353a, and thus the third gear 353 is formed by the third flange portion 353c. The rigidity of can be increased. In particular, in the present embodiment, the third flange portion 353c is connected to the axial end surface of the tooth 353b, so that the rigidity of the tooth 353b can be increased. As a result, it is possible to improve the transmission efficiency and to improve the durability of the teeth 353b and 352b by making the meshing state with the second gear 352 appropriate. Further, as will be described later, the third flange portion 353c also serves to prevent the second gear 352 from coming off, and accordingly, parts for retaining can be omitted and the cost of parts can be reduced.

  The fixing member 360 is a columnar member for fixing the first gear 351 to the gear attachment portion 312, and includes a receiving port 361 and an insertion portion 362. The receiving port 361 is a passage that communicates with the first winning port 64 when mounted on the game board 13, and guides the ball that has flowed from the first winning port 64 to the passing port 314 of the gear mounting portion 312. The insertion portion 362 is a through hole for inserting a fastening screw that fastens or inserts the fixing member 360 into the fastened portion 315 or the insertion portion 316 of the gear attachment portion 312.

  FIG. 18A is a front view of the case body 310, and FIG. 18B is a front view of the fixing member 360. 18A shows a state in which the first gear 351, the second gear 352, and the third gear 353 are disposed in the case body 310, and one of the first gear 351 and the third gear 353 is illustrated. The part is partly viewed in cross section.

  As shown in FIGS. 18A and 18B, the passage port 314 formed in the gear attachment portion 312 of the case body 310 is downward from the center of the first gear 351 as described above (FIG. 18 ( a) Displaced (eccentric) to the lower side). For this reason, the gear mounting portion 312 has an annular region formed around the passage opening 314 in which the upper width dimension of the passage opening 314 (the vertical dimension in FIG. 18A) is smaller than the lower width dimension. Widened.

  Similarly, with respect to the fixing member 360 inserted into the inner peripheral side of the first gear 351 and fastened and fixed to the gear mounting portion 312, the receiving port 361 formed in the fixing member 360 is downward (from the center of the fixing member 360 ( In FIG. 18B (lower side), it is displaced (eccentric). Therefore, in the annular region formed around the receiving port 361, the fixing member 360 has a wider width dimension (the vertical dimension in FIG. 18 (b)) than the lower width dimension. Is done.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the passage port 314 and the receiving port 361 are displaced (eccentric) to form a wide (increased width dimension) part of the periphery (annular region). Since the insertion portions 316 and 362 are respectively arranged (perforated) in the widened portion, a large-diameter hole can be perforated by making effective use of the limited space. And the rigidity of the fixing member 360 can be ensured.

  In other words, the insertion portions 316 and 362 are formed as holes through which fastening screws for fastening and fixing the rotary operation unit 300 to the front case body 612 (see FIG. 9 or 42) of the second combined operation unit 600 can be inserted. This is a part, and since the supporting weight increases, a large-diameter fastening screw is inserted, so it needs to be formed as a relatively large-diameter hole. By forming the enlarged portion, it is possible to efficiently secure a space for making a large-diameter hole by using the portion. On the other hand, even when such a large-diameter hole is drilled, the hole is drilled in a partially widened region, so that rigidity can be ensured.

  FIG. 19 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating a support structure of the first gear 351, the second gear 352, and the third gear 353 by the case body 310, and corresponds to the view in the arrow XIX direction of FIG. In FIG. 19, the case body 310 is viewed in cross section, and a part of the first gear 351 and the second gear 352 is partially viewed in cross section.

  As shown in FIG. 19, the first gear 351 is rotatably supported by the gear mounting portion 312 by fitting the guide convex portion 317 of the gear mounting portion 312 into a guide concave portion 351e that is recessed on the back side. The Further, the first gear 351 is restricted from falling off from the gear mounting portion 312 in the axial direction (upper side in FIG. 19) by a fixing member 360 fastened and fixed to the gear mounting portion 312. On the other hand, the third gear 353 is fixed to the drive shaft 340 a of the drive motor 340. Note that examples of the fixing method include press-fitting and an adhesive.

  The second gear 352 has the teeth 352b of the first gear 351 and the third gear 353 of the third gear 353 when the shaft portion 318 of the gear mounting portion 312 is inserted into the shaft hole 352c formed in the second main body 352a. , 353b and is rotatably supported by the gear mounting portion 312.

  In this case, as described above, the first gear 351 and the third gear 353 include the first flange portion 351c and the third flange that project radially outward from the outer peripheral surfaces of the first main body 351a and the third main body 353a. The portions 353c are formed, and the first flange portion 351c and the third flange portion 353c are extended to a position overlapping the end surface in the axial direction of the second gear 352. Thereby, it is possible to restrict the second gear 352 from coming out from the shaft portion 318 of the gear mounting portion 312 in the axial direction (upper side in FIG. 19). As a result, there is no need to dispose a retaining part at the tip of the shaft portion 318, and accordingly, the number of parts can be reduced and the part cost can be reduced. Further, at the time of assembling, the second gear 352 can be simply inserted through the shaft hole 352c of the shaft portion 318 of the gear mounting portion 312 and the step of attaching the retaining component can be omitted, thereby reducing the manufacturing cost. Can be suppressed.

  In the present embodiment, since the first flange portion 351c of the first gear 351 and the third flange portion 353c of the third gear 353 abut against the second gear 352 at two different locations, the second gear 352 is axially moved. It is possible not only to reliably control the escape, but also to prevent the second gear 352 from rotating while being inclined with respect to the shaft portion 318. As a result, the meshing state of the teeth 352b of the second gear 352 and the teeth 351b and 353b of the first gear 351 and the third gear 353 can be made appropriate to improve transmission efficiency and durability. In particular, since the two locations in contact with the second gear 352 are set at positions where the phases differ by about 180 degrees, the above-described effects can be exhibited more remarkably. The two phases are preferably set within a range of about 160 degrees to about 180 degrees.

  Here, it is sufficient that the first flange portion 351c and the third flange portion 353c of the first gear 351 and the third gear 353 are projected to the mountain top side from the valleys of the teeth 351b and the teeth 353b. This is because if it protrudes beyond the valleys of the teeth 351b and the teeth 353, it can come into contact with the end face on the mountain top side of the teeth 352b of the second gear 352. Moreover, it is because the material required for formation of the 1st flange part 351c and the 3rd flange part 353c can be suppressed, and weight reduction and reduction of material cost can be aimed at. However, it is preferable that the first flange portion 351c and the third flange portion 353c protrude further outward in the radial direction than the crests of the teeth 351b and the teeth 353. This is because the inclination of the second gear 352 can be more reliably suppressed.

  Next, the combined operation unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  The composite operation unit 400 includes the four members (operation members 491 and 492) as described above (see FIGS. 7 and 13), and operates (displaces) each of these members (operation members 491 and 492). It consists of four units. That is, in the front view of the back case 210, the composite operation unit 400 is arranged in two units arranged in the vertical direction on the left side of the opening 211a, and 2 arranged in the vertical direction on the right side of the opening 211a. Consists of two units. In this case, since the structure (technical idea) for operating (displacement) each member (the operation members 491, 492) is the same in the four units, one unit of these four units will be described below. (A unit disposed on the upper right side of the opening 211a, see FIGS. 7 and 13) will be referred to as a combined operation unit 400.

  FIG. 20 is a front perspective view of the composite operation unit 400. As shown in FIG. 20, in the combined operation unit 400, operating members 491 and 492 are disposed on the front side of the mounting base 410, and the operating members 491 and 492 perform opening / closing operations and rotating operations in combination (see FIG. 20). 27). In other words, the operation members 491 and 492 are arranged to face each other with their longitudinal directions parallel to each other, and an operation (opening / closing operation) for enlarging / reducing the facing interval and a base side arranged on the mounting base 410 are arranged. An operation that rotates about the center (rotation operation) is formed to be executable. A decorative member 411 formed as a decorative body is disposed on the front surface of the mounting base 410.

  In the present embodiment, two types of operation modes (opening / closing operation and rotation operation) of the operation members 491 and 492 can be executed by one drive motor 430. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide the drive motor 430 separately for the two types of operation modes, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly. A detailed configuration of such a structure will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 21 is an exploded front perspective view of the combined operation unit 400 when the combined operation unit 400 is viewed from the front. 22 is an exploded perspective view of the composite operation unit 400 in a state in which a part of the composite operation unit 400 is disassembled. The configuration shown on the left side of FIG. 22 is viewed from the front and shown on the right side of FIG. The configuration is viewed from the back. 21 and 22, the illustration of the decorative member 411 is omitted, and the illustration of the attachment base 410 is omitted in FIG. 22.

  As shown in FIGS. 21 and 22, the composite operation unit 400 includes a mounting base 410 disposed on the back case 210 (see FIG. 7), a holding case 420 attached to the mounting base 410, and a holding case 420. A plurality of gears rotatably supported by the motor, a drive motor 430 that generates a driving force for rotating the plurality of gears, and a back arm whose base end is rotatably supported by the holding case 420 A body 471 and a front arm body 472, a slide rack member 481, a first pinion leg member 482, a second pinion leg member 483, and a second pinion leg member 483, which are disposed between the opposing surfaces of the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472. Operation members 491 and 492 mainly connected to the tips of the first pinion leg member 482 and the second pinion leg member 483 are mainly provided.

  The holding case 420 includes a back case body 421 attached to the attachment base 410 and a front case body 422 disposed to face the front side of the back case body 421. The back case body 421 and the front case body 422 A plurality of gears are rotatably supported in an internal space formed between the opposing surfaces.

  In the holding case 420, a drive motor 430 is disposed on the back side of the back case body 421, and three rotating shafts (a reduction shaft 425, a first shaft) are provided between the back case body 421 and the front case body 422. The first shaft 426 and the second shaft 427 are respectively installed in a posture parallel to the drive shaft of the drive motor 430, and a plurality of gears are rotatably supported from the reduction shaft 425 to the second shaft 427. A pinion gear 431 is fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 430.

  The plurality of gears are a reduction gear 441 supported by a reduction shaft 425, an opening / closing first gear 451 and a rotation first gear 461 supported by a first shaft 426, and an opening / closing supported by a second shaft 427. It consists of a second gear 452 and a rotating second gear 462 (see FIGS. 24 and 25). The reduction gear 441 includes a large-diameter gear 441a and a small-diameter gear 441b formed coaxially with the large-diameter gear 441a and transmits the rotation of the pinion gear 431 to the opening / closing first gear 451 while decelerating the rotation. . Here, with reference to FIG. 23, the opening / closing first gear 451, the opening / closing second gear 452, the rotating first gear 461 and the rotating second gear 462 will be described.

  FIG. 23 is a front perspective view of the first open / close gear 451, the second open / close gear 452, the first rotation gear 461, and the second rotation gear 462. The opening / closing first gear 451 is formed on the outer periphery of the main body 451a around the main body 451a, the insertion hole 451b formed through the main body 451a and through which the first shaft 426 is inserted, and the insertion hole 451b as a center. Teeth 451c to be provided, a pair of connecting projections 451d protruding from the axial end face (front) of the main body 451a and sandwiching the insertion hole 451b, and penetratingly formed in the main body 451a to the side of the insertion hole 451b. A positioning hole 451e.

  The rotating first gear 461 is a gear that is disposed on the front side of the opening / closing first gear 451 and is supported by the first shaft 426 (see FIGS. 21 and 22) together with the opening / closing first gear 451, and the main body portion 461a. An insertion hole 461b formed through the main body 461a and through which the first shaft 426 is inserted; a tooth 461c engraved on a part of the outer periphery of the main body 461a around the insertion hole 461b; and a main body 451a And a pair of connecting holes 461d positioned between the insertion holes 461b, and a detected portion 461e that is formed to project radially outward from the outer periphery of the main body 451a and is detected by an optical sensor.

  The main body 461a of the first rotating gear 461 has a cylindrical surface (hereinafter referred to as the outer peripheral surface of the region excluding the region where the tooth 461c is formed (that is, the tooth 461c is not formed) centered on the axis of the insertion hole 461b. (Referred to as “cylindrical surface 461a1”). The outer diameter of the cylindrical surface 461a1 (the distance from the axis of the insertion hole 461b) is smaller than the outer diameter of the tip circle of the tooth 461c and larger than the outer diameter of the root circle of the tooth 461c. Thereby, as will be described later, it is possible to improve both the rigidity of the main body 461a of the rotating first gear 461 and the rigidity of the non-formation surface 462a1 forming portion of the rotating second gear 462.

  In addition, a pair of connecting projections 451d of the opening / closing first gear 451 are formed in the pair of connecting holes 461d of the rotating first gear 461 so as to be fitted inside, respectively, and the inner fitting rotates with respect to the opening / closing first gear 451. The rotational position (phase) of the first gear 461 can be positioned, and both can be connected and rotated integrally in the same phase.

  The opening / closing second gear 452 is formed in a part of the outer periphery of the main body 452a with the main body 452a, an insertion hole 452b formed through the main body 452a and through which the second shaft 427 is inserted, and the insertion hole 452b as a center. It includes a tooth 452c provided, a connecting protrusion 452d protruding from the axial end surface (front surface) of the main body 452a, and a positioning hole 452e formed through the main body 452a.

  The opening / closing second gear 452 is arranged with the back arm body 471 sandwiched between the back case body 421 (that is, on the front side of the back arm body 471) and is pivotally supported by the back arm body 471. The insertion hole 452b is rotatably supported by a cylindrical portion standing along the hole 471a (see FIGS. 21 and 22). Further, the connecting protrusion 452d of the opening / closing second gear 452 is connected to the connecting groove 481c of the slide rack member 481, and the rotation of the opening / closing second gear 452 is transmitted to the slide rack member 481 through this connection (FIG. 26).

  The rotating second gear 462 is formed in a part of the outer periphery of the main body 462a with the main body 462a, an insertion hole 462b formed through the main body 462a and through which the second shaft 427 is inserted, and the insertion hole 462b as a center. Teeth 462c provided, a pair of connecting projections 462d protruding from the axial end face (front surface) of the main body 462a and having a hole formed therein, and a positioning hole 462e formed through the main body 452a. Is provided.

  The main body 462a of the rotating second gear 462 is connected to both sides of the teeth 462c and the outer peripheral surface of the region where the teeth are not formed (hereinafter referred to as “non-formed surface 462a1”) is on the side of the insertion hole 462b. It is formed as a curved surface that is recessed toward (ie, having a center of curvature on the radially outward side). Specifically, the curvature of the non-forming surface 462a1 is set to the same curvature as the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotating first gear 461 or a slightly smaller curvature (that is, a slightly larger radius).

  The rotating second gear 462 is disposed on the front side of the opening / closing second gear 452 (at a position superimposed in the axial direction), but is independent from the opening / closing second gear 452 (that is, in a different phase). The second shaft 427 is pivotally supported in a state in which the relative rotation is possible. Further, the second rotating gear 462 is connected to the connecting protrusions 462d and 472e of the front arm body 472 by fastening the fastening screws inserted through the holes of the connecting protrusions 462d. The two are linked together. Therefore, the second rotation gear 462 and the front arm body 472 (and the back arm body 471) can be integrally rotated in the same phase through the connection.

  Thus, since the connection protrusion 472e (see FIG. 22) of the front arm body 472 is fastened and fixed to the connection protrusion 462d of the rotating second gear 462, both are connected via the connection protrusions 462d and 472e. The rotating second gear 462 and the front arm body 472 can be formed as an integral structure by connecting at a plurality of locations (two locations in the present embodiment). As a result, the rigidity of the rotating second gear 462 can be increased by utilizing the rigidity of the front arm body 472.

  Here, as will be described later, the rotating second gear 462 receives a reaction force from the rotating first gear 461 when the non-formed surface 462a1 is brought into contact with the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotating first gear 461 (see FIG. 28 to FIG. 30), it is necessary to ensure rigidity to resist the reaction force. In this case, for example, if the rotating second gear 462 is thickened, the weight increases, and if a highly rigid material is used, the material cost increases.

  On the other hand, according to the rotating second gear 462 of the present embodiment, the rigidity of the front arm body 472 can be utilized (that is, by being integrated with the front arm body 472) to increase the rigidity. There is no need to increase the thickness of the rotating second gear 462 or to use a highly rigid material. Thereby, the durability of the rotating second gear 462 can be improved while reducing the weight and cost of the rotating second gear 462.

  In particular, the rotation second gear 462 has a connecting projection 462d that faces the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotation first gear 461 with the non-formation surface 462a1 sandwiched between the non-formation surface 462a1 and the non-formation surface 462a1. 28 to 30), as described later, when the non-formed surface 462a1 of the rotating second gear 462 is brought into contact with the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotating first gear 461, the rotating first gear The rigidity of the portion of the 461 that receives the reaction force from the cylindrical surface 461a1 can be effectively increased by utilizing the rigidity of the front case body 472 or the like or a metal fastening screw. As a result, it is possible to further achieve both reduction in weight and cost of the rotating second gear 462 and improvement in its durability.

  Further, the gear ratio (gear ratio) of the rotation first gear 461 and the rotation second gear 462 is the same as the gear ratio (gear ratio) of the opening / closing first gear 451 and the opening / closing second gear 452. Therefore, as will be described later, when the rotation first gear 461 is rotated by the unit rotation angle, the rotation angle at which the rotation second gear 462 is rotated is the same as the unit rotation angle, and the opening / closing first gear 451 is rotated. When the rotation is performed, the rotation angle of the rotation second gear 462 coincides with the rotation angle.

  Returning to FIG. 21 and FIG. In the assembled state, the large-diameter gear 441a of the reduction gear 441 is meshed with the pinion gear 431 of the drive motor 430, and the open / close first gear 451 is meshed with the small-diameter gear 441b of the reduction gear 441. The opening / closing second gear 452 is meshed with the opening / closing second gear 451, and the rotating second gear 462 is meshed with the rotating first gear 461 (see FIGS. 24 and 25). Therefore, when the drive motor 430 is rotationally driven, the rotation is transmitted to the open / close first gear 451 via the pinion gear 431 and the reduction gear 441, and the open / close first gear 451 is rotated.

  In this case, as described above, the opening / closing first gear 451 and the rotating first gear 461 are connected by the internal fitting of the connecting protrusion 451d to the connecting hole 461d, so that they can rotate integrally in the same phase. Is done. That is, when the opening / closing first gear 451 is rotated, the rotation first gear 461 is also rotated by the rotation, the opening / closing first gear 451 is rotated to the opening / closing second gear 452, and the rotation of the rotating first gear 461 is rotated. Each is transmitted to the second gear 462.

  In the present embodiment, the opening / closing second gear 452 and the rotating second gear 462 are independent from each other and can be relatively rotated at different phases (see FIGS. 28 to 30). Therefore, the rotation driving force is transmitted to the opening / closing second gear 452 while the first opening / closing gear 451 and the rotation first gear 461 are integrally rotated by the rotation driving force of the drive motor 430, and the rotation first The two gears 462 can form a state where the rotational driving force is interrupted. That is, it is possible to form a state in which the rotation operation of the operation members 491 and 492 is stopped and the opening / closing operation is executed. Details of the structure and operation will be described later.

  Positioning holes 421a and 421b are formed through the back case body 421 on the sides of the first shaft 426 and the second shaft 427, respectively. Further, positioning holes 410a and 410b are formed through the mounting base 410 so as to correspond to the positioning holes 421a and 421b. That is, when the back case body 421 is fastened and fixed to the mounting base 410, the positioning hole 410a is disposed at a position where the positioning hole 410a communicates with the positioning hole 421a and the positioning hole 410b communicates with the positioning hole 421b.

  In this embodiment, a cylindrical jig is inserted into the positioning holes 421a and 421b and the positioning holes 451e, 452e, and 462e of the gears 451, 452, and 462, respectively, so that the gears 451 and 452 with respect to the back case body 421 are inserted. , 461, 462, and the phase (rotation position) between the rotation first gear 461 and the opening / closing first gear 451 and the rotation second gear 462 and the opening / closing second gear 452. it can. The positioning method will be described later.

  The back arm body 471 is a member for transmitting the rotation of the rotation second gear 462 together with the front arm body 472 to the operation members 491 and 492 to rotate the operation members 491 and 492 (see FIG. 26). A shaft support hole 471a through which the second shaft 427 is inserted, a plurality (four in this embodiment) of through holes 471b through which fastening screws (not shown) are inserted, a first pinion leg member 482 and a second pinion A plurality of (four in this embodiment) shaft portions 471c that pivotally support the leg members 483 and a concave groove having a U-shaped cross section are linearly extended along the longitudinal direction of the back arm body 471. A guide groove 471d, and a positioning hole 471e formed to penetrate the shaft support hole 471a.

  Note that a collar 427 a disposed in the back case body 421 is inserted into the shaft support hole 471 a, so that the back arm body 471 can rotate around the second shaft 427 with respect to the back case body 421. The In addition, the cylindrical portion that forms the shaft support hole 471a by the inner peripheral surface is inserted into the insertion hole 452b of the second opening / closing gear 452, and the second opening / closing gear 452 can be rotated by the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion. Is pivotally supported.

  The positioning hole 471e is formed at a position corresponding to the positioning hole 462 of the rotating second gear 462 and the positioning hole 452e of the open / close second gear 452. That is, as will be described later, when the front arm body 472 is coupled (fastened and fixed) to the back arm body 471, and when the rotating second gear 462 is coupled (fastened and fixed) to the front arm body 472, the back arm body 471 is combined. The phase (position of rotation about the second shaft 427) of the positioning hole 471e and the positioning hole 462e of the rotating second gear 462 coincide with each other. On the other hand, the opening / closing second gear 452 is rotatably supported by the cylindrical portion of the back arm body 471 so that the insertion hole 452b is rotatably supported. The opening / closing second gear 452 is centered around the shaft supporting portion. When the relative rotation with respect to 471 is arranged at a predetermined rotational position, the positioning hole 452e of the opening / closing second gear 452 is in relation to the positioning hole 471e of the back arm body 471 and the positioning hole 462e of the rotating second gear 462. The phases (rotational positions around the second axis 427) are matched.

  The front arm body 472 can be fastened to the tip by a shaft support hole 472a through which the second shaft 427 is inserted and a fastening screw that protrudes toward the back arm body 471 and is inserted through the insertion hole 471b of the back arm body 471. A plurality of (four in this embodiment) raised fastening portions 472b, a plurality of (four in this embodiment) receiving recesses 472c that are recesses capable of receiving the tip of the shaft portion 471c, and a U-shaped cross section. A guide groove 472d that extends linearly along the longitudinal direction of the front arm body 472 as a concave groove, and a coupling protrusion 462d of the rotating second gear 462 that is disposed with the shaft support hole 472a interposed therebetween ( And a connecting protrusion 472e that is fastened and fixed).

  A collar 422a disposed in the front case body 422 is inserted into the shaft support hole 472a, so that the front arm body 472 can rotate about the second shaft 427 with respect to the front case body 422. The That is, since the front arm body 472 is connected to the rotating second gear 462 via the connecting protrusions 462d and 472e, the rotating second gear 462 receives the rotational driving force from the rotating first gear 461 and receives the second driving force. When rotated about the shaft 427, the front arm body 472 (and the back arm body 471 connected to the front arm body 472) are also rotated about the second shaft 427 together with the rotating second gear 462.

  The back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472 are fastened to the raised fastening portion 472 of the front arm body 472 by fastening screws inserted into the insertion holes 471b of the back arm body 471, so that the front and front arms of the back arm body 471 The body 472 is coupled in a posture in which the back surface of the body 472 is opposed to each other. In this case, a gap (space) corresponding to the protruding height of the raised fastening portion 472b is formed between the opposing surfaces (front and back). Therefore, it is possible to displace the slide rack member 481, the first pinion leg member 482, and the second pinion leg member 483 using this gap.

  The slide rack member 481 transmits the rotation of the opening / closing second gear 452 together with the first pinion leg member 482 and the second pinion leg member 483 to the operation members 491 and 492, and opens and closes the operation members 491 and 492. It is a member (see FIGS. 26 and 27), and is formed at a longitudinal main body portion 481a, a rack portion 481b formed as a rack gear on the left and right sides of the main body portion 481a, and one end in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 481a. A connection groove 481c and a guide convex portion 481d that protrudes in a substantially rectangular cross section from the front and rear surfaces of the main body portion 481 and extends linearly along the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 481a.

  As described above, the connecting groove 481c of the slide rack member 481 is a groove through which the connecting protrusion 452d of the open / close second gear 452 is inserted. It extends in a straight line along the direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction. In the assembled state, the slide rack member 481 has its guide convex portion 481d inserted in the guide concave grooves 471d and 472d of the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472. Therefore, the direction in which the slide rack member 481 is slidable relative to the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472 is the extending direction of the guide concave grooves 471d and 472d (that is, the longitudinal direction of the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472). Direction) (see FIG. 26).

  The first pinion leg member 482 and the second pinion leg member 483 include main body portions 482a and 483a, shaft support holes 482b and 483b formed through one end in the longitudinal direction of the main body portions 482a and 483a, and shaft support holes 482b. , 483b, and gear portions 482c, 483c formed as pinion gears, and connecting holes 482d, 483d formed through the other end in the longitudinal direction of the main body portions 482a, 483a. The gear portions 482c and 483c are disposed on both the left and right sides of the 481 in a state where the gear portions 482c and 483c are engaged with the rack portion 481b of the slide rack member 481.

  In the assembled state, the shaft support holes 482b and 483b are holes through which the shaft portion 471c of the back arm body 471 is inserted, and thereby, the first pinion leg member 482 and the second pinion leg member 483 are The shaft support holes 482b and 483b (shaft portions 471c) are rotatable about the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472. Therefore, by sliding the slide rack member 481 relative to the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472, the first pinion leg member 482 and the second pinion leg member 482 and the second pinion are engaged via the meshing of the rack part 481b and the gear parts 482c and 483c. The pinion leg member 483 can be rotated.

  A plurality (four in this embodiment) of the operation members 491 and 492 are formed so as to protrude from the back side of the operation members 491 and 492 so as to be inserted into the connection holes 482d and 483d of the first pinion leg member 482 and the second pinion leg member 483. ) Raised fastening portions 491a and 492a. The protruding tips of the raised fastening portions 491a and 492a are formed so that fastening screws can be fastened. Therefore, the projecting tips of the raised fastening portions 491a and 492a are inserted into the coupling holes 482d and 483d, and the fastening screws are fastened to the projecting tips from the side opposite to the insertion direction, whereby the first pinion leg member 482 and the second pinion leg member 482 The operation members 491 and 492 are connected to the pinion leg member 483.

  The raised fastening portions 491a and 492a are formed with rib-like portions protruding on the outer peripheral surface excluding the protruding tips, and the end surfaces of the rib-like portions are the first pinion leg member 482 and the second pinion. It abuts on the front surface of the leg member 483. Accordingly, the operation members 491 and 492 can be arranged at positions raised from the first pinion leg member 482 and the second pinion leg member 483 by the protruding height of the raised fastening portions 491a and 492a. Therefore, even in the structure in which the front arm body 472 is disposed between the slide rack member 481, the first pinion leg member 482, the second pinion leg member 483, and the operation members 491 and 492, the front arm body 472 interferes with the front arm body 472. The opening / closing operation of the operation members 491 and 492 can be performed without this.

  An urging spring 484 made of a coil spring is disposed between the pair of first pinion leg members 482 in an elastically tensile state. The first pinion leg members 482 are configured to act in directions close to each other. As a result, when the operating members 491 and 492 are closed in the opening / closing operation, the operating members 491 and 492 are brought into close contact with each other using the urging force of the urging spring 484 so that a gap is formed. Can be suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 24 and FIG. 25, a positioning method of the opening / closing first gear 451, the opening / closing second gear 452, the rotating first gear 461 and the rotating second gear 462 will be described. In the description of the positioning method, FIGS. 21 to 23 are referred to as appropriate.

  FIGS. 24 and 25 illustrate the steps of assembling the opening / closing first gear 451 and the opening / closing second gear 452 and the rotating first gear 461 and the rotating second gear 462 to the first shaft 426 and the second shaft 427 in time series. FIG. 4 is a partially enlarged front view of a combined operation unit 400. In FIG. 24A, the state in which the reduction gear 441 is assembled to the reduction gear 425 is opened and closed with respect to the first shaft 426 in FIG. 24B with respect to the state shown in FIG. In the state where the first gear 451 is assembled, in FIG. 25A, the opening / closing second gear 452 and the rotating second gear 462 are further assembled to the second shaft 427 with respect to the state illustrated in FIG. FIG. 25B shows the state where the rotation first gear 461 is further assembled to the first shaft 426 with respect to the state shown in FIG. 25A.

  Here, as described above, the combined operation unit 400 transmits the rotation driving force of the drive motor 430 to the opening / closing first gear 451 and the opening / closing second gear 452 in order via the reduction gear 441, thereby opening and closing the second opening / closing gear. The slide rack member 481 is displaced by the rotation of the gear 452 to open and close the operation members 491 and 492, and the rotational driving force of the drive motor 430 is transmitted through the reduction gear 441 to the first rotary gear 461 and the second rotary gear 462. , The back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472 are rotated by the rotation of the rotation second gear 462, and the operation members 491 and 492 are rotated.

  Therefore, in order to properly perform the opening / closing operation and the rotating operation of the operating members 491, 492 (that is, avoiding the occurrence of interference between members and displacement of the moving range), the opening / closing second gear 452 with respect to the opening / closing first gear 451. The rotation position (phase, meshing position) of the rotation and the rotation position of the rotation second gear 462 with respect to the rotation first gear 461 are positioned at predetermined rotation positions, and the gears 451 to 462 are held by the holding case. 420 needs to be assembled to each.

  However, in conventional gaming machines, in order to assemble these gears after positioning the rotation position (phase, meshing position) of the other gear with respect to one gear, the operator must rotate both gears. Since it was necessary to adjust the position visually and assemble, the work was complicated, and the work efficiency was not only poor, but there was a risk of assembly failure.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the relative rotational positions (phase, meshing position) of the open / close second gear 452 and the rotary second gear 462 with respect to the open / close first gear 451 and the rotary first gear 461, and the respective A positioning structure for positioning the mounting positions (phases) of the gears 451, 452, 461, 462 with respect to the back case body 421 is provided, and when the gears 451 to 462 are assembled to the holding case 420 by using this positioning structure, While improving the workability, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of assembly failure.

  Specifically, first, as shown in FIG. 24A, the reduction gear 441 is assembled to the reduction shaft 425 and meshed with the pinion gear 431. As described above, since the positioning holes 421a and 421b of the back case body 421 are communicated with the positioning holes 410a and 410b (see FIG. 21) of the mounting base 410, respectively, the positioning holes 410a from the back side of the mounting base 410. 410b are inserted through jigs (not shown), and the jigs are projected from the positioning holes 421a and 421b to the front side of the back case body 421. The jig is formed as a cylindrical body having a circular cross section having an outer diameter equal to or slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the positioning hole 410a and the like.

  Next, the open / close first gear 451 is assembled (supported) to the first shaft 426 while the jig protruding from the positioning hole 421a of the back case body 421 is inserted into the positioning hole 451e of the open / close first gear 451. Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 24B, the opening / closing first gear 451 is engaged with the reduction gear 441, and the mounting position (phase) of the opening / closing first gear 451 with respect to the back case body 421 can be positioned. .

  While maintaining the state of positioning relative to the back case body 421 (the state where the jig is inserted into the positioning hole 451e of the opening / closing first gear 451), the opening / closing second gear 452 and the rotating second gear 462 are then moved to the first position. It is assembled (supported) on the two shafts 427.

  The opening / closing second gear 452 and the rotating second gear 462 are operated in a state of being integrated with the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472. That is, the opening / closing second gear 452 has the insertion hole 452 pivotally supported by the cylindrical portion of the back arm body 471, and the rotating second gear 462 has the connection protrusion 462d connected to the connection protrusion 472e of the front arm body 472. The second opening / closing gear 452 and the second rotating gear 462 are interposed between the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472 facing each other. Further, the jig inserted through the positioning hole 421b of the back case 421 protrudes from the surface of the back case 421 to a height position where it can be inserted into the positioning hole 462e of the second rotating gear 462.

  In this case, the opening / closing second gear 452 and the rotating second gear 462 are assembled to the second shaft 427 by using a jig protruding from the positioning hole 421b of the back case body 421, the positioning hole 471e of the back arm body 471, and the opening / closing first. The opening / closing second gear 452 and the rotating second gear 462 are assembled (supported) on the second shaft 427 while being sequentially inserted through the positioning hole 452e of the second gear 452 and the positioning hole 462e of the rotating second gear 462. Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 25A, the opening / closing second gear 452 is meshed with the opening / closing first gear 451, and the rotation position (phase, meshing position) of the opening / closing second gear 452 with respect to the opening / closing first gear 451. Can be positioned, and the attachment position (phase) of the opening / closing second gear 452 and the rotating second gear 462 with respect to the back case body 421 can be positioned.

  Finally, while maintaining the state of positioning relative to the back case body 421 (at least the state where the jig is inserted into the positioning hole 471e of the back arm body 471), the opening / closing operation supported by the first shaft 426 is finally performed. The rotating first gear 461 is assembled (supported) on the first shaft 426 while the connecting protrusion 451d of the first gear 451 is inserted into the connecting hole 461d of the rotating first gear 461. Thus, as shown in FIG. 25B, the rotating first gear 461 is engaged with the rotating second gear 462, and the mounting position (phase) of the rotating second gear 462 with respect to the back case body 421 is positioned. Can do.

  After the rotating first gear 461 is attached to (supported by) the first shaft 426, the jig is removed from the back side of the back case body 421. Thereby, the assembly (axial support) of the gears 451 to 462 to the back case body 421 (the first shaft 426 and the second shaft 427) is completed.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the jigs are erected in parallel to the sides of the first shaft 426 and the second shaft 427 of the back case body 421, and the gears are inserted through the positioning holes 451e and the like. By assembling (shaft-supporting) 451 to 462 to the first shaft 426 and the second shaft 427 in order, the rotational positions (phases and meshing positions) of the gears 451 to 462 are positioned with the back case body 421 as a reference. can do. That is, since the jig can be inserted at the same time as the first shaft 426 and the second shaft 427 are inserted into the gears 451 to 462, the assembling work and the positioning work can be performed at the same time, thereby improving the workability. You can plan.

  In particular, with respect to the opening / closing second gear 452 and the rotating second gear 462, the positioning hole 452e of the opening / closing second gear 452 is formed as a through hole, so that the second shaft of the opening / closing second gear 452 and the rotating second gear 462 is formed. Assembly to 427 (shaft support) can be performed simultaneously. In particular, in the present embodiment, since the positioning hole 471e of the back arm body 471 is formed as a through hole, the open / close second gear 452 and the rotating second gear 462 are integrated with the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472. Can be assembled (supported) on the second shaft 427. Accordingly, it is not necessary to position and assemble the arm bodies 471 and 472 and the gears 452 and 462, and the positioning work can be completed by a single assembling work, and the workability can be improved.

Further, in this case, it is not necessary to prepare dedicated jigs for the open / close second gear 452 and the rotating second gear 462, the back arm body 471, and the front arm body 472, and a common jig is used. Therefore, the product cost can be reduced accordingly. Furthermore,
The opening / closing second gear 452 and the rotating second gear 462 need to be able to rotate relative to each other independently. However, if the jig is removed to the back side of the back case body 421, the opening / closing second gear 452 and the rotating second gear are required. 462 can be independently rotatable. Therefore, there is no need to provide a separate rotation shaft for each of the open / close second gear 452 and the rotary second gear 462, and the open / close second gear 452 and the rotary second gear 462 are used as a common rotary shaft (second shaft 427). Since it can be pivotally supported, the product cost can be reduced from this point.

  On the other hand, the opening / closing first gear 451 and the rotating first gear 461 need to be connected to each other and integrally rotatable in the same phase. In this case, the opening / closing first gear 451 and the rotating first gear 461 are inserted (internally fitted) through the pair of connecting projections 451d of the opening / closing first gear 451 into the pair of connecting holes 461d of the rotating first gear 461. These gears 451 and 461 are connected to each other so that positioning of the rotational position (phase) and integral rotation in the same phase can be performed simultaneously. In other words, the positioning of the rotational positions (phases) of the two gears 451 and 461 and the connection of the two gears 451 and 461 for integral rotation can be shared by the connection protrusion 451d and the communication hole 461d. There is no need to individually provide a through hole for positioning the position (that is, through the jig) and a connection structure for integral rotation. Thereby, the shape of both the gears 451 and 461 can be simplified, and the production yield can be improved. Further, since the number of through holes formed so as to penetrate through the first rotating gear 461 (main body portion 461a) can be suppressed, rigidity can be ensured correspondingly and durability can be improved.

  In particular, the rotation first gear 461 is formed with a pair of communication holes 461d as through holes, and the pair of communication holes 461d are inserted (internally fitted) into the pair of connection projections 451d of the opening / closing first gear 451. Therefore, the rigidity of the rotating first gear 461 (main body 461a) can be improved by the fitting structure.

  Here, according to the positioning structure of the present embodiment, as described above, a jig is protruded from the front surface of the back case body 421 and the gears 451 to 462 are sequentially arranged while positioning the rotational position using the jig. When assembled to the first shaft 426 and the second shaft 427 (supported), the jig can be removed from the back surface of the back case body 421 after the assembly of all the gears 451 to 462 is completed. That is, when assembling each gear 451-462, while maintaining the state where the jig is inserted into the positioning holes 451e-462e of the already-assembled gears 451-462 of the gears 451-462, The remaining gears 451 to 461 among the gears 451 to 462 can be assembled. As a result, it is possible to prevent the operator from inadvertently rotating the already assembled gears 451 to 461 during work, so that workability can be improved and the reliability of the positioned rotational position can be improved. It is possible to improve the performance.

  In the present embodiment, the opening / closing first gear 451 and the rotating first gear 461 are coaxially disposed on the first shaft 426, and the opening / closing second gear 452 and the rotating second gear 462 are coaxially disposed on the second shaft 427, respectively. Therefore, the backlash between the opening / closing first gear 451 and the opening / closing second gear 452 and the backlash between the rotating first gear 461 and the rotating second gear 462 can be generated in the same direction. . As a result, as will be described later, when the opening / closing operation and the rotation operation of the operation members 491 and 492 are performed (see FIGS. 27 to 30), it is possible to suppress the production timing from being shifted.

  Next, the opening / closing operation of the operation members 491 and 492 will be described with reference to FIG. 26 (a) to 26 (c) are exploded front views of the combined operation unit 400 for explaining the relative displacement state of the open / close second gear 452 and the slide rack member 481 with respect to the back arm body 471. A state in which the operation members 491 and 492 and the front arm body 472 are removed is illustrated. 26 (a) shows the opening / closing second gear 452 counterclockwise (counterclockwise) with respect to FIG. 26 (b), and FIG. 26 (c) shows opening / closing with respect to FIG. 26 (b). This corresponds to the state in which the second gear 452 is rotated clockwise (clockwise).

  As shown in FIGS. 26 (a) to 26 (c), the cylindrical portion (see FIGS. 21 and 22) of the back case body 271 is inserted into the insertion hole 452b of the open / close second gear 452. Thus, the opening / closing second gear 452 is rotatable relative to the back case 271 about the second shaft 427.

  As described above, the pair of first pinion leg members 482 are urged toward each other by the urging force of the urging spring 484 (see FIG. 22) installed between them. A shaft support hole 482b is rotatably supported by the shaft portion 471c of the arm body 471. That is, by receiving the biasing force of the biasing spring 484, the first pinion leg member 482 located on the right side in FIG. 26B of the pair of first pinion leg members 482 rotates counterclockwise around the shaft portion 471c. While being rotated (counterclockwise), the first pinion leg member 482 located on the left side of FIG. 26 (b) is rotated clockwise (clockwise) about the shaft portion 471c. Therefore, the slide rack member 481 has the guide recesses 471d and 472d (FIGS. 21 and 22) of the both arm bodies 471 and 472 by the biasing force of the biasing spring 484 acting through the rotation of the pair of first pinion leg members 482. (See FIG. 26B, the direction away from the open / close second gear 452).

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 26B, in the state where the opening / closing second gear 452 is not rotated against the biasing force of the biasing spring 484, the connecting protrusion 452d of the opening / closing second gear 452 slides. The distance between the connection groove 481c and the second shaft 427 in the direction of slide displacement (vertical direction in FIG. 26B) is drawn to the distance L1 by the rack member 481 (lower side in FIG. 26B). . Further, in the pair of first pinion leg members 482, the interval between the connecting holes 482d is the interval W1.

  From the state shown in FIG. 26B, for example, when the open / close second gear 452 is rotated counterclockwise (counterclockwise) about the second shaft 427 with respect to the back arm body 471, the connecting protrusion 452d is By sliding in the connecting groove 481c of the slide rack member 481, the movement of the connecting protrusion 452d moves upward (upward in FIG. 26A) against the biasing force of the biasing spring 484. Displace the slide.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 26A, when the open / close second gear 452 is rotated to a predetermined rotational position, the connecting groove 481c and the second shaft 427 in the slide displacement direction (vertical direction in FIG. 26A). Is reduced to a distance L2 (L2 <L1), and the slide rack member 481 is slid upward by the difference between the distances L1 and L2. As the slide rack member 481 slides upward, the pair of first pinion leg members 482 are rotated in a direction away from each other, and the interval between the connecting holes 482d is enlarged to be the interval W2. (W1 <W2).

  The pair of second pinion leg members 483 is the same as the pair of first pinion leg members 482, and in the state shown in FIG. 26B, the postures close to each other (the distance between the connecting holes 483d). 26 (a), and in the state shown in FIG. 26 (a), as the slide rack member 481 slides upward, the postures are separated from each other (the interval between the connecting holes 483d is the maximum). Arranged).

  When the open / close second gear 452 is rotated clockwise (clockwise) about the second shaft 427 with respect to the back arm body 471 from the state shown in FIG. 26A, the state shown in FIG. Returned to When the open / close second gear 452 is further rotated clockwise (clockwise) about the second shaft 427 with respect to the back arm body 471 from the state shown in FIG. 26B, the connecting projection 452d slides. By sliding in the connecting groove 481c of the rack member 481, the movement of the connecting protrusion 452d slides upward (upward in FIG. 26C) against the biasing force of the biasing spring 484. Displace. Thus, as in the case shown in FIG. 26 (a), when the open / close second gear 452 is rotated to a predetermined rotational position, as shown in FIG. 26 (c), the direction of the slide displacement (FIG. 26 (c) ) The distance between the connecting groove 481c and the second shaft 427 in the vertical direction) is shortened to the distance L2 (L2 <L1), and the slide rack member 481 is slid upward by the difference between the distances L1 and L2. The As the slide rack member 481 slides upward, the pair of first pinion leg members 482 (and the second pinion leg members 483) are rotated in a direction away from each other, and between the connecting holes 482d. The interval is enlarged to be the interval W2 (W1 <W2).

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 27 to 30, the rotation operation and the opening / closing operation of the operation members 491 and 492 by the composite operation unit 400 will be described.

  27 (a) to 27 (d) are front views of the composite operation unit 400 illustrating the opening / closing operation and the rotation operation of the operation members 491 and 492 in time series. In FIG. 27A, the operating members 491 and 492 are arranged at the raised position U and opened, and in FIG. 27B, the operating members 491 and 492 are arranged at the raised position U and closed. In FIG. 27C, the operating members 491 and 492 are disposed at the lowered position D and closed, and in FIG. 27D, the operating members 491 and 492 are disposed at the lowered position D and Each opened state is illustrated.

  28 to 30 are composite operation units schematically showing the meshing state of the first open / close gear 451 and the second gear 452 and the meshed state of the first rotating gear 461 and the second rotating gear 462, respectively. 400 is a schematic front view of 400. FIG. 28A shows the state shown in FIG. 27A, FIGS. 28B and 29A show the state shown in FIG. 27B, and FIG. 29B shows the state shown in FIGS. FIG. 29 (c) and FIG. 30 (a) correspond to the state of FIG. 27 (c), and FIG. 30 (b) corresponds to the state of FIG. 27 (d), respectively. To do. FIGS. 28 (b) and 29 (a) and FIGS. 29 (c) and 30 (a) show the same state.

  Here, in FIG. 28 to FIG. 30, the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472 are schematically illustrated using a two-dot chain line. Further, in FIGS. 28 to 30, one connection protrusion 451 d of the pair of connection protrusions 451 d of the opening / closing first gear 451 and one connection hole of the pair of connection holes 461 d of the rotating first gear 461. 461d is shown with hatching, and the hatched connecting projection 451d and connecting hole 461d will be described as a reference for rotation angles θ0 to θ4 described later. That is, the opening / closing first gear 451 and the rotating first gear 462 are inserted (internally fitted) into the hatched connecting hole 461d by the hatched connecting projection 451d, and these are arranged at the same rotational position.

  Also, in FIGS. 28 to 30, the rotation of the first opening / closing gear 451 and the rotation first gear 461 when the operating members 491 and 492 are disposed at the raised position U and opened (the state shown in FIG. 27A). The rotational angle θ0 is the rotational position of the opening / closing first gear 451 and the rotational first gear 461 when the operating members 491 and 492 are disposed at the raised position U and are closed (the state shown in FIG. 27B). The first opening / closing gear in the state where the rotation angle θ1 and the operation members 491 and 492 are disposed between the raised position U and the lowered position D and are closed (the state between FIGS. 27B and 27C). 451 and the rotating first gear 461 are rotated at the rotational angle θ2, and the first opening / closing gear 451 in a state where the operating members 491 and 492 are disposed at the lowered position D and closed (the state shown in FIG. 27C). The rotation position of the first rotation gear 461 is the rotation angle θ3, the first opening / closing gear 451 and the rotation in the state where the operation members 491 and 492 are disposed at the lowered position D and opened (the state shown in FIG. 27D). The rotational position of the first gear 461 is defined as a rotational angle θ4.

  As shown in FIGS. 27A and 28A, when the rotation positions of the first opening / closing gear 451 and the rotation first gear 461 are at the rotation angle θ0, the operation members 491 and 492 are at the raised position U. Arranged and opened. That is, the opening / closing second gear 452 is rotated clockwise (clockwise) to the predetermined rotation position around the second shaft 427 with respect to the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472, and the connection groove 481c and the second shaft 427 are rotated. As the distance between the two is shortened to the distance L2, the slide rack member 481 is slid and displaced upward (in the direction approaching the second shaft 427) (the state shown in FIG. 26C).

  In this case, the rotation first gear 461 and the rotation second gear 462 are in contact with the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the main body 461a of the rotation first gear 461 and the non-forming surface 462a1 of the main body 462a of the rotation second gear 462. . As described above, the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotating first gear 461 (main body portion 461a) is formed as a cylindrical surface centered on the first shaft 426, and the rotating second gear 462 (main body portion 462a) is not formed. The surface 462a1 is a curved surface that is recessed toward the second shaft 427 insertion hole 462b side (that is, has a center of curvature on the first shaft 426 side), and has the same curvature as the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotating first gear 461 or slightly. It is formed as a curved surface with a small curvature (ie a slightly larger radius).

  Therefore, the second shaft 427 of the rotating second gear 462 (that is, the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472 fixed to the rotating second gear 462) is brought into contact with the cylindrical surface 461a1 and the non-forming surface 462a1. It is impossible to rotate around the center. That is, the cylindrical surface 461a1 and the non-forming surface 462a1 serve as stopper means for restricting the rotation of the rotating second gear 462 about the second shaft 427 (that is, holding the operation members 491 and 492 at the raised position U). Can function.

  Here, a conventional gaming machine includes an operation member that is rotatably arranged, and a drive motor that applies a rotational drive force to the operation member, and the operation member is rotated by a predetermined amount by the rotational drive force of the drive motor. There is something to rotate in the range. In this case, for example, when the end of the rotation range of the operation member is set to the ascending position and gravity is applied to the operation member disposed at the end of the rotation range, the operation member is rotated (lowered) by the action of gravity. It is necessary not to do. However, in the conventional gaming machine, the rotation (lowering) of the operation member is regulated by causing the driving force of the drive motor to oppose gravity (the weight of the operation member) (that is, the operation member is held at the end of the rotation range). ) Because of the structure, the energy consumption required for holding the operating member was increased.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, when the operation members 491 and 492 are arranged at the end of the rotation range (upward position U), the rotation first gear 461 (main body portion 461a) of the cylindrical surface 461a1 and the rotation second When the non-formation surface 462a1 of the gear 462 (main body portion 462a) is brought into contact, the rotation operation of the operation members 491 and 492 (the rotation of the rotation second gear 462) can be restricted. That is, in the present embodiment, as described above, when the operation members 491 and 492 are disposed at the end of the rotation range (upward position U), the operation members 491 and 492 and the drive motor 430 are separated from each other. When the operating members 491 and 492 cannot be held at the raised position U by using the rotational driving force, the operating members 491 and 492 are moved to the raised position U by utilizing the contact of the cylindrical surface 461a1 and the non-forming surface 462a1. Can be retained. As a result, energy consumption required for holding the operation members 491 and 492 can be suppressed.

  In this case, the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotating first gear 461 (main body portion 461a) and the non-forming surface 462a1 of the rotating second gear 462 (main body portion 462a) are in contact with each other (that is, the operating member 491, Rotation of the rotating second gear 462 in both directions (clockwise and counterclockwise) about the second shaft 427 can be restricted when the position 492 is arranged at the raised position U (and a lowered position D described later). Therefore, the rotation of the rotating second gear 462 around the second shaft 427 is performed only in one direction (that is, the direction in which the operating members 491 and 492 are lowered toward the lowered position D by the action of gravity). As compared with the case where the shape is formed in a shape that can be restricted by the above-described configuration, the vibrations of the operating members 491 and 492 when the terminal reaches the end of the movement range (upward position U (and downward position D described later)) are converged. , End of travel range The operation member 491, 492 can be positioned quickly. Furthermore, since the operation members 491 and 492 can be stably held at the end of the movement range, the operation members 491 and 492 that should be in the stop state at the ascending position U (and the descending position D described later) Further, it is possible to suppress vibrations and displacement due to an external force generated by the player hitting or shaking the gaming machine.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, the non-formed surface 462a1 of the rotating second gear 462 (main body portion 462a) is in contact with the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotating first gear 461 (main body portion 461a) (that is, the operating member 491). , 492 are arranged in a raised position U (and a lowered position D, which will be described later), and are curved in an arc shape around the rotation shaft (first shaft 426) of the rotation first gear 461, The first rotating gear 461 is formed to be curved in an arc shape having the same diameter or slightly larger diameter than the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotating first gear 461.

  Accordingly, the non-formed surface 462a1 of the rotating second gear 462 can be smoothly brought into contact with the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotating first gear 461, and both can be easily brought into contact with each other by surface contact. As a result, the cylindrical surface 461a1 and the non-forming surface 462a1 are smoothly brought into contact with each other, and the operation members 491 and 492 reach the end of the moving range (upward position U (and downward position D described later)) and are stopped. The impact at the time can be moderated, and the contact pressure between the cylindrical surface 461a1 and the non-formed surface 462a1 can be reduced, and the durability of the rotating first gear 461 and the rotating second gear 462 can be improved.

  Here, as described above, the rotation second gear 462 is enhanced in rigidity by utilizing the rigidity of the front arm body 472 (that is, by being integrated with the front arm body 472). Therefore, there is no need to increase the thickness of the rotating second gear 462 or to use a highly rigid material, thereby reducing the weight and cost of the rotating second gear 462 and improving the durability of the rotating second gear 462. Improvements are being made.

  In particular, as described above, the rotation second gear 462 has a position where the connecting projection 462d faces the back surface side of the non-forming surface 462a1 (that is, the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotation first gear 461 across the non-forming surface 462a1). ), When the non-formation surface 462a1 of the rotating second gear 462 is brought into contact with the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotating first gear 461 at the ascending position U (and the descending position D described later). The rigidity of the portion that receives the reaction force from the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the first gear 461 can be effectively increased. As a result, it is possible to further achieve both reduction in weight and cost of the rotating second gear 462 and improvement in its durability.

  Further, the connecting projection 462d of the rotating second gear 462 is disposed at a position facing the rotating shaft (first shaft 426) of the rotating first gear 461 with the non-formed surface 462a1 interposed therebetween. That is, the non-formation surface 462a1 is disposed on a straight line connecting the connection protrusion 462d and the first shaft 426. When the non-formation surface 462a1 of the rotating second gear 462 is brought into contact with the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotating first gear 461 at the ascending position U (and the descending position D described later), the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotating first gear 461 is brought into contact. Since the reaction force received from the first and second shafts acts along a straight line connecting the connecting protrusion 462d and the first shaft 426, the second rotating gear rotates at a position facing the rotating shaft (first shaft 426) of the rotating first gear 461. By providing the connecting protrusion 462d of 462, the effect of increasing the rigidity of the portion that receives the reaction force from the rotating first gear 461 (cylindrical surface 461a1) can be further exhibited using the front arm body 472. Further, since a metal fastening screw is inserted through the rolling convex portion 462d, the rigidity can be increased also in this respect.

  When the opening / closing first gear 451 and the rotation first gear 461 are rotated integrally from the rotation angle θ0 to the rotation angle θ1 in the same phase from the state shown in FIGS. Since the first gear 461 and the rotating second gear 462 cause slippage (sliding) between the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotating first gear 461 and the non-formed surface 462a1 of the rotating second gear 462, the rotating first gear 461 Rotational driving force is not transmitted from 461 to the rotating second gear 462, and the rotating second gear 462 (and the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472) are not rotated. Thereby, the operation members 491 and 492 can be held at the raised position U without performing the rotation operation of the operation members 491 and 492 (that is, in a state where the rotation operation is stopped).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the cylindrical surface 461a1 is formed on the rotating first gear 461, and the non-formation surface 462a1 of the rotating second gear 462 is opposed to the cylindrical surface 461a1, so 1 is a structure in which the rotational driving force is not transmitted from the first gear 461 to the rotating second gear 462, the rigidity of the rotating first gear 462 can be improved.

  That is, even when the tooth 461c is formed over the entire circumference of the rotating first gear 461 (region corresponding to the cylindrical surface 461a1), the non-forming surface 462a1 of the rotating second gear 462 is formed on the tooth tip surface of the tooth 461c. The above-described blocking state can be formed by sliding (sliding) facing each other. However, in this case, as the teeth 461c are formed (recessed), the rigidity of the main body 461a of the rotating first gear 461 is reduced. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the cylindrical surface 451a1 is formed in the region facing the non-forming surface 462a1 of the rotating second gear 462 (the teeth 451c are not formed), and accordingly, the main body 461a of the rotating first gear 461 is correspondingly formed. The rigidity of the can be improved.

  Further, when the teeth 461c are formed over the entire circumference of the rotating first gear 461 (region corresponding to the cylindrical surface 461a1), the non-forming surface 462a1 of the rotating second gear 462 is formed on the teeth 461c of the rotating first gear 461. It is necessary to be retracted to the second shaft 427 side from the tooth tip surface. As a result, the amount of retraction at the portion where the non-formation surface 462a1 of the rotating second gear 462 is formed becomes large, and accordingly, the rigidity is reduced accordingly.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the rotating first gear 461 is formed with the cylindrical surface 461a1, and, as described above, the cylindrical surface 451a1 is between the tooth tip surface and the tooth bottom surface of the tooth 451c. Therefore, the retraction amount of the non-formation surface 462a1 of the rotating second gear 462 can be reduced. Thereby, the protrusion amount of the non-formation surface 462a1 formation part of the rotation second gear 462 is ensured (suppressing the amount of retraction), and the rigidity of the non-formation surface 462a1 formation part in the rotation second gear 462. Can be improved.

  In particular, as described above, the non-forming surface 462a1 of the rotating second gear 462 is formed as a curved surface that is recessed toward the second shaft 427 side (that is, has a center of curvature on the first shaft 426 side), and has teeth 462c. Since it is shaped to protrude toward the front (rotation first gear 461 side) as it is spaced apart from the circumferential direction (that is, the distance from the second shaft 427 increases), the cylindrical surface of the rotation first gear 461 While enabling sliding with respect to 461a1 (formation of a cut-off state), the amount of protrusion at the non-formation surface 462a1 formation portion of the rotating second gear 462 can be increased to further increase its rigidity.

  Since the opening / closing first gear 451 and the opening / closing second gear 452 are engaged with the teeth 451c, 452c of the opening / closing first gear 451 and the opening / closing second gear 452, the opening / closing first gear 451 and the rotating first gear 461 are engaged. Are integrally rotated in the same phase from the rotation angle θ0 toward the rotation angle θ1, the rotation of the opening / closing first gear 451 is transmitted to the opening / closing second gear 452, and the opening / closing second gear 452 is connected to the back arm body 471 and The front arm body 472 is rotated counterclockwise (counterclockwise) relative to the second shaft 427 as a center.

  As a result, the distance between the connecting groove 481c and the second shaft 427 is increased to the distance L1, and the slide rack member 481 is slid downward (in the direction away from the second shaft 427) (see FIG. 26B). ). Thereby, as shown in FIG.27 (b), FIG.28 (b), and FIG.29 (a), the open | released operation members 491 and 492 can be made into the closed state. That is, while the operating members 491 and 492 are held at the raised position U, the opened and closed operating members 491 and 492 can be closed by performing an opening / closing operation.

  As shown in FIGS. 27 (b), 28 (b) and 29 (a), the opening / closing first gear 451 and the rotating first gear 461 are rotated to the rotation angle θ1, and the operating members 491, 492 are moved to the raised position U. The closed surface 462a1 of the rotating second gear 462 reaches the end of the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotating first gear 461, and the teeth 461c of the rotating first gear 461 and the rotating second gear 462 are closed. 462c is in a state immediately before the engagement.

  Therefore, from the state shown in FIG. 27B, FIG. 28B, and FIG. 29A, the opening / closing first gear 451 and the rotation first gear 461 are integrally rotated from the rotation angle θ1 to the rotation angle θ3 in the same phase. When the first gear 461 and the second gear 462 rotate, the teeth 461c and 462c of the first gear 461 and the second gear 462 are engaged with each other, so that the first gear 460 is rotated. The rotation of 461 is transmitted to the rotation second gear 462, and the rotation second gear 462 is rotated clockwise (clockwise) around the second shaft 427 together with the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472. . As a result, as shown in FIG. 29B, the operation members 491 and 492 can be rotated from the ascending position U to the descending position D.

  On the other hand, as described above, the gear ratio (gear ratio) of the opening / closing first gear 451 and the opening / closing second gear 452 is the same as the gear ratio (gear ratio) of the rotating first gear 461 and the rotating second gear 462. Therefore, when the opening / closing first gear 451 and the rotation first gear 461 are integrally rotated from the rotation angle θ1 toward the rotation angle θ3 in the same phase, the opening / closing second gear 452 and the rotation second gear 462 are similarly the same. It is rotated integrally with the phase. That is, the opening / closing second gear 452 is not rotated relative to the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472, and as shown in FIG. 29 (b), the rotating second gear 462 and the back arm body 471 and The front arm body 472 is integrally rotated around the second shaft 427 in the same phase. That is, the opening / closing operation of the operation members 491, 492 can be stopped (the operation members 491, 492 can be held closed).

  As a result, when the opening / closing first gear 451 and the rotating first gear 461 are further rotated from the rotation angle θ2, the rotating members perform the rotating operation while holding the operation members 491, 492 in the closed state, thereby opening and closing the first opening / closing gear. When the gear 451 and the rotation first gear 461 reach the rotation angle θ3, the operating members 491 and 492 arranged at the raised position U are moved to the lowered position D as shown in FIG. 27 (c) and FIG. 29 (c). Can be arranged.

  As shown in FIGS. 27 (c), 29 (c) and 30 (a), in a state where the opening / closing first gear 451 and the rotating first gear 461 are rotated to the rotation angle θ3, the operation members 491, 492 are moved. It is in the lowered position D and is in a closed state. In this case, the rotation first gear 461 and the rotation second gear 462 are disengaged from each other, and the rotation second gear 462 is formed on the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the main body 461a of the rotation first gear 461. The non-forming surface 462a1 of the main body portion 462a is brought into contact.

  That is, the meshing between the teeth 461c and 462c of the rotating first gear 461 and the rotating second gear 462 is released (cannot be meshed), so that the rotating first gear 461 and the rotating second gear 462 are disengaged. The transmission of the rotational driving force to the motor can be interrupted (formation of an interrupted state), and the rotation of the rotating second gear 462 (that is, the rotating operation of the operating members 491 and 492) can be stopped.

  Here, in the conventional gaming machine, the operation member is stopped by providing a sensor device that detects the rotation position of the gear that transmits the rotational driving force of the drive motor to the operation member, and the gear device moves to a predetermined rotation position by the sensor device. When it is detected that the motor has been rotated, or when the driving amount (the number of rotations or the number of steps) of the driving motor is detected (counted) and the driving amount reaches a predetermined amount, the operation members move respectively. It was determined that the end of the range was reached, and the drive motor was stopped. In this case, for example, the drive motor may not be stopped even though the operating member has reached the end of the moving range due to, for example, a rotation position or drive amount detection failure due to the influence of electrical noise. obtain. Therefore, in the conventional gaming machine, a stopper is provided at the end of the moving range of the moving member, and when the drive motor is not properly stopped, the movement of the operating member is regulated by the stopper. However, in the structure in which the movement of the operation member is regulated by the stopper in this way, when the operation member collides with the stopper, not only the operation member and the stopper may be damaged, but also an excessive load is applied to the drive motor. This may cause damage to the drive motor.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, as described above, when the operating members 491 and 492 reach the end of the movement range (the lowered position D), the meshing of the rotating first gear 461 and the rotating second gear 462 is performed. It is canceled (cannot be meshed), and the transmission of the rotational driving force from the driving motor 430 (see FIGS. 21 and 22) to the operation members 491 and 492 (the rotating second gear 462) can be blocked. Thereby, even if it is a case where the rotational driving force of the drive motor 430 continues generating, the operation members 491 and 492 can be stopped.

  As a result, it is possible to avoid damage due to collision between the operation members 491 and 492 and other members. Even if the operating members 491 and 492 collide with other members, the operating members 491 and 492 are disconnected from the drive motor 430 (that is, the teeth of the rotating first gear 461 and the rotating second gear 462). Since the drive motor 430 is idling, it is possible to avoid an excessive load from acting on the drive motor 430. As will be described later, the same applies when the operating members 491 and 492 are rotated from the lowered position D toward the raised position U and reach the raised position U.

  As described above, the cylindrical surface 461a1 and the non-forming surface 462a1 are formed as curved surfaces having shapes corresponding to each other. Therefore, the second shaft 427 of the rotating second gear 462 (that is, the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472 fixed to the rotating second gear 462) is brought into contact with the cylindrical surface 461a1 and the non-forming surface 462a1. It is impossible to rotate around the center. That is, the stopper means that allows the cylindrical surface 461a1 and the non-forming surface 462a1 to restrict the rotation of the rotating second gear 462 about the second shaft 427 (that is, the operation members 491 and 492 can be held at the lowered position D). Can function as.

  From the state shown in FIG. 27C, FIG. 29C, and FIG. 30A, the opening / closing first gear 451 and the rotating first gear 461 are integrally in the same phase from the rotation angle θ3 toward the rotation angle θ4. When rotated, the first rotating gear 461 and the second rotating gear 462 slide (slide) between the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotating first gear 461 and the non-forming surface 462a1 of the rotating second gear 462. Therefore, the rotational driving force is not transmitted from the first rotating gear 461 to the second rotating gear 462, and the second rotating gear 462 (and the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472) are not rotated. As a result, the rotating operation of the operating members 491 and 492 is not performed, and the rotating operation can be stopped (that is, the operating members 491 and 492 are held at the lowered position D).

  On the other hand, the opening / closing first gear 451 and the opening / closing second gear 452 are engaged with the teeth 451c, 452c of the opening / closing first gear 451 and the opening / closing second gear 452, so that the opening / closing first gear 451 and the rotation first gear 451 are engaged. When the gear 461 is integrally rotated from the rotation angle θ3 to the rotation angle θ4 in the same phase, the rotation of the opening / closing first gear 451 is transmitted to the opening / closing second gear 452, and the opening / closing second gear 452 is moved to the back arm body. It is rotated counterclockwise (counterclockwise) relatively around the second shaft 427 with respect to the 471 and the front arm body 472.

  As a result, the distance between the connecting groove 481c and the second shaft 427 is shortened to a distance L2, and the slide rack member 481 is slid upward (in the direction approaching the second shaft 427) (see FIG. 26C). ). Thereby, as shown in FIG.27 (d) and FIG.30 (b), the operation members 491 and 492 which were closed can be made into the open state. That is, while the operating members 491 and 492 are held at the lowered position D, the opening and closing operation can be performed to open the closed operating members 491 and 492.

  As shown in FIGS. 27D and 30B, after the operation members 491 and 492 are disposed at the lowered position D and opened, the drive motor 430 (FIGS. 21 and 22) is then placed. And the first open / close gear 451 and the first rotation gear 461 are integrally rotated in the same phase from the rotation angle θ4 toward the rotation angle θ0. Operations (open / close operation and rotation operation) can be executed in reverse order.

  That is, from the state of the rotation angle θ4 shown in FIGS. 27D and 30B, the opening / closing first gear 451 and the rotation first gear 461 are integrally rotated to the rotation angle θ3 in the same phase. Accordingly, as shown in FIGS. 27C, 29C, and 30A, the slip between the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotating first gear 461 and the non-forming surface 462a1 of the rotating second gear 462 is achieved. (Sliding) is used to stop the rotation of the operating members 491 and 492 (that is, while holding the operating members 491 and 492 at the lowered position D), while the second gear 452 is rotated clockwise (clockwise). ), The distance between the connecting groove 481c and the second shaft 427 can be expanded to the distance L1, and the opened operation members 491 and 492 can be closed. That is, while the operating members 491 and 492 are held at the lowered position D, the opening and closing operation can be executed to close the opened operating members 491 and 492.

  Next, from the state of the rotation angle θ3 shown in FIG. 27C, FIG. 29C, and FIG. 30A, the opening / closing first gear 451 and the rotation first gear 461 are integrated in the same phase via the rotation angle θ2. To the rotation angle θ1. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 27 (b) and 29 (a), the rotating second gear 462 is rotated counterclockwise (counterclockwise) integrally with the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472, thereby operating member. 491 and 492 are rotated from the lowered position D to the raised position U, and the opening / closing second gear 452 is not rotated relative to the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472. The back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472 can be integrally rotated around the second axis 427 in the same phase. That is, it is possible to perform the rotation operation while holding the operation members 491 and 492 in the closed state, and to arrange the operation members 491 and 492 arranged at the lowered position D at the raised position U.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when starting the rotation operation for moving the operation members 491, 492 from the lowered position D toward the raised position U, only the opening / closing operation of the operation members 491, 492 is performed first. Thereafter, the operation members 491 and 492 are rotated. That is, after forming a shut-off state in which the rotation driving force of the drive motor 430 (see FIGS. 21 and 22) is blocked from being transmitted to the rotation second gear 462, the rotation driving force of the drive motor 430 is changed to the rotation second gear. Since the transmission state to be transmitted to 462 is formed, the rotational driving force required for the drive motor 430 to start the rotation of the operation members 491 and 492 can be suppressed, and as a result, the drive motor 430 can be reduced in size. be able to.

  That is, when starting the rotation operation of the operation members 491 and 492 in the stopped state (that is, the ascending position U or the descending position D), the stationary object is moved. A force exceeding the generated inertial force needs to be applied to the operating members 491 and 492, and the rotational driving force required for the drive motor 430 increases. In particular, the rotating operation of the operating members 491 and 992 is not limited to the operating members 491 and 492, but is also a mechanism portion that opens and closes the operating members 491 and 492 (for example, the slide rack member 481 and the pinion leg members 482 and 483). Etc.) and the arm bodies 471, 472 etc. that hold the mechanism part must be moved, and the inertial force at the time of starting the rotating operation becomes large. Further, when the operating members 491 and 492 at the lowered position D are rotated toward the raised position D, it is necessary to resist the weight (the action of gravity) of the operating members 491 and 492 in addition to the inertial force. . Therefore, the drive motor 430 is increased in size.

  On the other hand, after the rotation of the operation members 491 and 492 is started, the inertial action for maintaining the motion state of the operation members 491 and 492 is applied, so that the rotation required for the drive motor 430 is performed. The driving force is smaller than the rotational driving force required when starting the rotating operation of the operating members 491, 492. In other words, after the movement of the operation members 491 and 492 is started, it can be said that the drive motor 430 having an unnecessarily large maximum output is in use.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, first, the rotational driving force is utilized by utilizing the slip (sliding) between the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotating first gear 461 and the non-formed surface 462a1 of the rotating second gear 462. Is not transmitted to the rotation second gear 462 (blocking state, a state during the transition from FIG. 30B to FIG. 30A), the drive motor 430 can be driven to rotate. Momentum (inertial force on the rotating first gear 461 side) can be given to the driving state. Thereafter, the rotation first gear 461 is engaged with the rotation second gear 462 (that is, a transmission state is formed) (see the state of transition from FIG. 29C to FIG. 29B). With the momentum applied to the rotational drive of the drive motor 430, the rotational motion of the operation members 491, 492 can be started. Thereby, even if the drive motor 430 is reduced in size, the movement of the operation members 491 and 492 can be started. In other words, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the drive motor 430 having an unnecessarily large maximum output is used after the rotation of the operation members 491 and 492 is started.

  In particular, in this shut-off state, the operating members 491 and 492 are opened and closed. In the opening and closing operation, the operating members 491 and 492 are the only objects that are moved (moved or displaced) by the driving force of the drive motor 430. In addition to the operation members 491 and 492, it is not necessary to move the entire mechanism unit and the arm bodies 471 and 472 in addition to the operation members 491 and 492. For this reason, the load of the drive motor 430 is small, and the drive state can be given sufficient momentum (inertial force on the rotating first gear 461 side).

  The cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotating first gear 461 and the non-forming surface 462a1 of the rotating second gear 462 are formed on both sides of the teeth 461c and 462c, and are cylindrical at two positions of the ascending position U and the descending position D. A state (blocking state) in which the non-formed surface 462a is in contact with the surface 461a1 can be formed. Therefore, not only when the movement members 491 and 492 at the lowered position D start to move to the raised position U, but also when the movement members 491 and 492 at the raised position U start to move to the lowered position D. In addition, momentum (inertial force) can be given to the drive state of the drive motor 430.

  From the state of the rotation angle θ1 shown in FIG. 27B, FIG. 28B and FIG. 29A, the opening / closing first gear 451 and the rotation first gear 461 are integrally rotated to the rotation angle θ0 in the same phase. . Accordingly, as shown in FIGS. 27A and 28A, the sliding (sliding) between the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotating first gear 461 and the non-formed surface 462a1 of the rotating second gear 462 is utilized. Then, while stopping the rotation of the operation members 491, 492 (that is, holding the operation members 491, 492 in the raised position U), the rotation of the open / close second gear 452 clockwise (clockwise) The distance between the connection groove 481c and the second shaft 427 can be shortened to the distance L2, and the closed operation members 491 and 492 can be opened. That is, while the operating members 491 and 492 are held at the raised position U, the opening and closing operation can be performed to open the closed operating members 491 and 492.

  As described above, according to the combined operation unit 400 of the present embodiment, the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472 (first moving member) rotated (rotated) around the second shaft 427, and the back Operating members 491 and 492 (second moving members) disposed on the arm body 471 and the front arm body 472 and opened and closed (opening and closing operations) in directions close to and away from each other. ) Is stopped (see FIG. 28 and FIG. 30), while the operating members 491 and 492 (second moving member) are stopped while the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472 (first moving member) are stopped. During the stop of the opening / closing operation, the combined operation of rotating the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472 (first moving member) (see FIG. 29) can be executed by one drive motor 430. .

  Here, in the conventional gaming machine, when the moving operation of the first moving member and the second moving member is performed by one driving motor, the driving motor generates a driving force and the driving force is stopped. Since the operation state of the first moving member and the second moving member is switched by forming two driving states, both the first moving member and the second moving member move together or both stop. It is possible to form only the operation mode of performing, and it is not possible to stop the other while moving one of the first moving member or the second moving member. Therefore, in order to stop one of the first moving member and the second moving member while moving the other, a driving motor for moving the first moving member and a driving motor for moving the second moving member are provided. It was necessary to provide each of them individually, that is, to provide a total of two drive motors.

  In contrast, in the present embodiment, as described above, the operation members 491 and 492 (second movement member) or one of the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472 (first movement member) is operated while the other is operated. Since the operation mode to be stopped can be achieved by one drive motor 430, the required number of the drive motors 430 is reduced while enhancing the effect of moving and stopping the operation members 491, 492, thereby reducing the product cost. Can be planned.

  Next, the first combined operation unit 500 and the second combined operation unit 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 31 to 45.

  FIG. 31 is a front view of the first coupling operation unit 500 and the second coupling operation unit 600 in a state where the first engagement member 539 and the pair of second coupling members 630 are disposed at the retracted position. FIG. 11 is a front view of the first coupling operation unit 500 and the second coupling operation unit 600 in a state where the first engagement member 539 and the pair of second coupling members 630 are disposed at the coupling position. In addition, the arrangement | positioning position (opposite space | interval) of the 1st joint operation | movement unit 500 shown in FIG.31 and FIG.32 and the 2nd joint operation | movement unit 600 is in the state in which these both units 500 and 600 were accommodated in the back case 210. This corresponds to the arrangement position (opposite interval).

  As shown in FIGS. 31 and 32, the first coupling operation unit 500 includes a first engagement member 539 formed so as to be movable up and down via a slide mechanism, and the second coupling operation unit 600 includes a link. A pair of second coupling members 630 formed so as to be able to swing left and right via a mechanism are provided, and the second coupling operation unit 600 is disposed below the first coupling operation unit 500 with a predetermined interval. A third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is arranged on the back side of the space located between the first combined operation unit 500 and the second combined operation unit 600 (the back side in FIG. 31 and FIG. 32). Established.

  The first coupling operation unit 500 and the second coupling operation unit 600 move up and down and swing the first engagement member 539 and the pair of second coupling members 630, respectively, so that the retracted position illustrated in FIG. 31 or illustrated in FIG. Place it at the binding position. In the retracted position shown in FIG. 31, the first engaging member 539 is raised, and the pair of second coupling members 630 are separated from each other by tilting the link mechanism, and the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2). The front side is opened (see FIG. 6). On the other hand, in the coupling position shown in FIG. 32, the first engagement member 539 is lowered, and the pair of second coupling members 630 are brought close to each other by the standing of the link mechanism. Two coupling members 630 are arranged on the front side of the third symbol display device 81 and coupled to each other (see FIG. 12).

  In this case, according to the first coupling operation unit 500 and the second coupling operation unit 600, the first engagement member 539 is lowered toward the pair of second coupling members 630 arranged side by side on the left and right, The lower surface 539e of the first engaging member 539 is brought into contact with the upper surfaces 630a of the pair of second coupling members 630, whereby a force in a direction in which the pair of second coupling members 630 approach each other is applied to the pair of second coupling members 630. Thereby, not only the lower surface 539e of the first engagement member 539 and the upper surface 630a of the pair of second coupling members 630 can be brought into close contact, but also the opposing surfaces of the pair of second coupling members 630 adjacent to the left and right are in close contact with each other. Can be made. As a result, these coupling members 539 and 630 can be coupled while suppressing the formation of a gap between them. Therefore, it is possible to improve the production effect by combining a plurality of members.

  First, the first combined operation unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  33 (a) is a front view of the first combined operation unit 500, and FIG. 33 (b) is a bottom view of the first combined operation unit 500 as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXb in FIG. 33 (a). FIG. 34 is an exploded front perspective view of the first combined operation unit 500, and FIG. 35 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first combined operation unit 500. In addition, in FIG. 35, illustration of the raising member 550 and the decoration part 560 is abbreviate | omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 33 to 35, the first combined operation unit 500 includes a board member 510, a driving unit 520 that is disposed on the front side of the board member 510 and generates a driving force, and the driving unit 520. The slide mechanism 530 is slid up and down in the vertical direction in response to the drive force generated and the slide mechanism unit 530 is disposed on the front side of the base member 510, and the drive force of the drive unit 520 is transmitted to the slide mechanism unit 530. A first link member 541 disposed on the back side of the substrate member 510 and a second link member disposed on the back side of the substrate member 510 in a posture symmetrical to the first link member 541 542, a pair of raised members 550 disposed on the left and right sides of the front side of the substrate member 510 with the slide mechanism portion 530 interposed therebetween, and a decoration disposed on the front side of the pair of raised members 550 560, a biasing spring 571 that applies a biasing force to the second link member 542 is disposed on the front side of the substrate member 510 mainly comprises a.

  The raising member 550 is formed in a box shape with the back side open, and the driving unit 520 disposed on the front side of the substrate member 510 can be accommodated in the internal space of the raising member 550. As a result, as described later, even when the driving unit 520 is disposed on the front side of the substrate member 510, the dead space formed on the front side of the substrate member 510 and on the side of the slide mechanism unit 530 is effectively used. The first combined operation unit 500 can be reduced in size particularly in the front-rear direction (vertical direction in FIG. 33B).

  The substrate member 510 is a member formed in a rectangular plate shape that is horizontally long when viewed from the front, and a rack portion that is provided in parallel along a pair of guide grooves 511 and one guide groove 511 of the pair of guide grooves 511. 512, connecting grooves 513 and 514 formed on the left and right sides of the pair of guide grooves 511, a shaft support hole 515 formed on the side of the connecting groove 513, and the front side and the back side of the substrate member 510, respectively. And a projecting support shaft 516.

  The guide groove 511 allows the insertion shaft 531 c of the slide mechanism portion 530 to be inserted from the front side to the back side of the substrate member 510 and allows the insertion shaft 531 c and the link members 541 and 542 to be connected on the back side of the substrate member 510. A pair of groove-like openings for extending a pair of lines in the vertical direction while maintaining parallel to each other at the substantially center in the width direction of the substrate member 510. The groove width of the guide groove 511 is set to be larger than the outer diameter of the insertion shaft 531 c of the slide mechanism portion 530, and the insertion shaft 531 c can be moved only along the extending direction of the guide groove 511. That is, the slide mechanism portion 530 can be moved (lifted) in the vertical direction along the extending direction of the guide groove 511 by the insertion shaft 531c being guided by the guide groove 511.

  The rack portion 512 is a portion formed as a rack gear in which a plurality of teeth 512 a are formed on a plane along the extending direction of the guide groove 511, and is fixed to the front side of the substrate member 510. In a state where the slide mechanism portion 520 is assembled to the substrate member 510, the pinion gear 537 (see FIG. 38) of the slide mechanism portion 530 is engaged with the teeth 512a of the rack portion 512. Therefore, when the slide mechanism portion 530 is moved (lifted / lowered) along the extending direction of the guide groove 511, the pinion gear 537 is rotationally driven with the movement of the slide mechanism portion 530.

  The connection groove 513 is a groove shape for inserting the connection shaft 526 of the driving unit 520 from the front side to the back side of the board member 510 and connecting the connection shaft 526 and the first link member 541 on the back side of the board member 510. And is curved and extended in an arc shape that is convex toward the guide groove 511. Specifically, the connecting groove 513 is formed in a shape obtained by cutting a part of an annular shape centering on the axis of the shaft support hole 515. The connecting groove 513 has a groove width that is set to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the connecting shaft 526 of the drive unit 520, and allows the connecting shaft 526 to move only along the extending direction of the connecting groove 513.

  The shaft support hole 515 is an opening through which the support shaft 527 that supports the base end side of the first link member 541 is inserted, and is disposed on the opposite side of the guide groove 511 with the connection groove 513 interposed therebetween. As will be described later, the support shaft 527 is fixed to the case body 521 of the drive unit 520, and the drive unit 520 is disposed on the front side of the substrate member 510 so that the tip of the support shaft 527 is pivotally supported. It protrudes to the back side of the substrate member 510 via 515. The first link member 541 is pivotally supported at the base end side by a support shaft 527 protruding through a shaft support hole 515 and rotated about the support shaft 527.

  The connection groove 514 inserts the locking claw 542b of the second link member 542 from the back side to the front side of the board member 510, and the end of the biasing spring 542 is formed on the locking claw 542b on the front side of the board member 510. It is a groove-shaped opening for causing the guide groove 511 to be curved and extend in a convex arc shape. That is, the connecting groove 514 is formed as an opening having a size that allows the locking claw 542b to move when the second link member 542 is rotated about the support shaft 516.

  The support shaft 516 is a shaft body for supporting the second link member 542 and the urging spring 571, and protrudes from the front side and the back side of the board member 510, as described above. The support shaft 516 is disposed at a position that is symmetric with respect to the shaft support hole 515 with an imaginary straight line passing through the middle of the pair of guide grooves 511 as a symmetric line. The second link member 542 is supported on the base end side (the shaft support hole 542a) by the support shaft 516 protruding from the back side of the substrate member 510, and is rotated about the support shaft 516. Further, the biasing spring 571 is held by a support shaft 516 that projects from the front side of the substrate member 510.

  The biasing spring 571 is formed as a torsion coil spring, and the coil portion is held (guided) by the support shaft 516 and one arm portion of the pair of arm portions is engaged with the second link member 542. The other arm is locked to the locking claw 517 of the substrate member 510. The urging spring 571 is disposed in a state where the pair of arm portions are elastically deformed in a direction approaching each other, and the elastic recovery force pushes the locking claw 542b of the second link member 542 upward (see FIG. 34 and the upper side of FIG. 35). That is, the urging force of the urging spring 571 is applied in a direction to hold the second link member 542 in the posture shown in FIG. 35 (the posture in which the distal end side is positioned on the upper end side of the guide groove 511).

  The driving unit 520 is a unit for generating a driving force for slidably moving the slide mechanism unit 530 in the vertical direction (up and down), and is on the front side of the substrate member 510 and to the side of the slide mechanism unit 530. Arranged. Here, the drive unit 520 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 36 is a rear view of the drive unit 520. In FIG. 36, the positions of the connecting grooves 513 and the shaft support holes 515 of the substrate member 510 in a state in which the drive unit 520 is assembled to the substrate member 510 are schematically illustrated using a two-dot chain line.

  As shown in FIG. 36, the drive unit 520 is disposed on the front side of the case body 521 and the case body 521 and drives the drive motor 522 to project the drive shaft to the back side of the case body 521 (FIGS. 34 and 35), a pinion gear 523 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 522, and a rotation shaft 524a that is engaged with the pinion gear 523 and protrudes from the back surface of the case body 521 so as to be rotatable. A crank gear 524, a connecting rod 525 whose one end is rotatably supported by the crank gear 524 via a rotating shaft 525a, a connecting shaft 526 protruding from the other end of the connecting rod 525, and a case body 521 And a support shaft 527 projecting from the back surface of the main body. The drive shaft of the drive motor 522, the rotation shafts 524a and 525a, the connection shaft 526, and the support shaft 527 are arranged in parallel.

  A rotating shaft 525 a that rotatably supports one end of the connecting rod 525 on the crank gear 524 is disposed at a position eccentric with respect to the rotating shaft 524 a of the crank gear 524, and is connected to protrude from the other end of the connecting rod 525. As described above, the shaft 526 is inserted into the connecting groove 513 of the substrate member 510 and is movable only along the extending direction of the connecting groove 513. Therefore, the crank gear 524, the rotating shaft 525a, and the connecting rod 525 constitute a crank mechanism that converts the rotational motion of the crank gear 524 into the reciprocating motion of the connecting shaft 526 via the connecting rod 525.

  That is, when the pinion gear 523 is rotated by the rotational drive of the drive motor 522, and the crank gear 524 is rotated in one direction (for example, the direction of the arrow A1) by the rotation, the connecting shaft 526 extends along the extending direction of the connecting groove 513. When the drive motor 522 is rotationally driven in the opposite direction and the crank gear 524 is rotated in the other direction (arrow A2 direction), the moving direction of the connecting shaft 526 is reversed. Then, the connecting shaft 526 is displaced in the other direction (arrow B2 direction) along the extending direction of the connecting groove 513.

  In the state where the drive unit 520 (case body 521) is assembled to the front side of the substrate member 510, the connection shaft 526 and the support shaft 527 are respectively connected to the connection groove 513 and the support hole 515 of the substrate member 510 as described above. The leading end of the connecting shaft 526 and the leading end of the support shaft 527 are protruded to the back side of the substrate member 510 (see FIGS. 34 and 35).

  In this case, the connecting shaft 526 is rotatably connected to the longitudinal intermediate portion (connecting hole 541b) of the first link member 541, and the support shaft 527 is rotatably connected to the base end portion (shaft supporting hole 541a) of the first link member 541. Therefore, the first link member 541 is moved to the support shaft by displacing the connecting shaft 526 along the connecting groove 513 (arrow B1 direction or arrow B2 direction) by the rotational drive of the drive motor 522. It can be rotated about 527.

  Returning to FIG. 33 to FIG. The first link member 541 is a member for connecting the connecting shaft 526 of the drive unit 520 and the insertion shaft 531c of the slide mechanism unit 530 to transmit the driving force of the drive motor 522 to the slide mechanism unit 530. It is formed in a scale plate shape. The first link member 541 is formed with a shaft support hole 541a at the base end portion, a connection hole 541b at the middle portion in the longitudinal direction, and a slide hole 541c at the tip end opposite to the base end portion.

  The shaft support hole 541a and the connection hole 541b are formed as through-holes having a circular shape when viewed from the front, and the shaft support shaft 527 and the connection shaft 526 of the drive unit 520 are rotatably inserted therethrough. On the other hand, the sliding hole 541c is formed as a through hole having a long hole shape in front view along the long diameter direction in the longitudinal direction of the first link member 541, and is slidable along the long hole shape (long diameter direction). The insertion shaft 531c of the slide mechanism unit 530 is inserted.

  Therefore, when the first link member 541 is rotated about the support hole 541a in the direction in which the slide hole 541c is raised (arrow B1 direction, see FIG. 36), the insertion shaft 531c of the slide mechanism portion 530 is attached to the substrate member 510. A direction in which the slide mechanism portion 530 is moved upward along the guide groove 511 and the first link member 541 moves down the slide hole 541c around the support hole 541a (direction of arrow B2, see FIG. 36). , The insertion shaft 531c of the slide mechanism portion 530 is displaced downward along the guide groove 511 of the substrate member 510, and the slide mechanism portion 530 is lowered (see FIGS. 40 and 41).

  Here, in the present embodiment, the connecting rod 525 is disposed on the front side of the substrate member 510, and the first link member 541 is disposed on the back side of the substrate member 510, and the connecting rod 525 and the first link member 541 are disposed. Since they are connected (connected) to each other through the connecting groove 513 of the substrate member 510, the driving force transmission path formed by the connecting rod 525 and the first link member 541 (that is, connected to the rotating shaft 524a of the crank gear 524). The length dimension of the part (connecting rod 525) that connects the shaft 526 and the part that connects the connecting shaft 526 and the insertion shaft 531c (the part from the connecting hole 541b to the sliding hole 541c of the first link member 541). ) Becomes longer. Therefore, when the driving force of the driving motor 522 is transmitted, the connecting rod 525 and the first link member 541 may be deformed, and the driving force may not be stably transmitted to the slide mechanism portion 530 (insertion shaft 531c).

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the base end side (the shaft support hole 541a) is rotatably supported by the support shaft 527 on the back surface of the substrate member 510 on the first link member 541. The rigidity of the connecting rod 525 and the first link member 541 as a whole is increased by utilizing the rigidity of the case body 521 of the driving unit 520 to which the shaft 527 is fixed and the board member 510 to which the case body 521 is fastened and fixed. Can do. As a result, when the driving force of the driving motor 522 is transmitted, the connecting rod 525 and the first link member 541 are prevented from being deformed, and the driving force is stably transmitted to the slide mechanism portion 530 (insertion shaft 531c). can do.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, the first link member 541 (the shaft support hole 541a) of the connecting rod 525 and the first link member 541 is rotatably supported on the substrate member 510, so that the connecting rod 525 is attached to the substrate member 510. Compared with the case where the shaft is rotatably supported, the transmission path of the driving force from the portion pivotally supported by the substrate member 510 to the slide mechanism 530 (insertion shaft 531c) can be shortened. Transmission to the slide mechanism portion 530 (insertion shaft 531c) can be further stabilized.

  The second link member 542 is a member for connecting the biasing spring 571 and the insertion shaft 531c of the slide mechanism portion 530, and transmitting the biasing force of the biasing spring 571 to the slide mechanism portion 530. It is formed in a shape. Similar to the first link member 541, the second link member 542 is formed with a shaft support hole 542a and a sliding hole 542c at the proximal end portion and the distal end portion, respectively. The support shaft 516 of the board member 510 is rotatably inserted into the shaft support hole 542a, and the insertion shaft 531c of the slide mechanism portion 530 is inserted into the slide hole 542c. Further, a locking claw 542b is formed in the middle portion in the longitudinal direction of the second link member 542. As described above, the locking claw 542b is disposed on the front side of the substrate member 510 via the connection groove 514, and locks the arm portion of the biasing spring 571.

  Therefore, the second link member 542, together with the first link member 541, holds the slide mechanism portion 530 symmetrically, so that the slide displacement of the slide mechanism portion 530 can be stably performed. Further, the urging force of the urging spring 571 acts on the slide mechanism portion 530 via the second link member 542 in the upward direction (the direction in which the distal end side (sliding hole 542c) of the second link member 542 is raised). Therefore, when raising the slide mechanism part 530, the driving force of the drive part 520 can be assisted. Thereby, the enlargement of the drive motor 522 can be suppressed.

  The support shafts 527 and 516 inserted through the shaft support holes 541a and 542a of the first link member 541 and the second link member 542 are fitted with a retaining ring E formed as an E ring as a retaining member. The insertion shaft 531c inserted into the sliding holes 541c and 542c of the first link member 541 and the second link member 542 has a seating surface (diameter larger than the groove width of the sliding holes 541c and 542c) as a stopper. A fastening screw having a head or a washer is fastened (see FIG. 35).

  Here, with respect to the first link member 541, the attachment of the retaining ring E as a retaining member or the fastening of the fastening screw with respect to the connection shaft 526 inserted through the connection hole 541b of the first link member 541 is omitted. That is, by retaining two of the three shafts (the support shaft 527 and the insertion shaft 531c), the remaining one (the connecting shaft 526) can be omitted, and accordingly, The number of parts required for retaining can be reduced. In particular, the long first link member 541 is prevented from coming off with respect to the two shafts on the proximal end side and the distal end side, and the shaft at a position intermediate between the proximal end side and the distal end side. With this structure, the first link member 451 can be stably rotated while suppressing the shaft (connection shaft 526) from which the retaining is omitted from being disconnected from the connection hole 541b.

  As described above, the slide mechanism portion 530 is a mechanism portion that slides up and down (up and down) along the guide groove 511 of the substrate member 510, and lowers the first engagement member 539 to a predetermined position. Thus, it is coupled to the second coupling member 630 of the second coupling operation unit 600 (see FIG. 32). Here, the slide mechanism section 530 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 37A is a front perspective view of the slide mechanism portion 530, and FIG. 37B is a rear perspective view of the slide mechanism portion 530. FIG. 38 is a front perspective view of the slide mechanism unit 530 when the disassembled slide mechanism unit 530 is viewed from the front, and FIG. 39 is a rear perspective view of the slide mechanism unit 530 when the disassembled slide mechanism unit 530 is viewed from the back. is there.

  As shown in FIGS. 37 to 39, the slide mechanism 530 includes an A layer base plate 531, a B layer base plate 532 and a B layer decorative body 533, a C layer base plate 534 and a C layer decorative body 535, A first pinion gear 537, a second pinion gear 538, and a first coupling member 539 are provided, and the first coupling member 539 is slid up and down by a driving force transmitted from the driving unit 520 via the first link member 541 ( Elevate).

  According to the slide mechanism portion 530 of the present embodiment, two sets of double rack and pinion structures are interposed between the A layer base plate 531 and the first coupling member 539, and the A layer base is formed from the first link member 541. The driving force received by the plate 531 is transmitted to the first coupling member 539 via two sets of double rack and pinion structures, thereby increasing the slide displacement (elevation) of the first coupling member 539. It is configured to be able to.

  The A-layer base plate 531 includes a main body portion 531a that is formed in a rectangular plate shape that is vertically long when viewed from the front, and a guide groove 531b that is a groove-like opening that extends linearly along the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 531a. A plurality of insertion shafts 531c (a total of six in this embodiment) are provided so as to protrude from the rear surface of the main body portion 531a and are arranged side by side with the guide groove 531b interposed therebetween, and protrude to the front side of the main body portion 531a. And a support shaft 531d that rotatably supports the first pinion gear 537.

  The A layer base plate 531 allows a plurality of insertion shafts 531c to be inserted into the guide grooves 511 of the substrate member 510, and the collar C having a diameter larger than the groove width of the guide grooves 511 at the ends of the inserted insertion shafts 531c. Is fastened and fixed as a retaining member so that the substrate member 510 can be slidably moved up and down (see FIG. 35). In this case, the first pinion gear 537 that is pivotally supported by the support shaft 531 d is meshed with the rack portion 512 of the substrate member 510.

  In the present embodiment, the two insertion shafts 531c of the plurality of insertion shafts 531c are inserted into the sliding holes 541c and 542c of the first link member 541 and the second link member 542 as described above. At the top, a fastening screw is fastened to the tip to prevent it from coming off.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the plurality of insertion shafts 531c are respectively positioned on the upper side (upper side in FIG. 39) than the center in the longitudinal direction (upper and lower direction in FIG. 39) of the A layer base plate 531. Therefore, as will be described later, when the slide mechanism portion 530 assumes a forward leaning posture toward the front on the front side of the board member 510 due to its own weight, the forward leaning posture is changed to the collar C, the first link member 541, and the first link member 541. The two link members 542 can be effectively regulated, and as a result, the slide mechanism portion 530 (A layer base plate 531) can be slid (displaced) in a stable state.

  The B layer base plate 532 includes a main body portion 532a formed in a vertically long rectangular plate shape, a plurality of insertion holes 532b formed through the main body portion 532a, and a plurality of protrusions projecting from the back surface of the main body portion 532a. And a rack portion 532d in which a plurality of teeth are engraved as a rack gear along the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 532a on the side surface of the main body portion 532a.

  The B layer base plate 532 is inserted by inserting a plurality of insertion shafts 532c into the guide grooves 531b of the A layer base plate 531 and fastening them with fastening screws at the tips of the inserted insertion shafts 532c. The A-layer base plate 531 is held so as to be slidable (up and down).

  In this case, the rack portion 532d disposed on the side surface of the B layer base plate 532 (main body portion 532a) is engaged with the first pinion gear 537 that is pivotally supported by the A layer base plate 531 (support shaft 531d). That is, the first pinion gear 537 is engaged with both the rack portion 512 of the substrate member 510 and the rack portion 532d of the B layer base plate 532, thereby forming a first set of double rack and pinion structures. Therefore, when the A layer base plate 531 is slid (displaced) relative to the substrate member 510, the B layer base plate 532 is moved relative to the A layer base plate 531 via the first set of double rack and pinion structures. Slide displacement (up and down). In other words, the B layer base plate 532 is slid and displaced (lifted) with respect to the substrate member 510 in a state where the speed is higher than that of the A layer base plate 531.

  The B layer decorative body 533 is a member that forms a decorative portion that can be visually recognized by the player from the front side. The B layer decorative body 533 is fixed to the B layer base plate 532, and is integrally displaced with the B layer base plate 532 to slide (elevate). Is done. Specifically, the B layer decorative body 533 includes a plurality of insertion shafts 533a protruding from the back surface thereof, and fastening screws inserted into the insertion holes 532b of the B layer base plate 532 are fastened to the insertion shafts 533a. As a result, it is fixed to the front side of the B layer base plate 532.

  The plurality of insertion shafts 533 a of the B layer decorative body 533 are inserted into the guide grooves 539 b of the first coupling member 539 and the guide grooves 534 b of the C layer base plate 534 and then fixed to the B layer base plate 532. . In this case, one insertion shaft 532a among the plurality of insertion shafts 532a of the B-layer decorative body 533 rotatably supports the second pinion gear 538. Therefore, when the B layer decorative body 533 and the B layer base plate 532 are slid and displaced (lifted and lowered) with respect to the A layer base plate 531, the second pinion gear 538 is also slid and displaced (lifted and lowered) with respect to the A layer base plate 531. )

  The C-layer base plate 534 includes a main body portion 534a that is formed in a rectangular plate shape that is vertically long when viewed from the front, and a guide groove 534b that is a groove-like opening extending linearly along the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 534a. And a plurality of insertion holes 534c formed through the main body portion 534a, and a rack portion 534d in which a plurality of teeth are engraved as a rack gear along the guide groove 534b on the front surface side of the main body portion 532a.

  The C-layer decorative body 535 is a member that forms a decorative portion that is visually recognized by the player from the front side, and is fixed to the C-layer base plate 534, and is integrally displaced with the C-layer base plate 534 so as to slide (elevate). Is done. Specifically, the C layer decorative body 535 includes a plurality of insertion shafts 535a protruding from the back surface thereof, and fastening screws inserted into the insertion holes 534c of the C layer base plate 534 are fastened to the insertion shaft 535a. As a result, the C-layer base plate 534 is fixed to the front side.

  The first coupling member 539 is a member that forms a decorative portion that is visually recognized by the player from the front side, and that forms a coupled state by contacting the pair of second coupling members 630 of the second coupling operation unit 600. Yes (see FIG. 32), a main body portion 539a formed in a rectangular plate shape that is vertically long when viewed from the front, and a guide groove 539b that is a groove-like opening extending linearly along the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 539a A decoration portion 539c provided continuously below the main body portion 534a, and a rack portion 539d in which a plurality of teeth are engraved as a rack gear along the guide groove 539b on the back side of the main body portion 532a.

  The lower surface 539e of the first coupling member 539 (decoration portion 539c) is formed by combining two flat surfaces that are inclined downward toward the center. That is, the first coupling member 539 (decoration portion 539c) is formed in an inverted V shape with the center protruding in the downward direction (downward in FIG. 38) in the front view shape (see FIGS. 40 and 41). ). As described above, the lower surface 539e of the first coupling member 539 (decorating portion 539c) is brought into contact with the upper surface 630a of the second coupling member 630 at the coupling position (see FIG. 32).

  In addition, a concave portion 539e1 having a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front is formed in the center of the lower surface 539e of the first coupling member 539. In the concave portion 539e1, a convex portion 630a1 protruding from the upper surface 630a of the second coupling member 630 is accommodated (concave and convex fitting) at the coupling position. By this uneven fitting, the relative displacement (front-rear direction and left-right direction) of the pair of second coupling members 630 with respect to the first coupling member 539 can be restricted at the coupling position.

  In the C layer base plate 534 and the first coupling member 539, the plurality of insertion shafts 533a of the B layer decorative body 533 are inserted into the guide grooves 534b and 539b of the C layer base plate 534 and the first coupling member 539, respectively. Thus, the B layer decorative body 533 and the B layer base plate 532 are held so as to be slidable (up and down), respectively.

  In this case, the second pinion gear 538 pivotally supported by the insertion shaft 533a of the B layer decorative body 533 includes the rack portion 534d disposed on the front side of the C layer base plate 534 (main body portion 534a), and the first coupling member. 539 (main body portion 539a) and a rack portion 539d disposed on the back side of the main body portion 539a, thereby forming a second set of double rack and pinion structures. Therefore, when the B layer base plate 532 (and the B layer decorative body 533) is slid (displaced) relative to the A layer base plate 531, the first coupling member is connected via the second set of double rack and pinion mechanisms. 539 is slid relative to the B layer base plate 532 (and the B layer decorative body 533). That is, the first coupling member 539 is slid and displaced (lifted / lowered) with respect to the substrate member 510 in a state where the speed is higher than that of the B layer base plate 532.

  Returning to FIG. 33 to FIG. As described above, in the first coupling member 500, the slide mechanism portion 530 is disposed on the front side of the substrate member 510, and a plurality of (this embodiment) projects from the back surface of the slide mechanism portion 530 (A layer base plate 531). In the embodiment, six insertion shafts 531c are inserted into the guide grooves 511 of the substrate member 510, respectively, and a part (four) of the inserted insertion shafts 531c is provided with a collar C. While mounting as a retaining member, the remaining (two) insertion shafts 531c are connected to the first link member 541 and the second link member 542 (see FIG. 35).

  Here, also in the conventional gaming machine, a plurality of insertion shafts (corresponding to the insertion shaft 531c) are provided on the moving member (corresponding to the slide mechanism portion 530), and the plurality of insertion shafts are used as substrate members (corresponding to the substrate member 510). ) Is inserted into the guide groove (corresponding to the guide groove 511), and the moving member is slid along the guide groove by the driving force of the drive means (corresponding to the drive unit 520).

  In this case, in order to stably perform the sliding displacement of the moving member, it is preferable to increase the number of insertion shafts that are inserted into the guide grooves. On the other hand, when the number of insertion shafts is increased, the number of parts (corresponding to the collar C) for holding the insertion shaft (preventing removal from the guide groove) also increases, and the cost increases. For this reason, there has been a demand for a method for reducing the cost while allowing the slide displacement of the moving member to be stabilized.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the first link member 541 that transmits the driving force of the drive motor 522 to the slide mechanism 530 (A layer base plate 531) is disposed on the front side where the slide mechanism 530 is disposed. The first link member 541 is disposed on the back side of the substrate member 510 on the opposite side to the insertion shaft 531c of the plurality of insertion shafts 531c protruding from the guide groove 511 of the substrate member 510. Since they are connected, one of the plurality of collars C for preventing the plurality of insertion shafts 531c from coming off from the guide grooves 511 can be used as the first link member 541. As a result, the number of insertion shafts 531c is ensured, and the slide mechanism 530 (A layer base plate 531) can be stabilized in slide displacement, while the components (color C) for holding the insertion shaft 531c. The cost can be reduced by reducing the number of points.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, the second link member 542 is provided with the guide groove 511 with respect to the first link member 541 on the back side of the substrate member 510 that is opposite to the front side on which the slide mechanism portion 530 is disposed. Since the second link member 542 is connected to one insertion shaft 531c among the plurality of insertion shafts 531c protruding from the guide groove 511 of the substrate member 510, the first link member is arranged symmetrically with being sandwiched. It is possible not only to achieve an effect (stabilization of slide displacement of the slide mechanism unit 530) by symmetric the support reaction force received by the slide mechanism unit 530 from the 541 and the second link member 542, but also among the plurality of collars C. The first collar C can also be used by the second link member 542, so that the number of insertion shafts 531c is secured and the slide mechanism portion 530 (A layer) While enabling stabilization of the sliding displacement of over scan plate 531), to reduce the number of parts (color C) for holding the insertion axis 531c, can be further achieved that a reduction in cost.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the first link member 541 and the second link member 542 are disposed on the back side of the substrate member 510, thereby stabilizing the slide displacement and reducing the cost. Further, in the present embodiment, the drive unit 520 is configured with a crank mechanism (crank gear 524, connecting rod 525, and connecting shaft 526), and the connecting groove 513 is formed in the substrate member 510, so that the connecting groove 513 is interposed therebetween. Thus, by connecting the connecting shaft 526 to the first link member 541, the driving unit 520 can be disposed on the front side of the substrate member 510. As a result, the components of the first combined operation unit 500 can be concentrated on the front side of the substrate member 510, so that the limited space can be effectively used to efficiently arrange the components. As a result, the size of the first combined operation unit 500 can be reduced.

  In particular, since the decoration unit 560 is disposed on the front side of the slide mechanism unit 530 in the first combined operation unit 500, the slide mechanism unit 530 and the decoration unit 560 are arranged in the front-rear direction (FIG. 33 (b) vertical direction). The dimensions in the front-rear direction increase accordingly. On the other hand, according to this embodiment, as described above, the drive unit 520 can be disposed on the front side of the substrate member 510, so that the drive unit 520 is disposed on the front side of the substrate member 510. It can be disposed in a dead space formed on the side of the slide mechanism 530. That is, the two elements having relatively large dimensions of the slide mechanism portion 530 and the drive portion 520 can be juxtaposed in the left-right direction. Thereby, the dead space of the limited space can be effectively used, and the first combined operation unit 500 can be downsized particularly in the front-rear direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 33B).

  Further, in this case, according to the present embodiment, the first link member 541 is formed in a flat plate shape, and the first link member 541 is centered on the support shaft 527 on the back side of the substrate member 510. Since the structure is rotated, the space for moving the first link member 541 can be planar. That is, a space for the movement of the first link member 541 can be secured by a planar space on the back side of the substrate member 510, and it is necessary to ensure a large space in the front-rear direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 33B). There is no. Therefore, also from this point, it is possible to reduce the size of the first combined operation unit 500 particularly in the front-rear direction.

  The same applies to the second link member 542. By using the connecting groove 514, the biasing spring 571 is disposed on the front surface side of the substrate member 510, and the above-described dead space is effectively utilized. The space for the movement of the second link member 542 can also be planar, and as a result, the first coupling operation unit 500 can be reduced in size particularly in the front-rear direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 33B). it can.

  Next, the operation of the first combined operation unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 40 and 41. In this description, FIGS. 34 to 39 are referred to as appropriate.

  FIG. 40A is a front view of the first coupling operation unit 500 in a state where the first coupling member 539 is disposed at the retracted position, and FIG. 40B is a diagram illustrating the first coupling member 539 disposed at the retracted position. It is a rear view of the 1st joint operation unit 500 in the state where it was done. 41A is a front view of the first coupling operation unit 500 in a state where the first coupling member 539 is disposed at the coupling position, and FIG. 41B is a diagram illustrating the first coupling member 539 disposed at the coupling position. It is a rear view of the 1st joint operation unit 500 in the state where it was done. 40 and 41, the illustration of the raising member 550 and the decorative portion 560 is omitted in order to simplify the drawing and facilitate understanding.

  As shown in FIGS. 40 (a) and 40 (b), in the state where the first coupling member 539 is in the retracted position, the drive unit 520 rotates the crank gear 524 in the arrow A1 direction via the connecting rod 525. The connecting shaft 526 is displaced in the direction of the arrow B1 (see FIG. 36), and the first link member 541 and the second link member 542 raise the sliding holes 541c and 542c around the shaft support holes 541a and 542a. It is arranged in a posture rotated in the direction (upper direction in FIG. 40B). Therefore, the A layer base plate 531 (FIGS. 38 and 39) of the slide mechanism 530 is disposed on the upper end side (upper side of FIG. 40B) of the guide member 511 of the substrate member 510, and the first coupling member 539 is raised. Thus, a state in which the retreat position is arranged is formed.

  In this case, as described above, the urging force of the urging spring 571 is applied to the second link member 542. The urging force of the urging spring 571 is such that the posture of the second link member 542 is changed to the posture shown in FIG. 40B (that is, the posture rotated in the direction of raising the sliding hole 542c around the shaft support hole 542a). ) In the direction of holding. Therefore, the first coupling member 539 can be stably held at the retracted position shown in FIG. In particular, an external force (for example, an external force generated by a player hitting or swinging a gaming machine) is applied to the first coupling member 539 that should be stopped at the retracted position, and the first coupling member 539 is moved in the vertical direction. Even when vibration is generated, the vibration in the vertical direction of the first coupling member 539 can be quickly converged using the biasing force of the biasing spring 571.

  When the connecting shaft 526 is displaced in the direction of the arrow B2 via the connecting rod 525 by the rotation of the crank gear 524 in the direction of the arrow A2 in the driving unit 520 from the state shown in FIGS. 40 (a) and 40 (b). 36 (see FIG. 36), the first link member 541 and the second link member 542 are rotated about the shaft support holes 541a and 542a in the direction of lowering the sliding holes 541c and 542c (downward in FIG. 40B). . As a result, the A layer base plate 531 of the slide mechanism portion 530 is lowered along the guide groove 511 of the substrate member 510, and as described above, the two sets of double rack and pinion mechanisms are operated (FIG. 38 and FIG. 39), the first coupling member 539 is lowered.

  As shown in FIGS. 41 (a) and 41 (b), the first link member 541 and the second link member 542 move the sliding holes 541c and 542c downward about the shaft support holes 541a and 542a. Further rotated, the A-layer base plate 531 (insertion shaft 531c) of the slide mechanism portion 530 is disposed on the lower end side (lower side of FIG. 41B) of the guide groove 511 of the substrate member 510, whereby the first coupling member. The state where 539 is lowered (the coupling position is arranged) is formed.

  41 (a) and 41 (b), the connecting shaft 526 is displaced in the direction of the arrow B1 through the connecting rod 525 by the rotation of the crank gear 524 in the direction of the arrow A1 in the drive unit 520. As a result (see FIG. 36), the first link member 541 and the second link member 542 move upward in the sliding holes 541c and 542c about the shaft support holes 541a and 542a (upward in FIG. 41B). It is rotated. As a result, the A layer base plate 531 of the slide mechanism portion 530 is raised along the guide groove 511 of the substrate member 510, and as described above, the two sets of double rack and pinion mechanisms are acted (see FIG. 38 and FIG. 39), the first coupling member 539 is raised. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 40A and 40B, the first coupling member 539 is disposed (returned) at the retracted position.

  According to the present embodiment, the slide mechanism portion 530 is configured to slide and displace the first coupling member 539 in the vertical direction via the two sets of double rack and pinion mechanisms. The speed can be increased. On the other hand, when the first coupling member 539 is raised from the coupling position shown in FIG. 41 (a) to the retracted position in FIG. 40 (a), not only the first coupling member 539 but also the other slide mechanism portion 530 is used. Since each of the components must be raised against the action of gravity, the load on the drive motor 522 (see FIGS. 34 and 35) increases.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, as described above, the biasing force of the biasing spring 571 causes the posture of the second link member 542 to change to the posture shown in FIG. 40B (that is, centering on the shaft support hole 542a). The sliding hole 542c is caused to act in a direction in which the sliding hole 542c is held in a direction of raising. Therefore, when the first coupling member 539 is raised from the coupling position shown in FIG. 41A to the retracted position shown in FIG. 40A against the action of gravity, the biasing force of the biasing spring 571 is assisted. Since it can be used as a force, the driving force required for the drive motor 522 of the drive unit 520 can be reduced accordingly, and the capacity can be reduced.

  Here, the substrate member 510 is disposed in a posture in which the extending direction of the guide groove 511 is slightly inclined with respect to the vertical direction (the vertical direction in FIGS. 40 and 41). Specifically, the lower end side of the guide groove 511 is projected to the front side of the substrate member 510 (front side, front side in FIG. 40A) (the upper end side of the guide groove 511 is the rear side of the substrate member 510 ( Arranged in a posture that is retracted to the rear side, FIG. As a result, the slide mechanism 530 disposed on the front side of the substrate member 510 is tilted forward by its own weight (an attitude tilted so as to fall down in the direction away from the front of the base member 510 (front side)). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the load on the color C and to improve the durability.

  However, since the slide mechanism portion 530 is configured by superimposing the respective elements (for example, the A layer base plate 531, the B layer base plate 532, the C layer base plate 534, etc.), the substrate member 510 with respect to the above-described vertical direction. If the inclination is excessively increased, the elements of the slide mechanism portion 530 are easily brought into close contact with each other, and the sliding resistance at the time of sliding displacement increases. For this reason, the inclination described above cannot be made sufficiently large, and therefore a relatively large load is applied to the color C.

  In this case, in this embodiment, the substrate member 510 is interposed between the slide mechanism portion 530 and the first link member 541 and the second link member 542 connected (connected) to the insertion shaft 531c of the slide mechanism portion 530. Therefore, the forward tilting posture of the slide mechanism portion 530 can be restricted not only by the collar C but also by the first link member 541 and the second link member 542. As a result, it is possible to suppress the load on the collar C and improve the durability thereof, and to slide the slide mechanism portion 530 in a stable state (up and down).

  Particularly, as described above, the plurality of insertion shafts 531c are respectively positioned above the center in the longitudinal direction of the A layer base plate 531 (see FIG. 39). Therefore, when the slide mechanism unit 530 assumes a forward leaning posture toward the front on the front side of the substrate member 510 due to its own weight, the forward leaning posture is changed by the collar C, the first link member 541, and the second link member 542. As a result, the slide mechanism portion 530 (A layer base plate 531) can be slid and displaced (lifted and lowered) in a stable state.

  Next, the second combined operation unit 600 disposed below the first combined operation unit 500 (see FIGS. 31 and 32) will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 42 is a front perspective view of the second combined operation unit 600. 43 (a) is a front view of the second combined operation unit 600, and FIG. 43 (b) is a rear view of the second combined operation unit 600. In addition, illustration of the front case body 612 is abbreviate | omitted in Fig.43 (a). 42 and 43 show a state in which the pair of second coupling members 630 are retracted to the retracted position.

  As shown in FIGS. 42 and 43, the second combined operation unit 600 is pivotally supported by the back case body 611 and the front case body 612, and the back case body 611 and the front case body 612 so that the base end side is rotatable. Link means (inner link member 621 and outer link member 622), a second coupling member 630 that is rotatably supported on the respective distal ends of the inner link member 621 and outer link member 622, and an inner link member 621. And a driving motor 640 that generates a driving force for displacing the outer link member 622, and transmission means (a pinion gear 651 and a transmission gear) for transmitting the driving force of the driving motor 640 to the inner link member 621 and the outer link member 622. 652).

  In the present embodiment, a pair of link means, the second coupling member 630, the drive motor 640, and the transmission means is disposed on the left and right sides of the back case body 611 and the front case body 612. . In this case, the pair disposed on the left side and the pair disposed on the right side of the back case body 611 and the front case body 612 is the width direction of the back case body 611 and the front case body 612 (FIG. 43 (a) left and right). (Direction) Except for the point formed substantially symmetrically with respect to the imaginary line passing through the center and the difference in the shape of the decorative part, the configuration is substantially the same, and therefore the same reference numerals are used for explanation.

  Each of the back case body 611 and the front case body 612 is a member formed from a resin material in a plate shape, and is fastened and fixed to face each other with a predetermined interval therebetween, and a link means (inside space) between the opposing surfaces (internal space) The inner link member 621 and the outer link member 622) and the transmission means (pinion gear 651 and transmission gear 652) are accommodated.

  The back case body 611 is formed with a pair of guide grooves 611a formed to be curved in an arc shape. The guide groove 611a is curved in an arc shape centering on a base end shaft 621a described later (that is, formed in a shape obtained by cutting a part of an annular shape centering on the base end shaft 621a), and the inner link member 621 is formed. A collar 621d that is rotatably supported on the rear surface is fitted inside. The groove width of the guide groove 611a is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the collar 621d. Therefore, as will be described later, when the inner link member 621 is rotated about the proximal end shaft 621a, the collar 621d is guided along the extending direction of the guide groove 611a, whereby the inner link member 621 ( And the rotation of the outer link member 622) can be stabilized. As a result, the position accuracy of the second coupling member 630 at the coupling position can be increased.

  The inner side link member 621 and the outer side link member 622 are rotatably supported on the back case body 611 and the front case body 612 via base end shafts 621a and 622a, while the front end side thereof is a front end shaft 621b, The second coupling member 630 is rotatably supported by the shaft 622b.

  In this case, the inner link member 621 and the outer link member 622 have the same distance between the proximal shaft 621a and the proximal shaft 622a and the distance between the distal shaft 621b and the distal shaft 622b, and the proximal shaft 621a. In addition, the distance between the distal end shaft 621b and the distance between the proximal end shaft 622a and the distal end shaft 622b are equalized to form a parallel link mechanism. Therefore, when the inner link member 621 and the outer link member 622 are rotated around the base end shafts 621a and 622a, the second coupling member 630 does not have a rotation center and is parallel (that is, illustrated in FIG. 43A). (While maintaining the posture to do).

  The second coupling member 630 is a member that forms a decorative portion visually recognized by the player from the front side and is coupled to the first coupling member 539 at the coupling position (see FIG. 32). An upper surface 630a with which 539e abuts and an opposing surface 630b with which the other second coupling member 630 abuts each other are formed.

  Note that the upper surface 630a is formed as a flat surface inclined downward toward the facing surface 630b in the front view of the second coupling member 630 shown in FIG. 43, and the facing surface 630b is formed as a flat surface parallel to the vertical direction. Is done. Therefore, when the opposing surfaces 630b of the pair of second coupling members 630 are brought into contact with each other at the coupling position, the front view shape on the upper surface 630a side of the pair of second coupling members 630 has a V shape with a recessed center. It is formed into a shape (see FIG. 44B). As described above, the lower surface 539e of the first coupling member 539 (decorating portion 539c) is brought into contact with each of the upper surfaces 630a of the pair of second coupling members 630 (see FIG. 32).

  Further, on the upper surface 630a of the pair of second coupling members 630, convex portions 630a1 having a horizontally long rectangular shape in front view project from the opposing surface 630b side. The convex portion 630a1 is accommodated (concave and convex fit) in a concave portion 539e1 that is concavely formed on the lower surface 539e of the first coupling member 539 at the coupling position. By this uneven fitting, as described above, the relative displacement (front-rear direction and left-right direction) of the pair of second coupling members 630 with respect to the first coupling member 539 can be restricted at the coupling position. Here, the convex portion 630a1 is made smaller as the thickness dimension goes toward the protruding tip. Therefore, when the upper surfaces 630a of the pair of second coupling members 630 are coupled (contacted) to the lower surface 539e of the first coupling member 539, the convex portions 630a1 can be easily inserted (internally fitted) into the concave portions 539e1. it can.

  A gear portion 621 c is integrally formed on the proximal end side of the inner link member 621. The gear portion 621c is a portion formed in a fan shape that projects outward in the radial direction around the proximal end shaft 621a, and a plurality of teeth are engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the fan shape. A transmission gear 652 described later is meshed with the gear portion 621c.

  The drive motor 640 is disposed on the back side of the back case body 611, and a pinion gear 651 is fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 640 protruding to the front side of the back case body 611. A transmission gear 652 is meshed with the pinion gear 651, and the gear portion 621c of the inner link member 621 is meshed with the transmission gear 652, as described above.

  Next, the operation of the second combined operation unit 600 will be described with reference to FIG. In this description, FIG. 43 (a) is referred to as appropriate.

  44 (a) and 44 (b) are front views of the second combined operation unit 600, and illustration of the front case body 612 is omitted. 44A, the pair of second coupling members 630 are arranged between the retracted position and the coupling position. In FIG. 44B, the pair of second coupling members 630 are arranged at the coupling position. Each of these states is illustrated.

  In the retracted position shown in FIG. 43 (a), the left and right link mechanisms (the inner link member 621 and the outer link member 622) are each tilted in the direction away from each other, and the pair of second coupling members 630 are separated from each other in the left and right directions. When the left and right drive motors 640 are rotationally driven from the state (retracted position) shown in FIG. 43A and the pinion gear 651 is rotated, the rotation is transmitted via the transmission gear 652 to the gear portion 621c of the inner link member 621. The gear portion 621c is rotated around the proximal end shaft 621a. As a result, the left and right inner link members 621 are rotated about the base end shaft 621a, and the left and right link mechanisms (the inner link member 621 and the outer link member 622) are close to each other as shown in FIG. Standing in the direction.

  When the left and right drive motors 640 are further rotated from the state shown in FIG. 44A, the left and right link mechanisms (the inner link member 621 and the outer link member 622) are close to each other as shown in FIG. 44B. The pair of second coupling members 630 are arranged at the coupling position. That is, the pair of second coupling members 630 are adjacent to each other on the left and right, and the opposing surfaces 630b are in contact with each other. On the other hand, from the state shown in FIG. 44B, when the drive motor 640 is rotationally driven in the opposite direction to that described above, the left and right link mechanisms (the inner link member 621 and the outer link member 622) are separated from each other. As shown in FIG. 43A, the pair of second coupling members 630 are retracted to the retracted position.

  Returning to FIG. 31 and FIG. 32, the combining operation of the first combining operation unit 500 and the second combining operation unit 600 will be described. In this description, FIG. 45 is referred to as appropriate. FIG. 45 is a front view of the first coupling operation unit 500 and the second coupling operation unit 600 in a state where the first coupling member 539 and the pair of second coupling members 630 are disposed at the coupling position.

  As described above, the first coupling member 539 of the first coupling operation unit 500 and the second coupling member 630 of the second coupling operation unit 600 are coupled to each other from the state (retracted position) shown in FIG. 32. The members 630 are arranged adjacent to each other on the left and right sides close to each other by the standing of the link mechanism, and the first coupling members 539 are lowered toward the pair of second coupling members 630 arranged on the left and right sides, and FIG. As shown in FIG. 5, the lower surface 539 e of the first coupling member 539 is brought into contact with the upper surfaces 630 a of the pair of second coupling members 630.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 45, the first coupling operation unit 500 and the second coupling operation unit 600 are configured such that the inclination angle of the lower surface 539e of the first coupling member 539 and the upper surface 630a of the second coupling member 630 with respect to the horizontal plane is an angle θ. It is said. Therefore, when the first coupling member 539 is lowered (slidingly displaced) along the vertical direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 45), the lower surface 539e of the first coupling member 539 acts on the upper surface 630a of the second coupling member 630. The vertical force F is a force component Fv (= F × cos θ) in a direction perpendicular to the lower surface 539e and the upper surface 630a, and a force component Fp (= F × sin θ) in a direction parallel to the lower surface 539e and the upper surface 630a. Can be disassembled. Here, the force F is approximated as a concentrated load acting on the center in the width direction of the upper surface 630a of the second coupling member 630.

  In this case, in this embodiment, the angle θ with respect to the horizontal plane of the lower surface 539e and the upper surface 630a is set to be smaller than the angle α with respect to the vertical direction of the inner link member 621 and the outer link member 622. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the acting direction of the force component Fv is extended starting from the center in the width direction of the upper surface 630a, the extension line is on the inner side (inner link member 621) of the proximal end shaft 622a of the outer link member 622. Of the base end shaft 621a side).

  As a result, as shown in FIG. 45, at the coupling position, the pair of second coupling members 630 are arranged adjacent to each other on the left and right, and the direction (vertical) is substantially orthogonal to the adjacent direction of the pair of second coupling members 630. Direction, the vertical direction of FIG. 45), the first coupling member 539 is lowered toward the second coupling member 630, and the lower surface 539 e of the first coupling member 539 is brought into contact with each of the upper surfaces 630 a of the pair of second coupling members 630. Then, a force can be formed in a direction in which the pair of second coupling members 630 are brought close to each other in the adjacent direction. As a result, not only the lower surface 539e of the first coupling member 539 and the upper surface 630a of the second coupling member 630 can be coupled, but also the opposing surfaces 630b of the pair of second coupling members 630 can be coupled to each other. It is possible to ensure a presentation effect by coupling the first coupling member 539 and the pair of second coupling members 630).

  That is, even in a conventional gaming machine, a pair of members are provided so as to be movable, and the pair of members are retracted to different retracted positions, and moved from the different retracted positions to be disposed at the combined position. There is one that joins these members together (for example, see JP 2012-115300 A). In this case, when the coupling is not properly performed, such as a gap is formed between the pair of members at the coupling position, the effect of rendering the pair of members together is impaired. However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since the pair of members are symmetrical, it is relatively easy to connect the pair of members face to face, but three or more members are properly connected ( That is, it was difficult to combine them while suppressing the generation of gaps.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, as described above, when the lower surface 539e of the first coupling member 539 is brought into contact with each of the upper surfaces 630a of the pair of second coupling members 630 at the coupling position, Since a force in a direction in which the second coupling members 630 are adjacent to each other can be formed in the adjacent direction, a gap is generated between the lower surface 539e of the first coupling member 539 and the upper surface 630a of the second coupling member 630. Not only can this be suppressed, but these members can be coupled to each other while suppressing the occurrence of a gap between the opposing surfaces 630b of the pair of second coupling members 630. That is, three or more members can be appropriately coupled to each other, and a production effect by the coupling can be ensured.

  In this case, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 32 and 45, the pair of second coupling members 630 has a front-view shape (on FIGS. 32 and 45) on the upper surface 630 a side (the upper side of FIGS. 32 and 45). The shape shown in the drawing is a concave shape with the center recessed downward (downward in FIGS. 32 and 45), while the first coupling member 539 is viewed from the lower surface 539e side (lower side in FIGS. 32 and 45). The shape (the shape illustrated in FIGS. 32 and 45) corresponds to the shape of the pair of second coupling members 630, and the center protrudes downward (downward in FIGS. 32 and 45).

  Therefore, as described above, at the reference position, the first coupling member 539 is lowered toward the pair of second coupling members 630, and the lower surfaces 539e of the first coupling members 539 are aligned with the upper surfaces 630a of the pair of second coupling members 630. When contacted with each other, due to the concave shape and the protruding shape, the first coupling member 539 enters between the pair of second coupling members 630, and the first coupling member 539 is paired with the pair of second coupling members 630. The player is reminded of a mode in which the players are spread apart in a direction away from each other (that is, a mode in which a gap is formed between the opposing surfaces 630b).

  On the other hand, according to this embodiment, the lower surface 539e of the first coupling member 539 is brought into contact with each of the upper surfaces 630a of the pair of second coupling members 630 at the coupling position, so that the pair of second coupling members. By forming a force in a direction in which the 630s are brought close to each other, the pair of second coupling members 630 can be coupled while suppressing generation of a gap between the opposing surfaces 630b. As a result, the player can be operated in a manner different from the player's expectation, and the effect can be enhanced.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 46 to 57, the annular motion unit 700 will be described.

  FIG. 46 is a front perspective view of the annular operation unit 700 in a state where the ring forming member 790 is disposed at the retracted position, and FIG. 47 is a view of the annular ring in a state where the ring forming member 790 is disposed at the coupling position. 7 is a front perspective view of an operation unit 700. FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 46 and 47, the annular motion unit 700 includes a pair of annular forming members 790 that are moved up and down via a link member 770, and, as described above, the opening 211a (third symbol display). Below the device 81 (refer to FIG. 2)) and disposed on the back case 210 at a position on the back side of the rotary operation unit 300 (refer to FIGS. 6 to 9). The annular operation unit 700 is moved up and down while rotating the pair of annular forming members 790 and arranged at the retracted position shown in FIG. 46 or the coupled position shown in FIG.

  In the retracted position shown in FIG. 46, the pair of ring forming members 790 are lowered downward while being separated from each other left and right, and the front side of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is opened (FIG. 6). reference). On the other hand, at the coupling position shown in FIG. 47, the pair of ring forming members 790 is raised upward while being rotated in the direction close to each other, and the pair of ring forming members 790 is coupled to form the third symbol display device. An annular shape is formed on the front side of 81 (see FIG. 10).

  In this case, according to the ring operating unit 700, when the pair of ring forming members 790 are raised upward and arranged at the coupling position, the ring forming members 790 are mechanically moved to the coupling position (raised position). As a result, the energy consumption of the drive motor 740 required for holding the pair of ring forming members 790 at the coupling position can be suppressed.

  48 is an exploded front perspective view of the annular motion unit 700 when the exploded annular motion unit 700 is viewed from the front, and FIG. 49 is an exploded view of the annular motion unit 700 when the exploded annular motion unit 700 is viewed from the back. It is a rear perspective view.

  As shown in FIGS. 48 and 49, the annular motion unit 700 includes an intermediate case body 710, a back case body 720 disposed on the back side of the intermediate case body 710, and a side opposite to the back case 720. The front case body 730 disposed on the front side of the intermediate case body 710, the drive motor 740 disposed in the intermediate case 710 and generating a rotational driving force, and the rotational driving force of the driving motor 740 are transmitted. A gear group (first gear 751 to sixth gear 756), a rack and pinion mechanism (pinion gear 761 and a pair of racks 762) for converting the rotational motion transmitted through the gear group into a linear motion, and A pair of link members 770 whose base ends are rotatably supported by a pair of racks 762 in the rack and pinion mechanism, and the pair of link members 770 An elevating base member 780 whose tip is axially supported, proximal to the elevating base member 780 is formed mainly includes a pair of annular member 790 which is rotatably supported.

  The intermediate case body 710 holds the gear group and the rack and pinion mechanism so as to be rotatable and slidable with respect to the rear case body 720 disposed on the rear side, and is disposed on the front side. 730 is a member that holds the base end of the link member 770 so as to be slidably displaceable with the main body 730. The main body 711 is formed in a flat plate shape that is horizontally long when viewed from the front, and the insertion groove 712 formed in the opening of the main body 711. And an overhanging portion 713 projecting upward from the upper edge of the main body portion 711.

  The insertion grooves 712 are inserted through the insertion shafts 772 of the pair of link members 770 disposed on the front side of the intermediate case body 710 (main body portion 711), and the insertion shafts 772 of the pair of link members 770 that are inserted therethrough are inserted. It is a groove-like opening that is inserted through the insertion holes 762 c of the pair of racks 762 on the back side of the main body 711, and extends linearly along the longitudinal direction of the main body 711. The insertion groove 712 has a groove width that is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the insertion shaft 772 of the link member 770.

  The overhanging portion 713 is a part that abuts against the back surface of the link member 770 and suppresses the swinging of the link member 770 in the front-rear direction (for example, the vertical direction in FIG. 56). And is formed in a substantially triangular shape in front view that widens toward the upper edge of the main body portion 711 from the leading end of the overhang, and the front surface 713a thereof is the front surface 711a of the main body portion 711. It is formed so as to be flush with each other (smoothly connected without any step and parallel to each other).

  Therefore, as will be described later, when the link member 770 is rotated (displaced) toward the standing state, the front surface 713a of the overhanging portion 713 contacts the back surface of the link member 770 (FIGS. 47 and 56). In addition, when the link member 770 is in an upright state, the link member 770 can be sandwiched between the front surface 713a of the overhang portion 713 and the column portion 732 of the case body 730 (see FIG. 47). . Thereby, since the posture of the link member 770 can be brought into contact with the link member 770 in an upright state where the posture of the link member 770 is particularly unstable and in the vicinity thereof, the swing of the link member 770 in the front-rear direction can be effectively suppressed.

  In addition, the edge part of the overhang | projection part 713 is curved and formed in circular arc shape in front view. Therefore, as the link member 770 stands up (that is, as its posture tends to become unstable), the area of the front surface 713a of the overhanging portion 713 that can contact the back surface of the link member 770 can be increased. While the swaying of the link member 770 in the front-rear direction can be effectively suppressed, the area in which the overhanging portion 713 is visually recognized from the front can be further reduced to prevent the appearance from being damaged.

  The overhanging portion 713 has a head 713b formed at the front end in the overhanging direction (the upper side in FIGS. 48 and 49) protruding frontward (front), and this head 713b is a front case body 730 described later. Connected to the top of the column 732. Therefore, as described later, when the pair of link members 770 stands upright, the head portion 713b of the overhang portion 713 is interposed between the pair of link members 770 facing each other.

  The back case body 720 is a member that holds the gear group and the rack and pinion mechanism so as to be rotatable and slidable with respect to the intermediate case body 710, and has a main body 721 formed in a flat plate shape that is horizontally long when viewed from the front. An insertion groove 722 having an opening formed in the main body 721, a front end guide groove 723 and a rear end guide groove 724 arranged in parallel to the insertion groove 722, and a gear group (second gear 752 to sixth gear 756) And a plurality of shafts 725 that rotatably support the pinion gear 761.

  The insertion groove 722 has an insertion shaft 772 of the link member 770 protruding from the back surface of the rack 762 (that is, an insertion shaft 772 inserted into the insertion hole 762c of the rack 762 via the insertion groove 712 of the intermediate case body 710). It is a groove-shaped opening for receiving, and extends linearly along the longitudinal direction of the main body 721. That is, the insertion groove 722 is formed at a position overlapping the insertion groove 712 of the intermediate case body 710 in a front view in the assembled state. The insertion groove 722 is set to have a groove width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the insertion shaft 772 of the link member 770.

  The front end guide groove 723 and the rear end guide groove 724 are groove-shaped openings for allowing the front end guide piece 762 a and the rear end guide shaft 762 b of the rack 762 to be inserted and restricting the moving direction thereof. They are arranged in parallel with the insertion groove 722 with a predetermined interval therebetween. The front end guide groove 723 is set to have a groove width smaller than that of the rear end guide groove 724, and the rear end guide shaft 762 b of the rack 762 cannot be inserted into the front end guide groove 723. . Thereby, the assembly defect at the time of assembling the rack 762 to the back case body 720 can be suppressed, and as a result, the workability of the assembly work can be improved.

  The front case body 730 is a member that holds the pair of link members 770 so as to be slidable with respect to the intermediate case body 710, and has a main body portion 731 that is formed in a flat plate shape that is horizontally long when viewed from the front, and the main body portion 731. And a columnar column portion 732 that is disposed in front of the column and extends along the vertical direction.

  The main body portion 731 has a back surface 731a formed as a flat surface parallel to the front surface 711a of the main body portion 711 and the front surface 713a of the overhang portion 713 in the intermediate case body 710, and the link member 770 is in a tilted state as will be described later. When rotating (displaced) between the standing state and the front surface and the back surface of the link member 770, the back surface 731a of the main body portion 731, the front surface 711a of the main body portion 711, and the front surface 713a of the overhang portion 713 are arranged. Make contact. Accordingly, the link member 770 can be rotated (displaced) between the tilted state and the standing state while effectively suppressing the swing of the link member 770 in the front-rear direction (for example, the vertical direction in FIG. 54). it can.

  The column portion 732 is a portion for holding the guide rod 733 inside and sandwiching the link member 770 with the overhang portion 713 of the intermediate case body 710, and the front surface (the front left side in FIG. 48) is opened. It is formed in a box shape. The guide rod 733 is a member for guiding the ascending / descending of the elevating base body 780, and is formed as a rod-shaped body having a circular cross section from a metal material. Retained. In this way, the guide rod 733 is formed using a dead space by forming the pillar portion 732 into a box shape with the front face open and storing the guide rod 733 inside the pillar portion 732. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the size of the entire annular operation unit 700.

  As will be described later, the guide rod 733 is inserted into the guided portion 784 of the lifting base body 780 so that the moving direction of the lifting base body 780 is changed to the vertical direction (the guide rod 733 of the guide rod 733 via the guided portion 784). Guide in the axial direction). In this case, the guide bar 733 is disposed forward (front side) with respect to the tooth surface of the rack 762 and rearward (back side) with respect to the lifting base body 780 (main body portion 781). In addition, it is possible to achieve both the effect of arranging the lifting base body 780 offset to the front side with respect to the rack 762 and ensuring the smooth lifting operation of the lifting base body 780.

  The drive motor 740 is disposed on the front side of the intermediate case body 710, and projects the drive shaft to the back side of the intermediate case body 710 (main body portion 711). A first gear 751 is fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 740, and the second gear 752 to the sixth gear 756 that are respectively supported by the plurality of shafts 725 of the back case body 720 are fixed to the first gear 751. Are engaged with each other in order, and the sixth gear 756 is engaged with a pinion gear 761 pivotally supported on the shaft 725 of the back case body 720.

  As described above, the rack and pinion mechanism includes the pinion gear 761 and a pair of racks 762. The pinion gear 761 is rotatably supported on the shaft 725 of the rear case body 720, and the pair of pinion gears 761 is sandwiched therebetween. The racks 762 are opposed to each other in a posture in which their tooth surfaces face each other.

  The rack 762 has a front end guide piece 762a and a rear end guide shaft 762b projecting from one end and the other end in the longitudinal direction, respectively, and an insertion hole 762c is formed through the side of the rear end guide shaft 762b. . The front end guide piece 762a is formed as a rectangular parallelepiped protrusion, and the rear end guide shaft 762b is formed as a shaft body having a circular cross section. As described above, the front end guide piece 762a and the rear end guide shaft 762b are inserted into the front end guide groove 723 and the rear end guide groove 724 of the rear case body 720, thereby allowing the rack 762 to slide (linear motion). The direction is restricted by the extending direction of both guide grooves 723 and 724.

  The pair of link members 770 is a member for constituting a link mechanism that transmits the driving force of the drive motor 740 transmitted via the rack and pinion mechanism to the elevating base body 780 and the ring forming member 790. One side (base end) is connected to the rack 762 and the other side in the longitudinal direction (tip end) is connected to the elevating base body 780 and the ring forming member 790. Here, a detailed configuration of the link member 770 will be described with reference to FIG.

  50 (a) is a front perspective view of the link member 770, FIG. 50 (b) is a rear perspective view of the link member 770, and FIG. 50 (c) is a portion Lc of FIG. 50 (a). FIG. 50D is a partially enlarged front perspective view of the link member 770, and FIG. 50D is a side view of the link member 770 as viewed in the direction of the arrow Ld in FIG.

  The link member 770 includes a long plate-shaped main body 771, an insertion shaft 772 projecting from the back surface of the main body 771 on one longitudinal side (base end) of the main body 771, and the insertion shaft 772. A protruding wall portion 773 protruding from the front surface of the main body portion 771 on the other side in the longitudinal direction (front end) of the main body portion 771 on the opposite side, and a gear portion disposed at the protruding front end of the protruding wall portion 773. 774.

  As described above, the insertion shaft 772 is a shaft body having a circular cross section that is inserted into the insertion hole 762 c of the rack 762 via the insertion shaft 712 of the intermediate case body 710. The protruding wall portion 773 is a portion for offsetting the arrangement position of the gear portion 774 toward the front (front) side of the main body portion 771, and protrudes from the front surface of the main body portion 771 at a protruding height h. The gear portion 774 includes a shaft support hole 774a formed penetrating in the center and a plurality of teeth 774b engraved on the outer periphery around the shaft support hole 774, and the shaft support hole 774a has a shaft of the elevating base body 780. 782 is inserted (supported), and meshed with the gear portion 792 (teeth 792b) of the ring forming member 790 via the teeth 774b.

  In the present embodiment, the gear portion 774 (teeth 774b) is formed as a spur gear whose tooth direction is parallel to the axial direction, and the teeth 774b of the gear portion 774 extend over the entire wall surface of the protruding wall portion 774. It is engraved. Therefore, even when the gear portion 774 is relatively displaced with respect to the gear portion 792 of the ring forming member 790 to be engaged by the deflection or twist of the link member 770 (main body portion 771) (FIGS. 48 and FIG. 49), teeth 774b that are engraved on the wall surface of the projecting wall portion 774 can be engaged with the gear portion 792 (teeth 792b) of the ring forming member 790. It is possible to suppress the disengagement between the portion 774 and the gear portion 792. Further, even when the relative displacement due to the deflection or twist described above occurs and the gear portions 774 and 792 are relatively displaced in the axial direction, the teeth engraved by extending on the wall surface of the projecting wall portion 774 774b can secure a meshing area between the gear portion 774 (teeth 774b) and the gear portion 792 (teeth 792b), thereby suppressing uneven wear of these teeth 774b and 772b and improving its durability. Can be achieved.

  Here, for example, if the body portion 771 is connected to the outer peripheral surface (radially outward) of the gear portion 774, it is easy to ensure the area of the seating surface on the axial end surface of the gear portion 774. However, in this embodiment, since the protruding wall portion 773 is connected to the back surface (axial end surface) of the gear portion 774, the protruding wall portion 773 can be secured on the axial end surface of the gear portion 774. The area of the seating surface is reduced.

  In this case, the protruding wall portion 773 has a wall surface opposite to the wall surface engraved by extending the teeth 774b of the gear portion 774 (the wall surface on the axial center side of the shaft support hole 774a) of the shaft support hole 774. Since it is formed as a concave curved surface that is curved in an arc shape centering on the shaft center, even if the protruding wall portion 773 is connected to the back surface (axial end surface) of the gear portion 774, the shaft of the gear portion 774 The area of the seating surface can be secured on the end surface in the direction, and the diameter of the collar C (see FIG. 49) disposed on the end surface in the axial direction of the gear portion 774 can be increased accordingly. Further, when the link member 770 (the main body 771, the projecting wall 773, and the gear 774) is integrally formed from a resin material, the projecting wall 773 is opposite to the wall on which the teeth 774b are formed. By forming the wall surface as a concave curved surface, not only the projecting wall portion 773 but also the overall thickness including the main body portion 771 and the gear portion 774 can be made uniform, and the moldability can be improved.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, the protruding wall portion 773 is engraved with the teeth 774b over the entire surface (that is, up to the connecting portion with the front surface of the main body portion 771), so that a region where the teeth 774b are formed is sufficiently large. And the engagement with the gear portion 792 (see FIGS. 48 and 49) of the ring forming member 790 can be more reliably suppressed. Further, as described above, when the link member 770 (the main body portion 771, the protruding wall portion 773 and the gear portion 774) is integrally formed from a resin material, the teeth 774b extend only partway along the protruding wall portion 773. In each case, the thickness of the projecting wall portion 773 can be made uniform over the entirety, and the moldability can be further improved.

  As described above, in the link member 770, the protruding wall portion 773 protrudes from the front surface of the main body portion 771 at the protruding height h, and the gear portion 774 is arranged at the protruding end of the protruding wall portion 773. Therefore, the gear portion 774 can be separated from the main body portion 771 by the protruding height h of the protruding wall portion 773. That is, in the assembled state, the arrangement position of the elevating base body 780 can be separated (offset) from the rack 762 to the front (front) by the protruding height h of the protruding wall portion 773 (FIG. 55). And FIG. 57). The effect of this offset will be described later.

  Returning to FIG. 48 and FIG. The elevating base body 780 is a member that is moved up and down between the retracted position and the coupling position by the driving force of the driving motor 740 transmitted through the link member 770. The main body 780 and the back surface of the main body 780 And a pair of shafts 782 that support the gear portion 774 (shaft support hole 774a) of the link member 770, and a gear portion 792 (shaft support) of the ring forming member 790 that is juxtaposed below the pair of shafts 782. A pair of shafts 783 that pivotally support the holes 792a), and disposed below the pair of shafts 783 on the back surface of the main body portion 781, and are guided in the vertical direction by the column portion 732 (guide rod 733) of the front case body 730. A guided portion 784 and a cover body 785 disposed on the back surface of the main body portion 781.

  A plurality of insertion holes through which the guide rod 733 can be inserted are formed in the guided portion 784, and the guide rod 733 is inserted into the insertion hole, so that the moving direction of the elevating base body 780 is the axial direction of the guide rod 733. It is restricted only in the direction along.

  The cover body 785 is a member arranged to face the axial end faces of the gear portion 774 of the link member 770 and the gear portion 792 of the ring forming member 790 (see FIG. 51), and has a substantially trapezoidal head in front view. A portion 785a and an extending portion 785b extending downward from the lower edge of the head portion and having a width narrower than the head portion 785a, and these are integrally formed from a thin metal plate. . As will be described later, when relative displacement occurs in the gear portions 774 and 792, the cover body 785 (the head portion 785a and the extending portion 785b) is brought into contact with the axial end surfaces of the gear portions 774 and 792. Therefore, the relative displacement can be suppressed, and the meshing state between the gear portions 774 and the meshing state between the gears 774 can be properly maintained.

  The gear portion 774 of the link member 770 and the gear portion 792 of the ring forming member 790 have shafts 782 and 783 inserted through the shaft support holes 774a and 792a of the gear portions 774 and 792, respectively. A fastening screw is fastened and fixed while a collar C having a diameter larger than that of the shaft support holes 774a and 792a is interposed at the tips of the shafts 782 and 783, so that the shafts 782 and 783 are rotatably supported. The

  The pair of ring forming members 790 are members that are rotationally driven by the driving force of the drive motor 740 that is transmitted via the link member 770 and that form an annular shape at the coupling position. A main body 791 formed in a shape divided into two and a gear portion 792 disposed on one side (base end) in the circumferential direction of the main body 791 are mainly provided. The gear portion 792 is a portion that is pivotally supported by the elevating base body 780 and meshed with the gear portion 774 of the link member 770, and a shaft support hole 792a that is formed through the center, and the shaft support hole 792a is the center. And a plurality of teeth 792b carved on the outer periphery.

  A magnet (not shown) is embedded in the other circumferential side (tip) of the main body 791 opposite to the side where the gear portion 792 is disposed, and an annular shape is formed at the coupling position. When doing so (see FIG. 47), the tips of the ring forming member 790 can be brought into close contact with each other using the magnetic force of the magnet. As a result, an annular shape can be reliably formed by the pair of annular forming members 790.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 51, a connection state between the link member 770, the elevating base body 780, and the ring forming member 790 will be described. FIG. 51 is a partially enlarged rear view of the annular motion unit 700. FIG. 51 illustrates a state in which the elevating base body 780 is disposed between the retracted position and the coupling position, and corresponds to the state of FIG. 54 described later.

  As shown in FIG. 51, in the elevating base body 780, the ends (gear portions 774) of the pair of link members 770 are respectively supported by a pair of shafts 782 (see FIG. 49), and a pair of shafts 783 (see FIG. 51). 49), the base ends (gear portion 792) of the pair of ring forming members 790 are respectively pivotally supported, and the gear portion 774 of the link member 770 and the gear portion 792 of the ring forming member 790 are engaged with each other.

  Therefore, as will be described later, the rotational driving force of the drive motor 740 is transmitted to the pair of link members 770 via the rack and pinion mechanism, and the pair of link members 770 causes the gear portion 774 (see the shaft 782, see FIG. 49). The center is rotated with respect to the elevating base body 780, and the rotation is transmitted to the ring forming member 790 through the meshing of the gear portions 774 and 792, so that the ring forming member 790 is rotated by the gear portion 792 (shaft). 783, see FIG. 49), and is rotated with respect to the gear unit elevating base body 780. At the same time, the pair of link members 770 is raised or lowered with respect to the case bodies 710, 720, 730 by raising or lowering the case bodies 710, 720, 730 (FIG. 52). To FIG. 57).

  Here, the elevating base body 780 is connected to the distal end of a link member 770 formed in a long plate shape, and is moved up and down with respect to each case body 710, 720, 730 via the link member 770. Sometimes, the link member 770 (main body portion 771) is likely to be vibrated or swayed in the front-rear direction (vertical direction in FIG. 51) of the elevating base body 780 due to bending or twisting. Also, the ring forming member 790 is also formed in a long plate shape, and the distal end opposite to the base end connected to the lifting base body 780 is a free end. It is easy to generate vibration and shaking with respect to the lifting base body 780. In particular, in this embodiment, since the magnet is embedded at the tip of the ring forming member 790, the weight of the tip is increased, and the ring forming member 790 is more likely to generate vibration and shaking.

  Such vibration and shaking of the elevating base body 780 in the front-rear direction causes a relative displacement between the link member 770 and the elevating base body 780. That is, a relative displacement is caused between the gear portion 774 formed integrally with the link member 770 and the gear portion 792 of the ring forming member 790. Similarly, vibration or shaking of the ring forming member 790 with respect to the lifting base body 780 causes relative displacement between the gear portion 792 formed integrally with the ring forming member 790 and the gear portion 774 of the link member 770. . Therefore, the meshing state of the gear portions 774 and 792 becomes unstable, and not only the rotation operation of the ring forming member 790 and the lifting operation of the lifting base body 780 are not properly performed due to the poor transmission of the driving force, but the gear portion 774 is not properly performed. 792 is accelerated, and the durability is lowered.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, a cover body 785 is disposed on the back surface of the elevating base body 780, and the cover body 785 is axially end faces of the gear portion 774 of the link member 770 and the gear portion 792 of the ring forming member 790. Arranged to face each other. As a result, even if the link member 770 (main body portion 771) is bent or twisted, the lifting base body 780 and the ring forming member 790 are vibrated and shaken, and relative displacement is generated between the gear portions 774 and 790. The cover body 785 (the head 785a and the extending portion 785b) is brought into contact with the axial end surfaces of the gear portions 774 and 790, so that the relative displacement between the gear portions 774 and 792 is suppressed. The state can be kept appropriate. As a result, it is possible to suppress poor transmission of the driving force, properly perform the rotation operation of the ring forming member 790 and the lifting operation of the lifting base body 780, and suppress wear of the gear portions 774, 792. Durability can be improved.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 51, the head 785a of the cover body 785 is disposed above the gear portion 774 of the link member 770, and the extending portion 785b of the cover body 785 is disposed on the link member 770. They are arranged between the gear portions 774 and between the gear portions 792 of the ring forming member 790. Therefore, of the end surfaces in the axial direction of the gear portions 774 and 792, the main body portion 771 of the link member 770 and the main body portion 791 of the ring forming member 790 opposite to the main body portion 791 across the shaft 782 and the shaft 783 (see FIG. 49). The head portion 785a and the extending portion 785b of the cover body 785 are brought into contact with the end surface in the axial direction, and the relative displacement of the gear portions 774 and 792 can be effectively restricted.

  For example, when the link member 770 is in an upright state or in a state close to the upright state (for example, the state shown in FIG. 51), the shaft 782 (see FIG. 49) is sandwiched between the main body 771 of the link member 770. Since the head 785a of the cover member 785 is disposed on the opposite side, the displacement of the gear portion 774 caused by the deflection or twist of the main body 771 of the link member 770 is more effectively caused by the head 785a of the cover body 785. Can be regulated. Similarly, for example, when the link member 770 is in a tilted state (for example, the state shown in FIG. 52) or in a state close to the tilted state, a shaft 782 (see FIG. 49) with respect to the main body 771 of the link member 770. ) Is disposed on the opposite side of the cover member 785 so that the displacement of the gear portion 774 caused by the deflection or twist of the main body portion 771 of the link member 770 is reduced. It can be effectively regulated by 785b.

  On the other hand, regarding the ring forming member 790, the left and right sides of the gear portion 792 (left and right in FIG. 51) regardless of the rotational position (that is, whether the link member 770 is standing or tilting). Since the main body portion 791 of the ring forming member 790 is disposed on the opposite side of the shaft 783 (see FIG. 49) with respect to the main body portion 792 of the ring forming member 790, the extending portion of the cover member 785 is provided. 785b is disposed, and the displacement of the gear portion 792 due to the deflection or twist of the main body portion 791 of the ring forming member 790 can be effectively restricted by the extending portion 785b of the cover body 785.

  In the present embodiment, the gear portions 774 of the pair of link members 770 are not only meshed with the gear portions 792 of the ring forming member 790 positioned below the pair of link members 770 but also between the gear portions 774 adjacent to the left and right. Are also engaged. Similarly, the gear portions 792 of the pair of ring forming members 790 are not only meshed with the gear portions 774 of the link member 770 positioned above them, but the gear portions 792 adjacent to the left and right are also meshed. Is done.

  Thereby, it is possible to improve the synchronization accuracy of the rotational operation of the pair of ring forming members 790. That is, the rotational driving force of the drive motor 740 is transmitted to the pair of link members 770 via the rack and pinion mechanism, and further transmitted from the pair of link members 770 to the pair of ring forming members 790 (see FIG. 48 and FIG. 49). In this case, the pair of racks 762 of the rack and pinion mechanism are independent from each other with respect to the pinion gear 761. Therefore, when the pair of rack members 770 and the pair of ring forming members 790 are also independent of each other, the phase shift amount (for example, backlash amount or dimensional tolerance) of the rack 762 with respect to the pinion gear 761 is a pair of racks 762. Further, the phase shift amount of the link member 770 with respect to the rack 762 (for example, the amount of shakiness of the insertion shaft 772 with respect to the insertion hole 762c) differs between the pair of link members 770, and further, the ring forming member with respect to the link member 770 790 phase shift amount (for example, the amount of shakiness of the shafts 782, 783 with respect to the shaft support holes 774a, 792a or the amount of shakiness of the teeth 792b with respect to the teeth 774b) differs between the pair of ring forming members 790. As a result, the phase shift occurs in the rotational operation of the pair of ring forming members 790. Synchronization accuracy is reduced.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, the gear portions 774 of the pair of link members 770 are meshed with each other and the gear portions 792 of the pair of ring forming members 790 are meshed with each other. Even if this occurs in the transmission path, the phase shift does not appear in the rotational operation of the ring forming member 790 (that is, the phase shift can be absorbed in the most downstream of the drive force transmission path), As a result, it is possible to improve the synchronization accuracy in the rotation operation of the ring forming member 790.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 52 to 57, the operation of the annular motion unit 700 will be described. In this description, FIGS. 46 to 51 are referred to as appropriate.

  FIG. 52 is a schematic rear view of the annular motion unit 700 in which the pair of annular forming members 790 are arranged in the retracted position, and FIG. 53 is an LIII- FIG. It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of the annular operation unit 700 along the line LIII. FIG. 54 is a schematic rear view of the annular motion unit 700 schematically showing the annular motion unit 700 in which the pair of annular forming members 790 is arranged at a position between the retracted position and the coupling position. 55 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the annular motion unit 700 taken along line LV-LV in FIG. 56 is a schematic rear view of the annular motion unit 700 in which a pair of annular formation members 790 are arranged at the coupling position, and FIG. 57 is a schematic diagram of the LVII- FIG. It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of the annular operation unit 700 in the LVII line.

  52 to 57, in order to simplify the drawings and facilitate understanding, the outer shell structure including the intermediate case body 510, the back case body 520, and the front case body 530, the drive motor 740, and the gear group (first gear) The drive structure including the first gear 751 to the sixth gear 756) or the cover body 785 is not shown. However, in FIGS. 52, 54 and 56, the position of the upper edge in the main body 711 and the overhanging portion 713 (front surfaces 711a and 713a) of the intermediate case body 710 and the main body portion 731 (rear surface 731a) of the front case body 730 are shown. ) Schematically illustrates the position of the upper edge in each case using a two-dot chain line.

  As shown in FIGS. 52 and 53, in a state in which the pair of ring forming members 790 are arranged at the retracted position, the pair of racks 762 are expanded in a direction away from each other, and the distal end side thereof (the distal end guide piece 762a). Side tooth surface is meshed with the pinion gear 761. Therefore, the pair of link members 770 whose base end side (insertion shaft 772) is pivotally supported by the rear end sides (insertion holes 762c) of the pair of racks 762 are in an inclined state. The elevating base body 780 on which the front end side (gear portion 774) is pivotally supported is disposed at the lowermost position. In addition, the pair of ring forming members 790 are expanded in a direction away from each other (distributed left and right).

  When the drive motor 540 is driven from this state (a state where the pair of ring forming members 790 are disposed at the retracted position) and the rotational driving force is transmitted to the pinion gear 761 via the gear group (FIGS. 48 and 49). 52), the pinion gear 761 is rotated clockwise (clockwise) in FIG. 52, and the pair of racks 762 shortens the unfolded length as the pinion gear 761 rotates (the rear end side insertion holes 762c are close to each other). In the direction of movement). As a result, the pair of link members 770 are gradually raised by their base end sides (insertion shafts 772) being displaced toward the center (that is, in directions close to each other).

  As a result, as shown in FIG. 54 and FIG. 55, relative rotation of the pair of link members 770 with respect to the elevating base body 780 is formed, and the rotation is performed via the gear portions 774 and 792, and a pair of ring forming members. By being transmitted to 790, the pair of ring forming members 790 are rotated relative to the lifting base body 780, and the ends of the pair of ring members 790 are brought close to each other. At the same time, by the standing operation of the pair of link members 770, a relative displacement of the lifting base body 790 with respect to the rack and pinion mechanism (pinion gear 761 and rack 762) is formed, and the lifting base 790 is raised.

  As described above, in the annular motion unit 700, the elevating base body 780 is pivotally supported at the distal ends of the pair of link members 770 whose base ends are pivotally supported by the rack and pinion mechanism, and the pair of link members 770 are raised or tilted. The elevating base body 780 can be moved up and down by further engaging the gear portion 792 of the annular forming member 790 whose base end is pivotally supported by the elevating base body 780 with the gear portion 774 of the link member 770, The ring forming member 790 can be rotated by the relative rotation of the link member 770 with respect to the elevating base body 780.

  That is, means for transmitting the driving force of the driving motor 740 to the lifting base body 790 (means for lifting) and means for transmitting the driving force of the driving motor 740 to the ring forming member 790 (means for rotating) are individually provided. Therefore, the link member 770 can also be used as the link member 770, and accordingly, the number of parts can be reduced and the product cost can be reduced. Further, the rotational movement of the ring forming member 790 and the linear movement in the vertical direction can be performed in parallel, that is, the circular ring is not formed at a fixed position, but the position is changed in the vertical direction. Since the ring is formed in order, the effect of the production can be enhanced.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the gear portion 774 of the link member 770 and the gear portion 792 of the ring forming member 790 are engaged with each other, and the link member 770 is engaged via the engagement of these gears 774 and 792. In this case, for example, as shown in FIGS. 54 and 55, when the pair of link members 770 are raised, the position of the center of gravity is increased. The bending and twisting of the member 770 (main body 771) causes vibration and shaking in the front-rear direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 54, the left-right direction in FIG. 55) of the elevating base body 780 (and the pair of ring forming members 790). (The amount of displacement in the front-rear direction increases).

  The link member 770 (main body portion 771) or the ring forming member 790 (main body portion 791) is integrally formed with the link member 770 and the ring forming member 790, such as deflection, torsion, and vibration or shaking in the front-rear direction. By affecting the gear portions 774 and 792 and relatively displacing the gear portions 774 and 792, the gear portions 774792 may be disengaged. Even if the gear portions 774 and 792 can be prevented from being disengaged, the meshing state (meshing area) becomes unstable and the surface pressure concentrates on a part of the tooth surface, so that the tooth 774b 792b, and the durability may be reduced.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the link member 770 is engraved with teeth 774b extending from the wall surface of the protruding wall portion 773 that connects the main body portion 771 and the gear portion 774 (see FIG. 50). ) Even when the above-described relative displacement of the gear portions 774 and 792 occurs, it is easy to maintain the meshing between the gear portions 774 and 792 by the extension of 774b. As a result, not only can the tooth disengagement be suppressed, but also the tooth engagement can be stabilized, uneven wear of the teeth 774b and 792b can be suppressed, and the durability can be improved.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 54 and 55, the pair of ring forming members 790 are arranged at positions intermediate between the retracted position and the coupling position (specifically, the rack 762 with respect to the pinion gear 761 When the rack is disposed at an intermediate position of the relative movable range) and the rising angle of the pair of link members 770 reaches a predetermined angle, the teeth of the gear portion 774 are teeth 774b that are engraved on the protruding wall portion 773. The teeth 774b connected to 774b (see FIG. 50) start meshing with the teeth 792b in the gear portion 792 of the ring forming member 790.

  Therefore, the range from the state shown in FIGS. 54 and 55 to the state shown in FIGS. 56 and 57 described later (that is, the rising angle of the link member 770 increases, In a range in which shaking is likely to occur and the gears 774 and 792 are most easily disengaged, the teeth 774b extended and engraved on the wall surface of the projecting wall portion 773 can be used effectively. As a result, it is possible to effectively suppress the disengagement of the gears 774 and 792 or improve the durability of the teeth 774b and 792b.

  54 and 55, the drive motor 740 drives the pinion gear 761 further in the clockwise direction (clockwise) in FIG. 52, and the pair of racks 762 further shortens their unfolded length (rear end). When the side insertion hole 762c is linearly moved in the direction in which the insertion holes 762c are close to each other, the pair of link members 770 are erected substantially vertically. That is, the direction connecting the shaft 782 (see FIG. 49) of the lifting base body 780 and the insertion shaft 782 of the link member 770 is substantially vertical. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 56 and 57, the pair of ring forming members 790 are arranged at the coupling position, and the tips of the pair of ring forming members 790 are brought into contact with each other, so that the ring shape is changed. It is formed.

  In this case, in a state where the pair of ring forming members 790 are arranged at the coupling position (that is, when the pair of link members 770 are erected upright (posture along the vertical direction)), the pair of link members Between the opposing surfaces of 770, the connecting portion of the column portion 732 of the front case body 730 and the overhang portion 713 of the intermediate case body 710 (refer to the head portion 713b of the overhang portion 713, FIG. 48 and FIG. 49 in this embodiment). Since the left and right side surfaces of the connecting portion (the head portion 713b of the overhang portion 713) are in contact with the opposing surfaces of the pair of link members 770 (see FIG. 56), a pair forming an annular shape The posture of the base member 780 supporting the ring-forming member 790 and the pair of ring-forming members 790 can be stabilized at the coupling position.

  That is, at the coupling position, the pair of link members 770 are erected upright and the center of gravity is increased, so that the pair of link members 770 rotate left and right (left and right in FIG. 56) about the insertion shaft 772. In addition, the rack 762 is also easily moved in the direction of the linear motion (the left-right direction in FIG. 56) in response to the left-right rotation of the pair of link members 770. Therefore, it is difficult to maintain the postures of the link member 770 and the rack 762, and as a result, the postures of the elevating base body 780 and the pair of ring forming members 790 disposed at the distal ends of the link member 770 become unstable.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the connecting portion (the overhang portion) between the front case body 730 (the column portion 732) and the intermediate case body 710 (the overhang portion 713) between the facing surfaces of the pair of link members 770. 713 head 713b) is interposed, the connecting portion (head 713b) causes the pair of link members 770 to rotate in the left-right direction around the insertion shaft 772 and to move in the direction of linear movement of the rack 762. Can be restricted. Accordingly, the posture of the elevating base body 780 and the pair of ring forming members 790 can be stabilized at the coupling position while maintaining the pair of link members 770 in an upright state.

  Further, the pair of link members 770 are arranged so as to face each other substantially symmetrically in the left and right (left and right directions in FIGS. 52, 54 and 56), so that the link member 770 is inclined relatively downward (for example, FIG. 52 to FIG. 55 to 55), a pair of link members 770 are arranged so as to face each other when the pair of link members 770 tries to rotate left and right (left and right directions in FIGS. 52 and 54) about the insertion shaft 772. 770 can cancel each other out, and the posture can be maintained.

  On the other hand, the link member 770 may be formed in a flat plate shape, and it is difficult to maintain its posture with respect to displacement in the front-rear direction (for example, the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 54). In this case, in the present embodiment, the base end side (the insertion shaft 772 side) of the link member 770 is sandwiched between the facing surfaces of the intermediate case body 710 and the front case body 730. That is, when the link member 770 is rotated (displaced) between the tilted state and the standing state, the front case body 730 (main body portion 731) is opposed to the front surface and the back surface on the proximal end side of the link member 770. The back surface 731a can be brought into contact with the front surface 711a of the intermediate case body 710 (main body portion 711). Accordingly, the link member 770 can be stably rotated (displaced) between the tilted state and the standing state while effectively suppressing the swing of the link member 770 in the front-rear direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 54). Can do. As a result, the elevating base body 780 and the pair of ring forming members 790 can be moved up and down while being stabilized.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, a protruding portion 713 is formed to protrude upward at the center portion in the width direction of the intermediate case body 710 (main body portion 711) (see FIGS. 48 and 49). 56, as the center portion in the width direction is approached (that is, as the link member 770 is erected), the position of the upper edge of the front surface 713a is increased (that is, abuts against the back surface of the link member 770). The possible area is increased).

  In this way, the position of the upper edge was raised by partially raising only the central part, rather than raising the position of the upper edge of the front surface 711a of the intermediate case body 710 (main body part 711) as a whole. While suppressing the appearance from being damaged by the wall surface of the intermediate case body 710 (or reducing the arrangement area of the third symbol display device 81), the closer the link member 770 is to the upright state, the more the protrusion 713 It is possible to increase the effect of maintaining the posture of the link member 770 (suppressing shaking in the front-rear direction) by increasing the contactable area between the front surface 713a and the back surface of the link member 770. As a result, the link member 770 can be stably rotated (displaced) in the vicinity of the standing state while suppressing the appearance from being damaged. That is, the postures of the lifting base body 780 and the pair of ring forming members 790 can be stably held in a stopped state at the coupling position, and the postures of the lifting base body 780 and the pair of ring forming members 790 are near the coupling position. Can be raised and lowered while stabilizing.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 52, the protruding portion 713 of the intermediate case body 710 has its front surface 713a retracted to the retracted position (that is, tilted to the lowest position). The shape is set so as to be able to contact the back surface of 770 (see FIG. 46). Thus, the posture of the elevating base body 780 and the pair of ring forming members 790 is stably held in a stopped state at the coupling position, and the elevating base body 780 and the pair of ring forming members 790 are near the coupling position. For the purpose of moving up and down while stabilizing the posture, the lift base 780 disposed at the retracted position (lowermost) using the portion (the overhanging portion 713) whose height of the upper edge is increased, and The effect of stably maintaining the posture of the pair of ring forming members 790 in the stopped state can be obtained at the same time.

  56 and 57, when the drive motor 740 is driven to rotate in the direction opposite to that described above, the pinion gear 761 is rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 56 (counterclockwise), and the pinion gear 761 With the rotation, the pair of racks 762 are deployed (that is, linearly moved in a direction in which the rear end insertion holes 762c are separated from each other). As a result, the pair of link members 770 are gradually tilted, and the pair of ring forming members 790 are retracted to the retracted position, as shown in FIGS.

  Here, in the annular motion member 700, the weight of the elevating base body 780 and the pair of ring forming members 790 acts on the rack and pinion mechanism (the pinion gear 761 and the pair of racks 762) via the pair of link members 770. Is done. That is, the weights of the elevating base body 780 and the pair of ring forming members 790 are applied in the direction in which the pair of racks 762 are deployed via the pair of link members 770. Therefore, the elevating base body 780 and the pair of ring forming members 790 may be lowered from the coupling position. In this case, the descent of the elevating base body 780 is regulated by causing the driving force of the drive motor 740 to oppose the weight of the elevating base body 780 and the pair of ring forming members 790 (that is, the elevating base body 780 is coupled). In the structure of holding in position, the energy consumption required for the drive motor 740 increases.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, as described above, the protruding wall portion 773 is interposed between the main body portion 771 and the gear portion 774 of the link member 770, and the protruding height of the protruding wall portion 773 is set. The gear portion 774 is offset from the main body 711 to the front (front) side by the length h (see FIG. 50D). Therefore, for example, as shown in FIGS. 55 and 57, the elevating base body 780 is a direction parallel to the tooth surface of the rack 762 and perpendicular to the moving direction of the rack 762 (that is, the paper surface of FIGS. 54 and 56). The thickness dimension of the link member 770 (that is, the total dimension of the thickness dimension of the main body part 771 and the gear part 774 and the projecting height h of the projecting wall part 773) is shown on the front side, the left side of FIGS. Is offset (separated) from the rack 762 by that amount.

  Thereby, the weight of the elevating base body 780 and the pair of ring forming members 790 acts on the rack 762 via the link member 770 even in the above-described offset direction. That is, as a force component applied to the rack 762 from the link member 770, a force component in the direction in which the elevating base body 780 is offset can be generated, and the force component that moves the rack 762 in the moving direction accordingly. Can be reduced. As a result, energy consumption required for the drive motor 740 can be suppressed.

  In particular, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 56, in the coupling position, the link member 770 is erected in a posture along the vertical direction, and the shaft 782 (see FIG. 49) of the lifting base body 780 and the link member 770 are inserted. The direction connecting the shaft 772 is substantially orthogonal to the tooth surface of the rack 762. Therefore, when the weights of the elevating base body 780 and the pair of ring forming members 790 are applied to the rack 762 via the link member 770, the rack 762 serves as a force component that acts on the rack 762 from the link member 770. It is possible to suppress the generation of a force component in the direction in which the link member is expanded (that is, the direction in which the link member 770 in the standing state is tilted). Thereby, even if the driving force of the drive motor 740 is released, the elevating base body 780 and the pair of ring forming members 790 can be held at the coupling position, and as a result, energy consumption required for the drive motor 740 Can be suppressed.

  In detail, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 56, the distance T1 in the horizontal direction (left-right direction in FIG. 56) between the pair of shafts 782 of the lifting base body 780 is the insertion shaft of the pair of link members 770. 772 is made smaller than the distance T2 in the horizontal direction between T2 (T1 <T2). As a result, the pair of link members 770 are erected in a posture that is slightly inclined with respect to the vertical direction (that is, a posture in which the pair of link members 770 has a C shape). In this way, by setting the pair of link members 770 in a C-shaped posture, in order to start the operation from the state shown in FIG. 56 (the coupling position) to the retracted position, the drive motor 740 is configured as described above. When rotationally driving in the opposite direction, the deployment of the pair of racks 762 by the rotational driving (that is, the tilt of the pair of link members 770) can be started easily and reliably.

  In particular, in this embodiment, a magnet is embedded at the tip of the main body 791 of the ring forming member 790, and the tips of the main body 791 are magnetized, so even if the driving force of the drive motor 740 is released. The elevating base body 780 and the pair of ring forming members 790 can be easily held at the coupling position. On the other hand, when starting the operation from the coupling position to the retracted position, it is necessary to release the magnetizing force of the magnet. In this case, keeping the pair of link members 770 in a C-shaped posture (that is, setting T1 <T2) maintains the coupled state at the coupled position and starts the operation from the coupled position to the retracted position. This is particularly effective in terms of both ensuring both the release of the combined state at the time.

  Here, the magnet embedded at the tip of the main body 791 of the ring forming member 790 may be omitted. In this case, the distance T1 in the horizontal direction (left and right direction in FIG. 56) between the pair of shafts 782 of the elevating base body 780 and the distance T2 in the horizontal direction between the insertion shafts 772 of the pair of link members 770 are approximately. Preferably, they are the same (T1 = T2) or the former is larger than the latter (T2 <T1). Thereby, even when the driving force of the drive motor 740 is released, the elevating base body 780 and the pair of ring forming members 790 can be easily held in the coupling position.

  In this embodiment, the guide bar 733 is disposed on the front side (left side in FIG. 57) of the tooth surface of the rack 762 and on the back side (right side in FIG. 57) than the lifting base body 780 (main body portion 781). Is done. The guided portion 784 of the lifting base body 780 through which the guide rod 733 is inserted is disposed at the lowermost position of the lifting base body 780 (main body portion 781). That is, in the direction of the forward offset of the elevating base body 780 with respect to the rack 762, the portion where the insertion shaft 772 of the link member 770 is inserted into the insertion hole 762 c of the rack 762, the elevating base body 780, and the pair of ring forming members A guide rod 733 is disposed at a position between the center of gravity of the structure 790 and the elevation base body 780 is guided up and down via the guide rod 733 and the guided portion 784. With this arrangement, it is possible to achieve both the effects of placing the lifting base body 780 offset from the front side with respect to the rack 762 described above and ensuring the smooth lifting operation of the lifting base body 780.

  Next, the swing operation unit 800 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  As described above, the swing operation unit 800 includes the two arm members 820 (see FIGS. 7 and 11), and includes two units for operating (displacement) both the arm members 820. In other words, the swing operation unit 800 is composed of two units that are disposed on the left and right sides of the opening 211a above the rear case 210 in the front view of the rear case 210. In this case, since the structure (technical idea) for operating (displacement) the arm member 820 is the same in the two units, in the following, one unit of these two units (on the left side of the opening 211a) will be described. The arranged unit (see FIGS. 7 and 11) will be described as a swing operation unit 800.

  58 is a front perspective view of the swing operation unit 800 in a state in which the arm member 820 is retracted to the retracted position, and FIG. 59 is a swing operation unit in a state in which the arm member 820 is protruded to the projecting position. FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 58 and 59, the swing operation unit 800 includes an arm member 820 whose base end is rotatably supported, and a drive motor 830 that applies a rotational driving force to the arm member 820. The arm member 820 is swung (rotated) between the retracted position shown in FIG. 58 and the extended position shown in FIG. At the retracted position, the arm member 820 is in a posture of being vertically lowered and is retracted to the back side of the combined operation unit 400 so that it cannot be seen by the player (see FIG. 6). At the extended position, the arm member 820 has a posture in which its tip is lifted upward and inclined obliquely downward, and the tip of the arm member 820 projects to the front of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 5).

  In this case, in this embodiment, when the arm member 820 is disposed at the extended position shown in FIG. 59, the arm member 820 can be mechanically held at the extended position as described later. Therefore, it is not necessary to oppose the driving force of the drive motor 830 so that the arm member 820 does not rotate toward the retracted position due to the action of gravity (its own weight), and the arm member 820 is moved to the extended position accordingly. Energy consumption of the drive motor 830 required for holding can be suppressed. This detailed configuration will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 60 is an exploded front perspective view of the swing operation unit 800 when the exploded swing operation unit 800 is viewed from the front. 61A is a rear view of the swing operation unit 800 in a state where the arm member 820 is disposed at the retracted position, and FIG. 61B is a swing at the portion LXIb in FIG. 61A. 5 is a partially enlarged rear view of an operation unit 800. FIG. 61 (a) and 61 (b) show the swing operation unit 800 with the mounting base 810 removed.

  As shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, the swing operation unit 800 includes a mounting base 810 disposed in the rear case 210 (see FIG. 7), and a base end rotatably supported by the mounting base 810. An arm member 820, a drive motor 830 that generates a driving force for rotationally driving the arm member 820, and a front case body 840 provided with the drive motor 830 and disposed in front of the mounting base 810. Is mainly configured.

  The attachment base 810 is a member for accommodating the base end of the arm member 820 and the drive motor 830 between the front case body 840 and is formed in a rectangular shape that is vertically long when viewed from the front. The mounting base 810 includes a shaft 811 that protrudes from the front surface thereof and rotatably supports the arm member 820.

  The arm member 820 includes a main body portion 821 formed in an elongated shape, a groove portion 822 formed as a groove-like opening on the proximal end side of the main body portion 821, and a main body portion 821 opposite to the groove portion 822. A decorative portion 823 that is covered on the front side of the front end side and is formed as a decorative body, and a shaft support hole 824 that is formed through the main body portion 821 at a position between the decorative portion 823 and the groove portion 821. Configured primarily for preparation.

  The groove portion 822 includes a first groove 822a that extends linearly, and a second groove 822b that is connected to one end of the first groove 822a and extends while being curved in an arc shape. It is formed as an L-shaped groove from the front side 822b. In other words, in the groove portion 822, a concave portion provided in one of the inner wall surfaces of the first groove 822a facing each other is the second groove 822b.

The arc shape of the second groove 822b is such that the projecting pin 833 is disposed at the end point of the first groove 822a (the connection position between the first groove 822a and the second groove 822b) (see FIG. 63B). In FIG. 4, the arc shape is centered on the drive shaft 831 of the drive motor 830. In addition, the groove widths of the first groove 822a and the second groove 822b are set to the same dimension. The arm member 820 is inserted into the shaft support hole 824 through the shaft 811 of the mounting base 810, so that the base end of the arm member 820 is inserted. Is rotatably supported with respect to the mounting base 810. In this case, the contact surface portion 841 of the front case body 840 is brought into contact with the arm member 820 in a region in front of the main body portion 821 and in the vicinity of the shaft support hole 824 (FIG. 61B). reference). Accordingly, the arm member 820 is held in a state where the base end thereof is rotatable between the mounting base 810 and the front case body 840 facing each other.

  The drive motor 830 has a base end fixed to the drive shaft 831 and a plate-like drive arm 832 extending radially outward from the drive shaft 831, and a protrusion protruding from the distal end of the drive arm 832. It is mainly provided with an installation pin 833, and is fastened and fixed to the back surface of the front case body 840 by a fastening screw in a state where the projection pin 833 is inserted into the groove 822 of the arm member 820.

  As described above, the protruding pin 833 is a portion that is inserted into the groove portion 822 of the arm member 820, and is an outer portion that is equal to or slightly smaller than the groove width of the groove portion 822 (the first groove 822a and the second groove 822b) of the arm member 820. It is formed as a cylindrical body having a diameter. Therefore, when the drive shaft 831 of the drive motor 830 is rotationally driven, the projecting pin 833 is moved in the groove portion 822 of the arm member 820 along the extending direction of the groove portion 822. As a result, the arm member 820 is moved. Is rotated about the axis 811.

  Next, the swinging operation of the swinging operation unit 800 will be described with reference to FIGS. In this description, FIG. 61 is referred to as appropriate.

  62 to 64 are diagrams for explaining the process of moving the arm member 820 of the swing operation unit 800 from the retracted position to the extended position in time series, and FIGS. 62 (a), 63 (a), and FIG. 64 (a) is a rear view of the swing operation unit 800, and FIGS. 62 (b), 63 (b) and 64 (b) are respectively a portion LXIIb of FIG. 62 (a) and FIG. 63 (a). FIG. 65 is a partially enlarged rear view of the swing operation unit 800 in a portion LXIIIb of FIG. 64 and a portion LXIVb of FIG.

  62 shows a state in which the drive motor 830 is driven to rotate and the arm member 820 is swung by a predetermined amount from the retracted position to the extended position, and FIG. 63 shows the arm member 820 in the extended position. FIG. 64 shows the state immediately after reaching the arm member 820 reaching the overhanging position and the drive motor being further driven to rotate.

  As shown in FIGS. 61 (a) and 61 (b), in a state where the arm member 820 is disposed at the retracted position, the arm member 820 is in a posture of hanging downward, and the protruding pin 833 is The groove 822 is located at the start point of the first groove 822a (the end opposite to the side connected to the second groove 822b, the right side in FIG. 61 (b)).

  At this retracted position, the protruding tip end surface of the protruding portion 821a protruding from the side surface of the main body portion 821 of the arm member 820 faces the regulating surface 812 on the side wall of the mounting base 810 with a predetermined interval. Therefore, when the arm member 820 is rotated around the shaft 811 in response to an external force (for example, an external force generated by a player hitting or swinging a gaming machine), the protrusion 821a is applied to the restriction surface 812. The rotation of the arm member 820 can be regulated by making contact, and the rotation can be quickly converged.

  The drive shaft 831 of the drive motor 830 is driven to rotate from the state shown in FIGS. 61A and 61B (the arm member 820 is disposed at the retracted position), and the drive arm 832 is moved to the left of FIG. When rotated around (counterclockwise), the projecting pin 833 is moved toward the end point of the groove 822 in the first groove 822a (the side connected to the second groove 822b, the left side in FIG. 61 (b)). .

  As a result, as shown in FIGS. 62A and 62B, the arm member 820 is rotated clockwise (clockwise) in FIG. 61B about the shaft support hole 824. The drive shaft 831 of the drive motor 830 is further rotated and the drive arm 832 is further rotated counterclockwise (counterclockwise) in FIG. 62B. As a result, the projecting pin 833 is the end point of the first groove 822a of the groove 822. Then, as shown in FIGS. 63 (a) and 63 (b), the arm member 820 is disposed at the extended position.

  Here, also in a conventional gaming machine, a first axis (corresponding to the axis 811), a moving member (corresponding to the arm member 820) rotated around the first axis, and a driving force is applied to the moving member. There is a drive motor (corresponding to the drive motor 830) that rotates the moving member around the first axis by the drive force of the drive means (see, for example, JP 2011-120640 A). In this case, when the moving member is disposed at the raised position (corresponding to the overhang position), it is necessary to prevent the moving member from moving (lowering) due to the action of gravity. In this case, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the movement (lowering) of the moving member is restricted (that is, the moving member is held at the raised position) by making the driving force of the driving motor oppose gravity (the weight of the moving member). Therefore, the energy consumption required for holding the moving member is increased.

  On the other hand, according to the swing operation unit 400 of the present embodiment, the arm member 820 can be released by mechanically holding the arm member 820 at the extended position so that the driving force of the drive motor 830 can be released. Energy consumption required to hold the position can be suppressed.

  That is, according to the present embodiment, the state shown in FIGS. 63A and 63B (the projecting pin 833 reaches the end point of the first groove 822a of the groove portion 822, and the arm member 820 is disposed at the overhanging position. In the state immediately after), the drive motor 830 is further rotationally driven. As a result, the drive arm 832 is further rotated counterclockwise (counterclockwise) in FIG. 62 (b), so that the projecting pin 833 becomes the groove 822 as shown in FIGS. 64 (a) and 64 (b). The second groove 822b is moved (accepted).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the second groove 822b is connected to the end point of the first groove 822a (a concave portion is formed in one of the opposing inner wall surfaces of the first groove 822a. In the state where the arm member 820 is disposed at the overhanging position, the projecting pin 833 is moved into the second groove 822b (on one inner wall surface of the first groove 822a facing each other). Since the projecting pin 833 is received in the recessed portion, the arm member 820 is mechanically held in the extended position (the arm member 820 is centered on the shaft support hole 824 (shaft 811)). Can be controlled). That is, even if the driving force of the drive motor 830 is released, the arm member 820 can be mechanically held at the extended position, and the consumption of the drive motor 830 required to hold the arm member 820 at the extended position accordingly. Energy can be suppressed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the state shown in FIGS. 64A and 64B, the projecting pin 833 and the shaft support hole 824 (the shaft 811) with respect to the direction connecting the drive shaft 831 and the projecting pin 833. ) And the inner wall surfaces of the second groove 822b of the portion where the projecting pin 833 is located are substantially orthogonal to the direction connecting the drive shaft 831 and the projecting pin 833. Formed as follows.

  Therefore, when the arm member 820 is rotated around the shaft support hole 824 (the shaft 811), the inner wall surface of the second groove 822b is directed in a direction that coincides with the direction connecting the drive shaft 831 and the projecting pin 833. Even if the arm member 820 is rotated to press the protruding pin 833 and the protruding pin 833 is pressed by the inner wall surface of the second groove 822b, the drive shaft 831 of the drive motor 830 cannot be rotated. That is, the arm member 820 cannot be rotated.

  Therefore, in a state where the driving force of the drive motor 830 is released, for example, even when the player swings or swings the gaming machine and the arm member 820 is shaken, the arm member 820 is supported by the shaft support hole. Rotation about 824 (shaft 811) can be restricted, and as a result, it can be reliably held in the overhang position.

  In this case, as described above, the arc shape of the second groove 822b is such that, as shown in FIG. 63 (b), the projecting pin 833 is the end point of the first groove 822a (the first groove 822a and the second groove 822b In the state of being arranged at the (connection position), it matches the arc shape centered on the drive shaft 831 of the drive motor 830. Therefore, when the projecting pin 833 arranged at the end point of the first groove 822b is moved (accepted) into the second groove 822b (that is, when the state transitions from the state shown in FIG. 63 to the state shown in FIG. 64). Since the movement locus of the projecting pin 833 and the shape of the inner wall surface of the second groove 822b are matched, it is possible to avoid fluctuations in the posture of the arm member 820 disposed at the overhang position. it can.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 63, after the arm member 820 is disposed at the extended position, the posture of the arm member 820 at the extended position is suppressed from changing (while maintained in the stopped state). The protruding pin 833 can be moved (received) into the second groove 822b, and the arm member 820 can be mechanically held in the extended position.

  Here, the groove 822 has a shape in which the second groove 822b extends from the end point of the first groove 822a toward the side opposite to the shaft support hole 824 (side away from the shaft support hole 824) (of the first groove 822a). Even in the case of a shape in which a concave portion is formed on the inner wall surface opposite to the shaft support hole 824 of the inner wall surfaces facing each other, the arm member 820 is mechanically held as in the case of the present embodiment. Is possible. However, in this case, it is necessary to switch the rotation direction of the drive motor 830 when the projecting pin 833 is moved (accepted) into the second groove 822b after the arm member 820 is disposed at the extended position. As a result, the control becomes complicated and the reliability of the operation decreases.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the groove portion 822 has a shape (first shape) in which the second groove 822b extends from the end point of the first groove portion 822a toward the shaft support hole 824 side (the side close to the shaft support hole 824). 1), the arm member 820 is moved to the retracted position without switching the rotation direction of the drive motor 830. The arm member 820 can be mechanically held at the extended position by disposing the pin 833 from the first position to the extended position and moving (receiving) the recessed pin 833 into the second groove 822b. As a result, the control can be simplified and the reliability of the operation can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 65 to 72, the annular motion unit 2700 in the second embodiment will be described. In 1st Embodiment, when the raising / lowering base body 780 was raised / lowered, although the amount of offset to the front side (front) of the raising / lowering base body 780 was maintained irrespective of the raising / lowering position, 2nd was demonstrated. In the lift base body 2780 in the embodiment, the amount of offset to the front side (front) is changed (increased or decreased) according to the lift position. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  65 is a top view in an assembled state of the intermediate case body 2710, the back case body 720, and the front case body 2730 in the second embodiment, and FIG. 66 is an intermediate case body 2710 along the LXVI-LXVI line of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the case body 720 and the front case body 2730. FIG. In FIG. 65, the lengths of the case bodies 2710, 720, and 2730 (in the left-right direction in FIG. 65) are partially omitted. 65 and 66, only main parts of the case bodies 2710, 720, and 2730 are shown in order to simplify the drawings and facilitate understanding.

  As shown in FIG. 65, in the second embodiment, a space formed between the front surface 2711a of the intermediate case body 2710 and the rear surface 2731a of the front case body 2730 (the passage P that guides the link member 770 so as to be slidable). A part (the central part in the longitudinal direction (left and right direction in FIG. 65)) of the case members 2710 and 2730 is formed so as to protrude toward the front side (front, upper side in FIG. 65).

  That is, in the above-described first embodiment, the space is formed linearly along the longitudinal direction of the case bodies 710 and 730, and the link member 770 is slid along the linear space. The offset amount to the front side of the base body 780 is not changed and is kept constant (see FIGS. 48 and 49).

  On the other hand, in the second embodiment, since the space P is formed in a non-linear shape along the longitudinal direction of both case bodies 2710 and 2730, the link member 2770 is slid and displaced along the non-linear space. Thus, the link member 2770 is also displaced toward the front side (upper side in FIG. 65) and the rear side (lower side in FIG. 65) (see FIG. 67). Are also displaced toward the front side (upper side in FIG. 65) and the rear side (lower side in FIG. 65) during elevation. That is, the elevating base body 2780 is raised and lowered while changing the amount of offset to the front side (upper side in FIG. 65) (see FIGS. 70 and 72). A specific configuration will be described below.

  As shown in FIGS. 65 and 66, the intermediate case body 2710 has a shape in which the front surface 2711a of the main body portion 2711 projects toward the front side (upper side in FIG. 65) in the center portion in the longitudinal direction (left-right direction in FIG. 65). Corresponding to the shape of the front surface 2711a of the intermediate case body 2710, the front case body 2730 is formed in a shape in which the back surface 2731a of the main body portion 2731 is recessed toward the front side (upper side in FIG. 65). Thus, a passage P that guides the link member 770 so as to be slidable is formed between the front surface 2711a and the back surface 2731a.

  The passage P is a first passage P1 located on both longitudinal sides of the intermediate case body 2710 and the front case body 2730 and extending linearly along the moving direction of the rack 762 (see FIGS. 48 and 49), A first linear passage extending in parallel with the first passage P1 is offset to the front side (front, upper side in FIG. 65) from the first passage P1 and is located at the center in the longitudinal direction of the intermediate case body 2710 and the front case body 2730. 3 passages P3 and a second passage P2 connecting the third passage P3 and the first passage P1.

  The interval between the passages P1 to P3 is set to be slightly larger than the plate thickness of the link member 2770 (main body 771, see FIG. 67 (a)), and the connecting portion of each passage P1 to P3 is circular. It is formed smoothly depending on the shape. Therefore, when the link member 2770 is slid and displaced between the tilted state and the standing state, the inner wall surfaces (front surfaces 2711a) of the passages P1 to P3 with respect to the front surface and the back surface of the link member 2770 (main body portion 771). And the rear surface 2731a) are brought into contact with each other, and the link member 2770 is smoothly displaced between the tilted state and the standing state while effectively suppressing the swing of the link member 2770 in the front-rear direction (vertical direction in FIG. 65). Can do. Here, the detailed configuration of the link member 2770 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 67 (a) is a side view of the link member 2770 and corresponds to FIG. 50 (d). FIG. 67B is a top view in an assembled state of the intermediate case body 2710, the back case body 720, and the front case body 2730, and schematically shows a state in which the standing and lying link member 2770 is disposed in the passage P. Is schematically illustrated. 67 (b) shows a state in which the main body 771 of the link member 2770 is cut along the opening edge of the passage P and viewed in cross section.

  As shown in FIG. 67 (a), the link member 2770 in the second embodiment is similar to the link member 770 in the first embodiment in that the insertion shaft 2772 extends from the back surface on one side (base end) in the longitudinal direction of the main body 771. Is protruded, and a protruding wall portion 2773 protrudes from the front surface on the other side (tip) in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 771 on the side opposite to the insertion shaft 2772, and the protruding wall portion 2773 protrudes. A gear portion 774 is disposed at the tip.

  The link member 2770 in the second embodiment is different from the link member 770 in the first embodiment in that the insertion dimensions of the insertion shaft 2772 and the protruding wall portion 2773 are the same as the insertion shaft 772 and the protruding wall in the first embodiment. Other configurations are the same except that the dimension is set to be larger (longer) than the protruding dimension of the portion 773.

  As described above, the insertion shaft 2772 is inserted through the insertion groove 712 of the intermediate case body 2710 into the insertion hole 762c of the rack 762 in a state in which it can slide in the rotational direction and the axial direction, and the rear case body 720. An axial front end surface is disposed on the back surface of the back case body 720 through the insertion groove 722, and a collar C is fastened and fixed to the axial front end surface of the insertion shaft 2772 (see FIGS. 48 and 49). .

  As shown in FIG. 67 (b), the projecting dimension of the insertion shaft 2772 from the main body 771 (FIG. 67 (a) horizontal dimension) is a state in which the link member 2770 is guided (held) by the first passage P1. In the state where the tip of the insertion shaft 2772 protrudes from the back surface of the back case body 720 and the link member 2770 is guided (held) by the third passage P3, the tip end surface in the axial direction of the insertion shaft 2772 is the back case. It is set so that it is substantially flush with the back surface of the body 720 (the color C is in contact with the back surface of the back case body 720 or arranged with a slight gap). Therefore, according to this embodiment, the insertion shaft 2772 of the link member 2770 slides in the insertion hole 762c (see FIGS. 48 and 49) of the rack 762 in the axial direction (FIG. 67 (b) vertical direction). The link member 2772 can be slid and displaced along each of the first passage P1, the second passage P2, and the third passage P3.

  Returning to FIG. 65 and FIG. As in the case of the first embodiment, the intermediate case body 2710 is formed with a protruding portion 2713 protruding upward in the center in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 2711, and the protruding portion 2713 extends from the protruding tip to the main body portion 2711. The front side 2713a is formed to be substantially flush with the front side 2711a of the main body portion 2711.

  In the present embodiment, the range in which the overhang portion 2713 is formed (the range in which the overhang base portion is connected to the main body portion 2711) is substantially the same as the region corresponding to the third passage P3. A front surface 2713 a of 2713 is formed as a flat surface flush with the front surface 2711 a of the main body portion 2711.

  Therefore, in the vicinity of the standing state when the link member 2770 is rotated (displaced) toward the standing state, the front surface 2713a of the overhang portion 2713 abuts on the back surface of the link member 2770, and the link member 2770 When the link member 2770 is sandwiched between the front surface 2713a of the overhang portion 2713 and the column portion 2732 of the case body 2730, the posture of the link member 2770 is likely to be particularly unstable. And in the vicinity thereof, the displacement of the link member 2770 can be restricted, and the swing of the link member 2770 in the front-rear direction can be effectively suppressed.

  Moreover, the edge part of the overhang | projection part 2713 is curved and formed in circular arc shape in front view (refer FIG. 48). Therefore, as the link member 2770 is erected (that is, as its posture is likely to become unstable), the area of the front surface 2713a of the overhanging portion 2713 that can contact the back surface of the link member 2770 can be increased. While the swaying of the link member 2770 in the front-rear direction can be effectively suppressed, it is possible to reduce the area in which the overhang portion 2713 is visually recognized from the front, and to prevent the appearance from being damaged.

  The top portion of the column portion 2732 of the front case body 2730 is connected to the head portion 2713 b of the overhang portion 2713 in the intermediate case body 2710. A guide rod 2733 is accommodated in the column portion 2732 of the front case body 2730. The guide rod 2733 is a member for guiding the raising and lowering of the raising / lowering base body 2780, and is formed of a metal material as a rod-like body having a circular cross section.

  Here, the guide rod 2733 in the second embodiment is arranged on the bottom side (lower side in FIG. 66) of the column portion 2732 of the front case body 2730 in a posture in which the axis is aligned in the vertical direction. In addition, the first portion M1 is disposed in a posture in which the axial center is aligned along the vertical direction on the upper side (upper side in FIG. 66) of the column portion 2732 of the front case body 2730 in a posture in which the axial center is along the vertical direction. The third portion M3 arranged to be offset further forward (front side, left side in FIG. 66), and the axis is inclined with respect to the vertical direction in order to connect the first portion M1 and the third portion M3. The second portion M2 is disposed in a posture.

  The portions M1 to M3 of the guide rod 2733 are the second portion while the link member 2770 is guided to the second passage P2 by the first portion M1 while the link member 2770 is guided to the first passage P1. While the link member 2770 is guided to the third passage P3 by M2, the elevating base body 2780 is formed at a position where it can be guided (held) by the third portion M3. Here, with reference to FIG. 68, the elevating base body 2780 will be described.

  68 is a rear perspective view of the elevating base body 2780. FIG. As shown in FIG. 68, the elevating base body 2780 in the second embodiment is provided with a guided portion 2784 on the back surface of the main body portion 781 in the same manner as the elevating base body 780 in the first embodiment. The lift base body 2780 in the second embodiment is the same as the lift base body 780 in the first embodiment except that the structure of the guided portion 2784 is different.

  The guided portion 2784 is formed of an annular guide portion 2784a and an opposing guide portion 2784b disposed below the annular guide portion 2784a (lower side in FIG. 68) with a predetermined distance from the annular guide portion 2784a. The annular guide portion 2784a is formed to have an inner wall surface continuous over the entire circumference, and a space surrounded by the inner wall surface serves as an insertion hole through which the guide rod 2733 is inserted. That is, the insertion hole is formed as a closed hole. On the other hand, the opposing guide portion 2784b is formed from a pair of wall portions arranged to face each other with a space therebetween, and an interval between the opposing surfaces of the pair of wall portions is an insertion hole for inserting the guide rod 2733. That is, the insertion hole is formed as an open hole having an open portion in a part in the circumferential direction and communicating the inside and the outside through the open portion.

  As described above, four insertion holes are formed in the first embodiment, whereas the number of insertion holes is two in the second embodiment. Therefore, when the guide rod 2733 is formed in a shape having a bent portion (a connecting portion between the first portion M1 and the second portion M2 and a connecting portion between the second portion M2 and the third portion M3, see FIG. 66). However, it is possible to prevent the insertion hole from being locked to the bent portion of the guide rod 2733, and the lift base body 2780 can be smoothly moved up and down along the guide rod 2733.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, one of the two insertion holes (opposing guide portion 2784b) is formed as a hole having an open portion in a part of the circumferential direction. The insertion hole (opposing guide portion 2784b) is the side facing the case body 2730, and is disposed on the lower side of the two insertion holes. Thus, when the guide bar 2733 has a shape in which the upper end side (the third portion M3) projects to the front side (front, left side of FIG. 66) (see FIG. 66), the lifting base along the guide bar 2733 The body 2780 can be raised and lowered smoothly.

  Specifically, when the elevating base body 2780 at the coupling position (the position where the guided portion 2784 is guided by the third portion M3 of the guide rod 2733) is lowered, the guided portion 2784 (the annular guide portion 2784a and The opposite guide portion 2784b located below the opposite guide portion 2784b) reaches the second portion M2 of the guide rod 2733 first, and the opposite guide portion 2784b has an open portion on the front case body 2730 side. Since it is formed, it is possible to avoid the opposing guide portion 2784b from being locked to the second portion M2 of the guide rod 2733 using such an open portion. As a result, the elevating base body 2780 can be smoothly lowered.

  Similarly, when the elevating base body 2780 in the retracted position (the position where the guided portion 2784 is guided by the first portion M1 of the guide rod 2733) is raised, the guided portion 2784 (the annular guide portion 2784a and the opposing guide). The annular guide portion 2784a located above the portion 2784b) reaches the second portion M2 of the guide rod 2733 first, and the annular guide portion 2784a is guided along the inclination direction of the second portion M2. When the elevating base body 2780 is displaced to the front side (front side, left side in FIG. 66), the opposing guide portion 2784b is formed with an open portion on the front case body 2730 side. Thus, the opposing guide portion 2784b can be prevented from being locked to the first portion M1 of the guide rod 2733. As a result, the elevating base body 2780 can be raised smoothly.

  As in the case of the first embodiment, the guide rod 2733 is forward of the tooth surface of the rack 762 (front side, left side of FIG. 66) and behind the lifting base body 2780 (main body portion 781) ( As shown later, the lift base body 2780 is offset with respect to the rack 762, and the lift base body 2780 can be lifted and lowered smoothly. It is possible to achieve compatibility with

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 69 to 72, the operation of the annular motion unit 2700 will be described. In this description, FIGS. 65 to 68 are referred to as appropriate.

  FIG. 69 is a schematic rear view of the annular motion unit 2700 in which a pair of annular formation members 790 are arranged at the retracted position, and FIG. 70 is an LXX- FIG. It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of the annular operation unit 2700 in the LXX line. 71 is a schematic rear view of an annular operation unit 2700 in which a pair of annular forming members 790 are arranged at a coupling position, and FIG. 72 is an LXXI- It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of the annular operation unit 2700 along the line LXXI.

  69 to 72, in order to simplify the drawings and facilitate understanding, an outer shell structure including an intermediate case body 2710, a back case body 720, and a front case body 2730, a drive motor 740, and a gear group (first The driving structure including the first gear 751 to the sixth gear 756) and the cover body 785 are not shown. However, in FIGS. 69 and 71, the position of the upper edge in the main body portion 2711 and the overhanging portion 2713 (front surfaces 2711a and 2713a) of the intermediate case body 2710 and the upper position in the main body portion 2731 (rear surface 2731a) of the front case body 2730. The positions of the edges are schematically illustrated using two-dot chain lines.

  As shown in FIGS. 69 and 70, in a state in which the pair of ring forming members 790 are disposed at the retracted position, the pair of racks 762 are expanded in a direction away from each other, and the leading end side (the leading end guide piece 762a). Side tooth surface is meshed with the pinion gear 761. Therefore, as in the case of the first embodiment, the pinion gear 761 is rotated clockwise (FIG. 69) via the gear group by the rotational driving force of the drive motor 540, so that the rack 762 is linearly moved, As the pair of link members 2770 are gradually raised, the elevating base body 2780 is raised.

  In this case, the pair of link members 2770 are slid and displaced while being guided by the first passage P1 of the passage P formed between the intermediate case body 2710 and the front case body 2730 (see FIG. 65) and lifted. The base body 2780 (guided portion 2784) is raised along the first portion M1 of the guide rod 2733.

  When the rack 762 is linearly moved by the rotational driving force of the drive motor 540, and the standing of the pair of link members 2770 and the raising of the elevating base body 2780 are further advanced, the pair of link members 2770 becomes the second path of the paths P. In P2 (see FIG. 65), the guided portion 2784 of the elevating base body 2780 reaches the second portion M2 of the guide rod 2733, and is guided along the second passage P2 and the second portion M2. The pair of link members 2770 and the elevating base body 2780 gradually change the front-rear direction position (the left-right direction position in FIG. 70) to the front side (front, left side in FIG. 70) (that is, gradually increase the amount of offset to the front side. Standing up and rising).

  When the pair of link members 2770 reach the third passage P3 of the passage P (see FIG. 65) and the guided portion 2784 of the elevating base body 2780 reaches the third portion M3 of the guide rod 2733, these links. The position in the front-rear direction (the position in the left-right direction in FIG. 70) of the member 2770 and the elevating base body 2780 is set to the frontmost position (that is, the offset amount to the front side is maximized).

  Thereafter, the pair of link members 2770 are further raised while being guided by the third passage P3 of the passage P (see FIG. 65), and the elevating base body 2780 (guided portion 2784) is the third portion of the guide rod 2733. By further raising along M3, as shown in FIGS. 71 and 72, the pair of link members 2770 are erected substantially vertically, and the pair of ring forming members 790 are arranged at the coupling position. An annular shape is formed when the tips of the annular forming member 790 are brought into contact with each other.

  As described above, in the second embodiment, the pair of link members 2770 and the elevating base body 2780 are configured such that the amount of offset to the front side (front, left side in FIGS. 70 and 72) can be changed (increased or decreased). Since the offset amount at the coupling position is larger than at least the offset amount at the retracted position, the drive motor 740 required to hold the elevating base body 2780 (ring forming member 790) at the coupling position. It is possible to achieve both the suppression of the energy consumption of the drive motor 740 and the suppression of the energy consumption of the drive motor 740 necessary for raising and lowering the lifting base body 2780 (ring forming member 790) between the coupling position and the retracted position.

  That is, if the elevating base body 2780 (ring forming member 790) is offset to the front side (front, left side in FIG. 72), the elevating base body 2780 (ring forming) is generated by the amount of force component generated in the offset direction. The weight of the member 790) can reduce the force component that tends to move the rack 762 in its moving direction. Therefore, the energy consumption of the drive motor 740 necessary for holding the lifting base body 2780 (ring-forming member 790) in the coupling position can be suppressed accordingly. On the other hand, when the elevating base body 2780 (annular forming member 790) is moved up and down between the coupling position and the retracted position, the force component in the offset direction described above becomes a resistance and the elevating base body 2780 is correspondingly increased. The energy consumption of the drive motor 740 required to raise and lower the (ring forming member 790) increases.

  On the other hand, according to the second embodiment, the third passage P3 of the passage P is disposed at a position protruding to the front side of the first passage P1, so that the lifting base body 2780 (ring forming member 790). The amount of offset to the front side is suppressed to a small amount in the path between the retracted position and the coupling position (area corresponding to the first path P1 and the second path P2), and the coupling position (third path P3). Can be increased to a large amount. Therefore, at the coupling position, a force component in the offset direction can be secured, and the rack 762 can be prevented from being moved by the weight of the elevating base body 2780 (ring forming member 790). On the other hand, when raising / lowering the raising / lowering base body 2780 (ring-forming member 790) between the retracted position and the raised position, the force component in the offset direction can be reduced to reduce the resistance.

  As a result, the energy consumption of the drive motor 740 required to hold the lifting base body 2780 (ring forming member 790) in the coupling position is reduced, and the lifting base body 2780 (ring forming member 790) is coupled to and retracted. It is possible to achieve coexistence with suppression of energy consumption of the drive motor 740 necessary for moving up and down between positions.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 73 and FIG. 74, an annular motion unit 3700 in the third embodiment will be described. In 1st Embodiment, when the raising / lowering base body 780 was raised / lowered, although the amount of offset to the front side (front) of the raising / lowering base body 780 was maintained irrespective of the raising / lowering position, 3rd was demonstrated. In the embodiment, the amount of offset to the front side (front) of the lift base body 2780 is changed (increased / decreased) according to the lift position as in the second embodiment. The main body 771 of the member 3770 is elastically deformed. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  Here, the ring operation unit 3700 in the third embodiment is different from the ring operation unit 2700 in the second embodiment in the configuration of the link member 3700 from the link member 2700 in the second embodiment (see FIG. 67). Except for this point, the other configurations are the same. That is, in the third embodiment, the intermediate case body 2710, the back case body 720, the front case body 2730 (see FIGS. 65 and 66) and the lift base body 2780 (see FIG. 68) described in the second embodiment, etc. Is used. The description of these same configurations is omitted.

  FIG. 73 (a) is a side view of the link member 3770 in the third embodiment, and corresponds to FIG. 50 (d). FIG. 73 (b) is a top view in an assembled state of the intermediate case body 2710, the back case body 720, and the front case body 2730, and schematically shows a state in which the standing and lying link member 3770 is disposed in the passage P. Is schematically illustrated. FIG. 73B shows a state in which the main body portion 771 of the link member 3770 is cut along the opening edge of the passage P and viewed in cross section.

  As shown in FIG. 73 (a), the link member 3770 in the third embodiment is similar to the link member 770 in the first embodiment in that the insertion shaft 772 extends from the back surface on the longitudinal direction one side (base end) of the main body 771. Is protruded, and a protruding wall portion 2773 protrudes from the front surface on the other side (tip) in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 771 opposite to the insertion shaft 772, and the protruding wall portion 2773 protrudes. A gear portion 774 is disposed at the tip.

  Note that the link member 3770 in the third embodiment has a protruding dimension of the protruding wall portion 3773 that is larger than the protruding dimension of the protruding wall portion 773 in the first embodiment with respect to the link member 770 in the first embodiment. Other configurations are the same except that they are set to large (long) dimensions. On the other hand, in the link member 3770 in the third embodiment, the projecting dimension of the insertion shaft 772 is smaller (shorter) than the projecting dimension of the insertion shaft 2772 in the second embodiment with respect to the link member 2770 in the second embodiment. Other configurations are the same except that the dimensions are set. That is, the insertion shaft 772 is common in the first embodiment and the third embodiment, and the protruding wall portion 3773 is common in the second embodiment and the third embodiment.

  As described above, the insertion shaft 772 is inserted through the insertion groove 712 of the intermediate case body 2710 into the insertion hole 762c of the rack 762 in a rotational direction, and via the insertion groove 722 of the rear case body 720. The axial front end surface is disposed on the back surface of the back case body 720, and the collar C is fastened and fixed to the axial front end surface of the insertion shaft 772 (see FIGS. 48 and 49).

  In this case, in the second embodiment, the insertion shaft 2772 is slidable in the axial direction with respect to the insertion hole 762c of the rack 762 (see FIG. 67B), but in the third embodiment, the first implementation is performed. As in the case of the embodiment, the collar C is brought into contact with the back surface of the back case 520, whereby the insertion shaft 772 is restricted (restricted) from sliding in the axial direction with respect to the insertion hole 762c of the rack 762. .

  That is, the projecting dimension of the insertion shaft 772 from the main body part 771 (the dimension in the left-right direction in FIG. 73 (a)) is such that the link member 3770 is guided (held) in the first passage P1, as shown in FIG. 73 (b). In this state, the front end surface of the insertion shaft 772 in the axial direction is substantially flush with the back surface of the back case body 720 (ie, the collar C is in contact with the back surface of the back case body 720 or has a slight gap). To be arranged).

  Therefore, in the second embodiment, the insertion shaft 2772 of the link member 2770 slides in the insertion hole 762c of the rack 762 in the axial direction (vertical direction in FIG. 67 (b)), so that the link member 2772 has the first passage P1, Whereas the slide displacement is made possible along each of the second passage P2 and the third passage P3 (see FIG. 67B), the link member 3770 in the third embodiment has the insertion shaft 772 of the rack 762. The body portion 771 of the link member 3770 does not slide in the axial direction (vertical direction in FIG. 73 (b)) with respect to the insertion hole 762c. It abuts on the inner wall surface of the passage P3 (the front surface 2711a of the intermediate case body 2710). Accordingly, the link member 3770 is elastically deformed toward the front side (front side (upper side in FIG. 73 (b)) while the main body portion 771 is pressed by the inner wall surfaces of the second and third passages P2 and P3. The passage P2 and the third passage P3 are slid and displaced.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 74, the operation of the annular motion unit 3700 will be described. In this description, FIGS. 69 to 71 are referred to as appropriate.

  FIG. 74 is a schematic cross-sectional view of an annular motion unit 3700 in which a pair of annular forming members 790 are arranged at the coupling position, and corresponds to FIG. In FIG. 74, in order to simplify the drawing and facilitate understanding, an outer shell structure including an intermediate case body 2710, a back case body 720, and a front case body 2730, a drive motor 740, and a gear group (first gear 751). To the sixth gear 756), the cover body 785, and the like are not shown.

  As described above, in a state where the pair of ring forming members 790 are disposed at the retracted position (see FIGS. 69 and 70), the pair of racks 762 are expanded in a direction away from each other, and the rotation of the drive motor 540 is performed. As the rack 762 is linearly moved by the driving force, the elevating base body 2780 is raised as the pair of link members 3770 are gradually raised.

  In this case, the pair of link members 3770 are slidably displaced while being guided by the first passage P1 in the passage P formed between the intermediate case body 2710 and the front case body 2730, as in the case of the second embodiment. At the same time, the elevating base body 2780 (guided portion 2784) is raised along the first portion M1 of the guide rod 2733.

  As shown in FIG. 74, the standing of the pair of link members 3770 and the raising of the elevating base body 2780 are further advanced, and the pair of link members 3770 are moved along the second passage P2 and the third passage P3 of the passage P ( When the guided portion 2784 of the elevating base body 2780 is guided to the second portion M2 and the third portion M3 of the guide rod 2733, respectively, the link member 3770 is erected substantially vertically. Thus, the pair of annular forming members 790 are arranged at the coupling position, and an annular shape is formed.

  In this case, as described above, the link member 3770 has its main body portion 771 in contact with the inner wall surfaces of the second passage P2 and the third passage P3 (the front surface 2711a of the intermediate case body 2710). When the portion 771 is pressed toward the front side (the back surface 2731a side) of the front case 2730, the link member 3770 (main body portion 771) is elastically deformed (bend deformation).

  As described above, in the third embodiment, as in the case of the second embodiment, by changing the positions of the first passage P1 and the third passage P3 in the front-rear direction (FIG. 73 (b) vertical direction), By increasing the offset amount at the coupling position, the energy consumption of the drive motor 740 required to hold the lifting base body 2780 (ring forming member 790) at the coupling position is suppressed, and the offset amount is decreased at the retracted position. Thus, it is possible to suppress energy consumption of the drive motor 740 necessary for moving the lifting base body 2780 (ring-forming member 790) up and down between the coupling position and the retracted position.

  In particular, in the third embodiment, the insertion shaft 772 protruding from one side (base end) in the longitudinal direction of the link member 3770 (main body portion 771) slides in the axial direction with respect to the insertion hole 762c of the rack 762. In other words, the longitudinal direction side (base end) of the link member 3770 (main body portion 771) is displaced in the offset direction (front-rear direction, FIG. 73 (b) vertical direction) with respect to the rack 762. Since it is connected to the rack 762 in an impossible state, when the link member 3770 is erected, as shown in FIG. 74, one of the opposing inner wall surfaces of the third passage P3 (the front surface 2711a of the intermediate case body 2710). ) Is elastically deformed, and the body portion 771 of the elastically deformed link member 3770 is moved to the other of the opposing inner wall surfaces of the third passage P3 (positive). It is possible to form a state of being pressed against the back surface 2731A) of the case body 2730.

  Thus, in a state where the lifting base body 2780 is disposed at the coupling position, in addition to the force component in the offset direction due to the lifting base body 2780 being offset, the link member 3770 (main body portion 771) is connected to the third passage P3. By increasing the resistance caused by pressing one of the opposing inner wall surfaces, the rack 762 can be prevented from moving in the horizontal direction due to the weight of the elevating base body 2780, the ring forming member 790, and the like. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the energy consumption of the drive motor 740 necessary for holding the elevating base body 2780 (ring forming member 790) at the coupling position.

  On the other hand, in the first passage P1 of the passages P, the main body portion 771 of the link member 3770 depends on the opposing inner wall surfaces (the front surface 2711a of the intermediate case body 2710 and the rear surface 2731a of the front case body 2730). The elastic deformation is not formed, and the state in which the opposing inner wall surface of the first passage P1 is pressed by the main body 771 of the link member 3770 is released. Accordingly, resistance between the link member 3770 (main body portion 771) and the inner wall surface of the first passage P1 is suppressed, and the elevating base body 2780 (annular forming member 790) is moved up and down between the coupling position and the retracted position. It is possible to suppress the energy consumption of the drive motor 740 necessary for the purpose.

  Next, the first combined operation unit 4500 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 75 to 77. In the first embodiment, a crank mechanism (crank gear 524, rotating shaft 525a and connecting rod 525) and a first link member 541 (rotating mechanism) are used as mechanisms for converting the rotational motion of the drive motor 522 into the linear motion of the slide mechanism 530. However, in the fourth embodiment, a rack and pinion mechanism (pinion gear 4543 and rack 4544) is used as a mechanism for converting the rotational motion of the drive motor 522 into the linear motion of the slide mechanism 530. The In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 75 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first combined operation unit 4500 in the fourth embodiment. In addition, in FIG. 75, illustration of the raising member 550 and the decoration part 560 is abbreviate | omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 75, the first combined operation unit 4500 in the fourth embodiment is disposed on the front side of the substrate member 4510 and generates a driving force, and the driving force of the driving unit 4520 is generated. A rack and pinion mechanism (pinion gear 4543 and rack 4544) that is transmitted to the slide mechanism 530 and disposed on the back side of the substrate member 4510 is configured.

  Here, the first combined operation unit 4500 in the fourth embodiment transmits the rotational driving force of the drive unit 4520 (drive motor 522) to the slide mechanism unit 530 with respect to the first combined operation unit 500 in the first embodiment. Only the configuration (that is, the first link member 541 is adopted in the first embodiment, whereas the rack and pinion mechanism is adopted in the fourth embodiment) is different, and the other configurations are the same. Therefore, only the configuration for transmitting the rotational driving force of the drive unit 4520 (drive motor 522) to the slide mechanism unit 530 will be described below, and the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment will be omitted.

  The substrate member 4510 is a member that is formed in a rectangular plate shape that is horizontally long when viewed from the front, and a connection hole 4513 is formed on the side (left side in FIG. 75) of the pair of guide grooves 511. The connection hole 4513 allows the connection shaft 4526 of the drive unit 4520 to be inserted from the front side to the back side of the board member 4510 and connects the connection shaft 4526 and the pinion gear 4543 of the rack and pinion mechanism on the back side of the board member 4510. Is a circular opening in front view.

  The drive unit 4520 includes a drive motor 522, a pinion gear 523 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 522, and a second gear 4524 that is engaged with the pinion gear 523 and rotatably supported by the case body 521. , And a connecting shaft 4526 protruding from the end face of the second gear 4524. The connecting shaft 4526 is fixed to the second gear 4524 coaxially. Therefore, when the rotational drive of the drive motor 522 is transmitted to the second gear 4524 via the pinion gear 523 and the second gear 4524 is rotated, the connecting shaft 4526 is rotated in synchronization with the second gear 4525.

  As described above, the rack and pinion mechanism is a member for transmitting the driving force of the driving motor 522 to the slide mechanism portion 530, and the pinion gear 4543 and the rack gear with which the pinion gear 4543 is engaged are linearly formed on the side surface. And a rack 4544 to be engraved. The rack 4544 is connected to the slide mechanism portion 530 by fastening and inserting the insertion shaft 531c of the slide mechanism portion 530. In this connected state, the rack 4544 extends the guide groove 511 in the extending direction of the rack gear. It is assumed that the posture is along the direction.

  In a state where drive unit 4520 (case body 521) is assembled to the front side of substrate member 4510, connecting shaft 4526 is inserted into connecting hole 4513 of substrate member 4510, and the tip of connecting shaft 4526 is on the back side of substrate member 4510. Protruding. A flat surface is formed by chamfering at the tip of the connecting shaft 4526, and the pinion gear 4543 of the rack and pinion mechanism is coupled to the connecting shaft 4526 so as not to rotate relative to the flat surface. A retaining ring E formed as an E-ring is attached to the tip of the connecting shaft 4526 inserted (coupled) through the pinion gear 4543 to prevent it from coming off.

  Next, the operation of the first combined operation unit 4500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 and 77.

  76A is a front view of the first coupling operation unit 4500 in a state where the first coupling member 539 is disposed at the retracted position, and FIG. 76B is a diagram illustrating the first coupling member 539 disposed at the retracted position. FIG. 44 is a rear view of the first combined operation unit 4500 in a state where it is applied. FIG. 77A is a front view of the first coupling operation unit 4500 in a state where the first coupling member 539 is disposed at the coupling position, and FIG. 77B is a diagram illustrating the first coupling member 539 disposed at the coupling position. FIG. 44 is a rear view of the first combined operation unit 4500 in a state where it is applied. 76 and 77, the illustration of the raising member 550 and the decorative portion 560 is omitted in order to simplify the drawing and facilitate understanding.

  76 (a) and 76 (b), in a state where the first coupling member 539 is in the retracted position, the rack 4544 of the rack and pinion mechanism is on the upper end side of the guide groove 511 of the substrate member 4510 (see FIG. 76 (b) on the upper side. Therefore, the A layer base plate 531 (see FIGS. 38 and 39) of the slide mechanism portion 530 is disposed on the upper end side of the guide groove 511 of the substrate member 4510, and the first coupling member 539 is raised (the retracted position is disposed). A) state is formed.

  In this case, as in the case of the first embodiment, the urging force of the urging spring 571 causes the posture of the second link member 542 to change to the posture shown in FIG. 76B (that is, centering on the shaft support hole 542a). As a result, the sliding hole 542c is actuated in a direction in which the sliding hole 542c is held in a direction in which it is raised. Therefore, the first coupling member 539 can be stably held at the retracted position shown in FIG. In particular, an external force (for example, an external force generated by a player hitting or swinging a gaming machine) is applied to the first coupling member 539 that should be stopped at the retracted position, and the first coupling member 539 is moved in the vertical direction. Even when vibration is generated, the vibration in the vertical direction of the first coupling member 539 can be quickly converged using the biasing force of the biasing spring 571.

  76A and 76B, the drive motor 522 is driven to rotate in the first direction in the drive unit 4520, and the second gear 4524 and the connecting shaft 4526 are connected (FIG. 75), when the pinion gear 4543 of the rack and pinion mechanism is rotated in the forward direction (FIG. 76 (b) clockwise), the rack 4544 is lowered by the rotation of the pinion gear 4543. As a result, the slide mechanism 530 (A layer base plate 531) is lowered along the guide groove 511 of the substrate member 4510, and as described above, the two sets of double rack and pinion mechanisms are acted (FIG. 38). 39), the first coupling member 539 is lowered.

  77 (a) and 77 (b), the rack 4544 of the rack and pinion mechanism is lowered, and the A layer base plate 531 (insertion shaft 531c) of the slide mechanism portion 530 is guided to the guide groove 511 of the substrate member 4510. The first coupling member 539 is lowered (the coupling position is disposed) by being arranged on the lower end side (lower side in FIG. 77 (b)).

  On the other hand, from the state shown in FIGS. 77 (a) and 77 (b), in the drive unit 4520, the drive motor 522 is rotationally driven in the second rotational direction opposite to the first direction. When the pinion gear 4543 of the rack and pinion mechanism is rotated in the reverse direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 77 (b)) via the second gear 4524 and the connecting shaft 4526 (see FIG. 75), the rotation of the pinion gear 4543 causes The rack 4544 is raised. As a result, the A-layer base plate 531 of the slide mechanism 530 is raised along the guide groove 511 of the substrate member 4510, and as described above, two sets of double rack and pinion mechanisms are acted (see FIG. 38 and FIG. 39), the first coupling member 539 is raised. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 76 (a) and 76 (b), the first coupling member 539 is disposed (returned) to the retracted position.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the driving force transmission path for transmitting the driving force of the driving unit 4520 (drive motor 522) to the slide mechanism unit 530 is configured by the rack and pinion mechanism including the pinion gear 4543 and the rack 4544, and is driven. The rotational driving force (rotational motion) of the unit 4520 (drive motor 522) can be converted into a linear motion and then transmitted to the slide mechanism unit 530. As a result, the rotational driving force of the drive motor 522 can be efficiently transmitted to the slide mechanism unit 530, and the slide displacement (elevation) of the slide mechanism unit 530 can be stabilized.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, two or more (three in this embodiment) insertion shafts 531c among the plurality of insertion shafts 531c of the slide mechanism portion 530 can be coupled to one rack 4544, and the insertion shaft It is possible to increase the number of parts (color C) necessary for holding 531c that can be used in the rack 4544. That is, in the first embodiment, only one color C can be used for the first link member 541, and thus two other colors C are required (FIG. 35). In the fourth embodiment, the two colors C can be dispensed with (the three colors C can be shared by the rack 4544). As a result, the number of insertion shafts 531c is ensured, and the slide mechanism portion 530 can be stably slid (moved up / down) while reducing the number of components (color C) for holding the insertion shaft 531c. Cost reduction can be achieved.

  As described above, two or more insertion shafts 531c among the plurality of insertion shafts 531c of the slide mechanism section 530 that slides (moves up and down) are used as the first link member 541 (see FIG. 35) in the first embodiment. In the first link member 541 configured to transmit the driving force of the driving unit 520 to the slide mechanism unit 530 by swinging (turning), the connection portion (sliding hole 541c) moves with the insertion shaft 531c. Since the trajectory is arcuate, it is impossible, and this is possible for the first time by adopting a rack and pinion mechanism as a mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the drive unit 4520 to the slide mechanism unit 530 as in this embodiment. (That is, by making the movement trajectory of the rack 4544 straight, the input direction of the driving force is made to correspond to the slide displacement (up / down) direction of the slide mechanism 530. Thus, as described above, the number of the insertion shafts 531c is ensured, and the slide mechanism portion 530 can be stably moved (lifted / lowered) while holding the insertion shaft 531c (color C). ), The number of parts can be reduced, and the cost can be reduced.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 78 to 79, the first combined operation unit 5500 in the fifth embodiment will be described. In the fourth embodiment, a case has been described in which structures (rack and pinion mechanisms and link mechanisms (second link members)) of different mechanisms are connected to the slide mechanism portion 530 (insertion shaft 531c). Structures (rack and pinion mechanisms) of the same mechanism are connected to the slide mechanism portion 530 (insertion shaft 531c) in the fifth embodiment. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 78 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first combined operation unit 5500 in the fifth embodiment. 78, illustration of the raising member 550 and the decoration part 560 is abbreviate | omitted.

  Here, the first combined operation unit 5500 in the fifth embodiment transmits the urging force of the urging spring 571 (see FIG. 34) to the slide mechanism unit 530 with respect to the first combined operation unit 4500 in the fourth embodiment. Only the configuration (that is, the second link member 542 is employed in the fourth embodiment, whereas the rack and pinion mechanism is employed in the fifth embodiment) is different, and the other configurations are the same. Therefore, only the configuration for transmitting the biasing force of the biasing spring 571 to the slide mechanism 530 will be described below, and the description of the same configuration as that of the fourth embodiment will be omitted.

  Further, in the following description, for convenience of description, the one that transmits the driving force of the drive unit 4520 to the slide mechanism unit 530 (the left side in FIG. 78) of the pair of rack and pinion mechanisms is referred to as “drive side rack / pinion mechanism”. The “pinion mechanism” and the one that transmits the urging force of the urging spring 571 to the slide mechanism portion 530 (the right side in FIG. 78) are referred to as “rack-side pinion mechanism”.

  As shown in FIG. 78, the substrate member 5510 is a member that is formed in a rectangular plate shape that is horizontally long when viewed from the front, and is connected to the connecting groove 5514 and the support at a position opposite to the insertion hole 4513 across the pair of guide grooves 511. A shaft 5516 is provided. The connecting groove 5514 allows a locking claw (not shown) protruding from the front side of the pinion gear 5543 to be inserted from the back side of the substrate member 5510 to the front side, and a biasing spring 571 is inserted into the inserted locking claw. This is an opening for locking the end of (see FIG. 34), and is curved and extended in a circular arc shape with the support shaft 5516 as the center. That is, the connecting groove 5514 is formed as an opening having a size that allows the locking claw to move when the pinion gear 5543 is rotated about the support shaft 5516.

  The support shaft 5516 is a shaft body for pivotally supporting the pinion gear 5543 and the urging spring 571 (see FIG. 34), and protrudes from the front side and the back side of the substrate member 5510, respectively. That is, a pinion gear 5543 is provided on the support shaft 5516 protruding from the back side of the substrate member 5510, and a biasing spring 571 is provided on the support shaft (not shown) protruding from the front side of the substrate member 5510. Be supported. Note that the support shaft 5516 is disposed at a position that is symmetric with the communication hole 4513 with a virtual straight line passing through the middle of the pair of guide grooves 511 as a symmetric line.

  As described above, the urging side rack and pinion mechanism is a member for transmitting the urging force of the urging spring 571 (see FIG. 34) to the slide mechanism portion 530. The pinion gear 5543 and the pinion gear 5543 are teeth. The rack gear to be joined is composed of a rack 5544 that is linearly engraved on the side surface. The urging side rack and pinion mechanism (pinion gear 5543 and rack 5544) has substantially the same configuration as the driving side rack and pinion mechanism (pinion gear 4543 and rack 4544).

  That is, the pinion gear 5543 is the same as the pinion gear 4543 except for the point that a locking claw (not shown) is formed on the front side, and other configurations that determine the characteristics of the gear such as the number of teeth and the pitch circle. . Similarly, the rack 5544 is the same as the rack 4544 in terms of other configurations that determine the characteristics of the rack gear such as the number of teeth and the tooth profile, except that the upper end side is uneven to avoid interference with the substrate member 5510. Is done.

  Therefore, the slide mechanism 530 is held symmetrically by the drive-side rack and pinion mechanism and the biasing-side rack and pinion mechanism (that is, the support reaction force acts symmetrically and the slide mechanism 530 is moved left and right). Therefore, the slide displacement (elevation) of the slide mechanism unit 530 can be stably performed. Further, when the slide mechanism unit 530 is raised, the driving force of the driving unit 4520 can be assisted by using the biasing force of the biasing spring 571 (see FIG. 34). Can be suppressed.

  As described above, the urging spring 571 is formed as a torsion coil spring, and is disposed in a state where the pair of arm portions are elastically deformed in a direction close to each other (see FIG. 34). The rack 5544 is biased upward (upward in FIG. 78) via the pinion gear 5543 by the elastic recovery force. That is, the urging force of the urging spring 571 is applied in a direction to hold the urging side rack and pinion mechanism in the posture shown in FIG.

  Next, the operation of the first combined operation unit 5500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 79 and 80.

  79A is a front view of the first coupling operation unit 5500 in a state where the first coupling member 539 is disposed at the retracted position, and FIG. 79B is a diagram illustrating the first coupling member 539 disposed at the retracted position. It is a rear view of the 1st combined operation unit 5500 in the done state. FIG. 80A is a front view of the first coupling operation unit 5500 in a state where the first coupling member 539 is disposed at the coupling position, and FIG. 80B is a diagram illustrating the first coupling member 539 disposed at the coupling position. It is a rear view of the 1st combined operation unit 5500 in the done state. 79 and 80, the raising member 550 and the decorative portion 560 are not shown in order to simplify the drawing and facilitate understanding.

  As shown in FIGS. 79 (a) and 79 (b), when the first coupling member 539 is in the retracted position, both the drive-side rack and pinion mechanism and the biasing-side rack and pinion mechanism The racks 4544 and 5544 are arranged on the upper end side (the upper side in FIG. 79B) of the guide groove 511 of the substrate member 5510.

  In this case, as in the case of the first embodiment, the urging force of the urging spring 571 holds the rack 5544 in the urging side rack and pinion mechanism in the position shown in FIG. The pinion gear 5543 is actuated in the direction (FIG. 79 (b) clockwise). Therefore, the first coupling member 539 can be stably held at the retracted position shown in FIG. In particular, an external force (for example, an external force generated by a player hitting or swinging a gaming machine) is applied to the first coupling member 539 that should be stopped at the retracted position, and the first coupling member 539 is moved in the vertical direction. Even when vibration is generated, the vibration in the vertical direction of the first coupling member 539 can be quickly converged using the biasing force of the biasing spring 571.

  79A and 79B, when the drive motor 522 is driven to rotate in the first direction in the drive unit 4520, the second gear 4524 and the connecting shaft 4526 are interposed (see FIG. 79). 78), when the pinion gear 4543 in the rack-and-pinion mechanism on the driving side is rotated in the forward direction (FIG. 79 (b) clockwise), the rack 4544 is lowered by the rotation of the pinion gear 4543. Accordingly, the slide mechanism portion 530 (A layer base plate 531) is lowered along the guide groove 511 of the substrate member 5510.

  On the other hand, from the state shown in FIG. 80A and FIG. 80B (the state where the first coupling member 539 is lowered (the coupling position is disposed)), the drive motor 522 is moved to the first state in the drive unit 4520. The pinion gear 4543 in the drive-side rack and pinion mechanism is reversely moved through the second gear 4524 and the connecting shaft 4526 (see FIG. 78) by being driven to rotate in the second rotation direction opposite to the direction. When rotated counterclockwise (FIG. 80B), the rack 4544 is raised by the rotation of the pinion gear 4543. As a result, the slide mechanism 530 (A layer base plate 531) is raised along the guide groove 511 of the substrate member 5510.

  According to the present embodiment, when the slide mechanism portion 530 is slid (displaced or raised), the rack 5544 in the urging-side rack and pinion mechanism can be lowered while the pinion gear 55443 is driven to rotate. it can. In this case, as described above, the connecting shaft 4526 and the support shaft 5526 are arranged at positions that are symmetric with respect to an imaginary straight line that passes through the middle of the pair of guide grooves 511, and on the urging side. The rack and pinion mechanism (pinion gear 5543 and rack 5544) and the drive-side rack and pinion mechanism (pinion gear 4543 and rack 5544) have substantially the same configuration.

  That is, as in the case of the fourth embodiment, in the configuration in which the slide mechanism portion 530 is supported by the structures of different mechanisms (rack and pinion mechanism and link mechanism (second link member)), the left and right support reaction forces are It becomes non-uniform and the slide displacement of the slide mechanism 530 becomes unstable. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the support reaction force received by the pair of racks 4544 and 5544 from the pinion gears 4543 and 5543 can be made uniform in a symmetrical manner, and as a result, the slide mechanism portion 530 is held in a symmetrical manner. be able to. Therefore, the slide displacement of the slide mechanism unit 530 can be performed stably.

  Further, in this embodiment, all (six in this embodiment) of the plurality of insertion shafts 531c of the slide mechanism portion 530 can be connected to the racks 4544 and 5544, and the insertion shaft 531c is All of the parts (color C) necessary for holding can be shared by the racks 4544 and 5544. That is, in the fifth embodiment, the color C can be eliminated. As a result, the number of insertion shafts 531c is ensured, and the slide mechanism portion 530 can be stably moved (lifted / lowered) while omitting parts (color C) for holding the insertion shaft 531c, thereby reducing the cost. Reduction can be achieved.

  Note that omitting all of the components (color C) for holding the plurality of insertion shafts 531c of the slide mechanism portion 530 that slides (moves up and down) in this way is the same as in the above embodiments. The configuration employing the link mechanism (the first link member 541 or the second link member 542) is not possible, and as in this embodiment, the drive side that transmits the drive force of the drive unit 4520 to the slide mechanism unit 530, and This is possible for the first time by adopting a rack and pinion mechanism for both of the urging sides that transmit the urging force of the urging spring 571 to the slide mechanism portion 530. The number of shafts 531c is ensured, and the slide mechanism 530 can be stably moved (lifted / lowered), but a component (color C) for holding the insertion shaft 531c is unnecessary. , It is possible to reduce the cost.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 81 to 83, the first combined operation unit 6500 in the sixth embodiment will be described. In the fifth embodiment, the case where the racks 4544 and 5544 in the driving-side rack and pinion mechanism and the biasing-side rack and pinion mechanism are formed separately has been described. However, the rack 6544 in the sixth embodiment is driven The rack in the side rack and pinion mechanism is also used as the rack in the biasing side rack and pinion mechanism. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 81 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first combined operation unit 6500 in the sixth embodiment. In addition, in FIG. 81, illustration of the raising member 550 and the decoration part 560 is abbreviate | omitted.

  Here, the first combined operation unit 6500 in the sixth embodiment is different from the first combined operation unit 5500 in the fifth embodiment in the configuration of the rack 6544 (that is, the two components of the racks 4544 and 5544 in the fifth embodiment). In the sixth embodiment, only the rack 6544 is formed as an integral part, but the other configurations are the same. Therefore, only the configuration of the rack 6544 will be described below, and the description of the same configuration as that of the fifth embodiment will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 81, the rack 6544 is an integrated unit in which the opposite sides of the rack 4544 in the drive-side rack and pinion mechanism and the rack 5544 in the biasing-side rack and pinion mechanism in the fifth embodiment are connected. Formed as a part. That is, the rack 6544 is formed as a flat plate body that is linearly engraved on one side surface of the rack gear meshed with the pinion gear 4543 and on the other side surface of the rack gear meshed with the pinion gear 5543. The

  Next, the operation of the first combined operation unit 6500 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  82A is a front view of the first coupling operation unit 6500 in a state where the first coupling member 539 is disposed at the retracted position, and FIG. 82B is a diagram illustrating the first coupling member 539 disposed at the retracted position. FIG. 10 is a rear view of the first combined operation unit 6500 in a state where it is applied. 83A is a front view of the first coupling operation unit 6500 in a state where the first coupling member 539 is disposed at the coupling position, and FIG. 83B is a diagram illustrating the first coupling member 539 disposed at the coupling position. FIG. 10 is a rear view of the first combined operation unit 6500 in a state where it is applied. 82 and 83, the illustration of the raising member 550 and the decorative portion 560 is omitted in order to simplify the drawing and facilitate understanding.

  As shown in FIGS. 82 and 83, according to the first combined operation unit 6500, as in the case of the fifth embodiment, the drive motor 522 of the drive unit 4520 is rotationally driven in the first direction. The pinion gear 4543 is rotated in the forward direction (FIG. 82 (b) clockwise), and the rack 6544 (slide mechanism portion 530) is lowered along the guide groove 511 of the substrate member 5510, while the drive motor 522 of the drive portion 4520 is driven. By being rotationally driven in the second rotational direction opposite to the first direction, the pinion gear 4543 is rotated in the reverse direction (FIG. 83 (b) counterclockwise), and the rack 5544 (that is, the slide mechanism portion). 530) is raised along the guide groove 511 of the substrate member 5510.

  According to the present embodiment, as in the case of the fifth embodiment, the rack 6544 is held symmetrically by the pair of pinion gears 4543 and 5543, and thus the support reaction force that the rack 6544 receives from the pair of pinion gears 4543 and 5543. Can be made uniform symmetrically, and as a result, the slide displacement (elevation) of the slide mechanism 530 can be stably performed.

  Here, as in the case of the fifth embodiment, a pair of racks 4544 and 5544 are formed independently, one rack 4544 is driven by one pinion gear 4543, and the other pinion gear 5543 is driven by the displacement of the other rack 5544. In the configuration in which the gear is driven, relative displacement is likely to occur between the pair of racks 4544 and 5544, and therefore, there is a deviation between the rotation of one pinion gear 4543 and the rotation of the other pinion gear 5543, and the slide displacement ( (Up and down) becomes unstable.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the rack 6544 is formed as an integral part, so that the relative position of the rack gears formed on both sides does not cause a positional shift, so that the rotation of one pinion gear 4543 and the other The rotation of the pinion gear 5543 can be easily synchronized. As a result, the slide displacement (elevation) of the slide mechanism unit 530 can be stably performed.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, the two rows of the insertion shafts 531c of the slide mechanism portion 530 are connected to each other by the rack 6544, so that the rigidity of the slide mechanism portion 530 as a whole can be increased. In addition, the posture of the two rows of insertion shafts 531c with respect to the guide grooves 511 of the substrate member 5510 can be stabilized. As a result, the slide displacement (elevation) of the slide mechanism unit 530 can be stably performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 84, a combined operation unit 7400 in the seventh embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the case where the connecting groove 481c of the slide rack member 481 extends linearly has been described. However, the connecting groove 7481c of the slide rack 7481 in the seventh embodiment is formed to be curved in an arc shape. The In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  84 (a) to 84 (c) are exploded perspective views of the combined operation unit 7400 in the seventh embodiment, and the relative displacement state of the open / close second gear 452 and the slide rack member 7481 with respect to the back arm body 471. FIG. In order to explain the above, a state in which the operation members 491 and 492 and the front arm body 472 are removed is shown. 84 (a) shows the second opening / closing gear 452 counterclockwise (counterclockwise) with respect to FIG. 84 (b), and FIG. 84 (c) shows the second opening / closing second gear 452 with respect to FIG. 84 (b). The gear 452 corresponds to a state in which the gear 452 is rotated clockwise (clockwise).

  As shown in FIG. 84, in the combined operation unit 7400 in the seventh embodiment, the open / close second gear 7452 is different from the open / close second gear 452 in the first embodiment in the disposition position of the connecting protrusion 452d. It is formed. More specifically, the main body portion 7452a is formed such that a portion where the coupling protrusion 452d is disposed projects radially outward (downward in FIG. 84 (b)) as compared with the main body portion 452a in the first embodiment. Thus, the distance from the axial center of the open / close second gear 7452 to the axial center of the connecting protrusion 452d is from the axial center of the open / close second gear 7452 to the axial center of the connecting protrusion 452d in the first embodiment. The dimension is set to be larger than the distance.

  In the slide rack member 7481, the connection protrusion 452 d of the opening / closing second gear 7452 is positioned radially outward, and accordingly, the connection groove 7481 c is formed at the guide protrusion 481 d side (FIG. 84B). Close to the lower side. Further, the connecting groove 7481c is curved and extended in an arc shape. Specifically, the connecting groove 7481c has an annular shape in which the axis is located on the extension line of the guide convex portion 481d on the side opposite to the axis of the opening / closing second gear 7452 (the lower side in FIG. 84 (b)). It is formed in a substantially C shape divided at a predetermined central angle (about 45 degrees in the present embodiment). The groove width of the connecting groove 7481c is a groove width in which the connecting protrusion 452d of the open / close second gear 452 can slide.

  As shown in FIG. 84 (b), according to the combined operation unit 7400 in the seventh embodiment, when the second open / close gear 452 is not rotated against the biasing force of the biasing spring 484, the second opening / closing The gear 7452 has a connecting projection 7452d drawn downward (downward in FIG. 84 (b)) by the slide rack member 7481, and the connecting groove 7481c and the second shaft in the slide displacement direction (up / down direction in FIG. 84 (b)). A distance between 427 is a distance L3. Further, in the pair of first pinion leg members 482, the interval between the connecting holes 482d is the interval W1. As described above, the distance L3 is the distance L1 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 26B) as the connecting protrusion 452d is positioned radially outward from the case of the first embodiment. (L1 <L3).

  From the state shown in FIG. 84 (b), for example, when the open / close second gear 7452 is rotated counterclockwise (counterclockwise) about the second shaft 427 with respect to the back arm body 471, the connecting projection 7452d is moved. By sliding in the connecting groove 7481c of the slide rack member 7481, the movement of the connecting protrusion 7452d moves upward (upward in FIG. 84 (a)) against the biasing force of the biasing spring 484. Displace the slide.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 84 (a), when the open / close second gear 7452 is rotated to a predetermined rotational position, the connecting groove 7481c and the second shaft 427 in the slide displacement direction (vertical direction in FIG. 84 (a)). Is reduced to the distance L2 (L2 <L3), and the slide rack member 7481 is slid upward by the difference between the distances L3 and L2.

  In this case, since the distance L3 is larger than the distance L1, as described above, the difference between the distances L3 and L2 is the difference between the distances L1 and L2 in the first embodiment (FIG. 26A and FIG. b)) (see (L1-L2) <(L3-L2)). Accordingly, the pair of first pinion leg members 482 are rotated in a direction in which the pair of first pinion leg members 482 are separated from each other in accordance with the upward slide displacement of the slide rack member 7481, and the interval between the connection holes 482d is enlarged. The interval W3 can be made larger than the interval W2 in the first embodiment (W2 <W3). The same applies to the case of FIG. 84C in which the opening / closing second gear 7452 is rotated in the reverse direction (counterclockwise (counterclockwise)), and the description thereof will be omitted.

  As described above, according to the seventh embodiment, the connecting groove 7481c of the slide rack member 7481 has an arc shape having an axis on the opposite side to the open / close second gear 7452 (that is, convex toward the open / close second gear 7452). Therefore, without increasing the size of the combined operation unit 7400, the slide displacement amount (L3-L2) of the slide rack member 7481 accompanying the rotation of the opening / closing second gear 7452 is increased. Accordingly, the maximum amount of movement of the first pinion leg member 482 (and the second pinion leg member 483) (that is, the interval between the communication holes 482d, W3) can be increased. As a result, the maximum opening amount of the operation members 491 and 492 can be increased (see FIG. 27), and the effect of the production can be enhanced.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 85, a composite operation unit 8400 in the eighth embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, there are two pairs (one pair of first pinion leg members 482 and two pairs of second pinion leg members 483) for supporting the operation members 491 and 492. However, the members for supporting the operation members 491 and 492 of the eighth embodiment are in a one-to-one set. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  85 (a) to 85 (c) are exploded perspective views of the combined operation unit 8400 in the eighth embodiment, and the relative displacement state of the open / close second gear 452 and the slide rack member 7481 with respect to the back arm body 471. FIG. In order to explain the above, a state in which the operation members 491 and 492 and the front arm body 472 are removed is shown. 85 (a) shows the second opening / closing gear 452 counterclockwise (counterclockwise) with respect to FIG. 85 (b), and FIG. 85 (c) shows the second opening / closing second gear 452 with respect to FIG. 85 (b). The gear 452 corresponds to a state in which the gear 452 is rotated clockwise (clockwise).

  Here, the combined operation unit 8400 in the eighth embodiment is different from the combined operation unit 400 in the first embodiment in that the first pinion leg member 482 is omitted and the shape of the second pinion leg member 8383 is changed. However, the other configurations are the same. In the following, only these different configurations will be described, and descriptions of the same configurations will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 85, the second pinion leg member 8483 in the eighth embodiment is different from the main body part 483a of the second pinion leg member 8483 in the first embodiment in that the main body part 8383a is connected to the shaft support hole 483b from the connecting hole 483d. The second connecting hole 8383e is formed through the tip of the extended portion (the other end in the longitudinal direction opposite to the shaft support hole 483b). The raised fastening portions 491a and 492a of the operating members 491 and 492 are rotatably inserted into the connecting holes 483d and the second connecting holes 8383d, and are fastened and fixed by fastening screws (see FIGS. 21 and 22). As a result, the operating members 491 and 492 are connected to the second pinion leg member 8483.

  An urging spring 484 (see FIG. 22) made of a coil spring is disposed between the pair of second pinion leg members 8483 in an elastically tensile state, and the urging spring 484 is elastically restored. The pair of second pinion leg members 8383 are configured to act in a direction in which they are close to each other. As a result, when the operating members 491 and 492 are closed in the opening / closing operation, the operating members 491 and 492 are brought into close contact with each other using the urging force of the urging spring 484 so that a gap is formed. Can be suppressed.

  Here, when the operating members 491 and 492 are opened and closed (see FIG. 27), each of the operating members 491 and 492 is supported at a plurality of locations (two or more locations) in order to stabilize the posture during the operation. It is preferable that In this case, in the case of the first embodiment, the first pinion leg member 482 and the second pinion leg member 483 are connected to the operation members 491 and 492, respectively, so that support at a plurality of places (two places) is possible. However, in such a configuration, the number of parts of the members (the first pinion leg member 482 and the second pinion leg member 483) for supporting the operation members 491 and 492 increases.

  On the other hand, in the eighth embodiment, since the connection hole 483d and the second connection hole 8383e are provided in the second pinion leg member 8483, each of the operation members 491 and 492 can be supported at a plurality of places (two places). As a result, the first pinion leg member 8482 (and the shaft portion 471c of the back arm body 471 for supporting the shaft support hole 482b of the first pinion leg member 482, see FIGS. 21 and 22) is omitted. can do.

  As a result, the overall weight of the combined operation unit 8400 can be reduced, so that the maximum output required for the drive motor 530 (see FIG. 21) can be reduced, and the drive motor 530 can be reduced in size accordingly. it can.

  In particular, in the first pinion leg member 482 (and the shaft portion 471c of the back arm body 471 for rotatably supporting the shaft support hole 482b of the first pinion leg member 482), the operation members 491, 492 are the second. When rotating about the shaft 427 (see FIG. 27), these members are displaced about the second shaft 427 together with the operating members 491 and 492. Therefore, the weight reduction by omitting the first pinion leg member 482 and the shaft portion 471c reduces the influence of the inertial force when starting the rotating operation of the operation members 491 and 492 in the stopped state, and reduces the drive motor 530. This particularly contributes to the downsizing of the product.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 86, a combined operation unit 9400 in the ninth embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the case where the operation members 491 and 492 are opened and closed using the rotational motion of the first and second pinion leg members 482 and 483 has been described. However, the operation members 491 and 492 in the ninth embodiment are opened and closed. The linear motion of the cam leg member 9383 is used. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  86 (a) to 86 (c) are exploded perspective views of the combined operation unit 9400 in the ninth embodiment, and the relative displacement state of the open / close second gear 452 and the slide cam member 9481 with respect to the back arm body 9471. FIG. In order to explain the above, a state in which the operation members 491 and 492 and the front arm body 472 are removed is shown. 86 (a) shows the opening / closing second gear 452 counterclockwise (counterclockwise) with respect to FIG. 86 (b), and FIG. 86 (c) shows opening / closing with respect to FIG. 86 (b). This corresponds to the state in which the second gear 452 is rotated clockwise (clockwise).

  As shown in FIG. 86, the combined operation unit 7400 according to the ninth embodiment includes an opening / closing second gear 452 between the opposing surfaces (front and back) of the back arm body 9471 and the front arm body 472 (not shown). A slide cam member 9481 to be driven (slide displacement) and a cam leg member 9482 to be driven (slide displacement) by the slide cam member 9481 are provided.

  Both the slide cam member 9481 and the cam leg member 9482 constitute a cam mechanism, and the rotational movement of the opening / closing second gear 452 is linear (the direction in which the pair of cam leg members 9482 are close to or apart from each other (FIG. 86 ( b) The movement members 941 and 942 are opened / closed by converting into the slide displacement) in the left / right direction).

  The slide cam member 9481 includes a main body portion 9481a, a cam portion 9481b formed to project from the left and right sides of the main body portion 9481a, and a connecting protrusion 452d of the opening / closing second gear 452 formed at one longitudinal end of the main body portion 9481a. A connecting groove 481c to be inserted, and a guide convex portion 9481d that protrudes in a substantially rectangular cross section from the front and rear surfaces of the main body portion 9481a and extends linearly along the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 9481a.

  The guide convex portion 9481d is formed by shortening the extending length of the guide convex portion 481d in the first embodiment, and is slidable in the guide concave grooves 471d and 472d of the back arm body 9471 and the front arm body 472. Interpolated. Therefore, in the slide cam member 9481, the slide displacement direction is the extension direction of the guide concave grooves 471d and 472d (that is, the longitudinal direction of the back arm body 9471 and the front arm body 472), as in the first embodiment. 86 (b) in the vertical direction).

  The cam portion 9481b has a cam surface CS formed on the outer surface facing the open / close second gear 452 side. The cam surface CS is a sliding surface for pushing the main body portion 9482a of the cam leg member 9482 outward (in a direction away from the main body portion 481a), and is separated from the open / close second gear 452 as it is separated from the main body portion 9481a. It is formed as an inclined surface, and is disposed (intervened) between a pair of cam leg members 9482 (main body portion 9482a) facing each other.

  The cam leg member 9482 includes a main body portion 9482a, a shaft support hole 9482b formed to penetrate the main body portion 9482a, a first connection hole 9482d1 and a second communication hole formed to penetrate one end and the other end in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 9482a. And a pair of holes 9482d2 are arranged on both the left and right sides with the slide cam member 9481 therebetween. The shaft support hole 9482b is formed as an oblong (elongate hole) -shaped hole extending along a direction substantially orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the main body 9482a (the left-right direction in FIG. 86 (b)).

  A shaft portion 9471c of the back arm body 9471 is inserted into the shaft support hole 9482b in the assembled state. Here, as shown in FIG. 86 (b), the shaft portion 9471c of the back arm body 9471 is a shaft body having an oblong shape (oblong hole) viewed in the axial direction, and the major axis direction is the longitudinal direction of the back arm body 9471. In other words, it is disposed in a posture along the direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 86 (b)) orthogonal to the (the displacement direction of the slide cam member 9481).

  The shaft portion 9471c of the back arm body 9471 has a dimension in the minor axis direction (FIG. 86 (b) vertical dimension) substantially the same dimension (or a slightly smaller dimension) than the dimension in the minor axis direction of the shaft support hole 9482b. On the other hand, the dimension in the major axis direction (the dimension in the left-right direction in FIG. 86 (b)) is set to be sufficiently smaller than the dimension in the major axis direction of the shaft support hole 9482b. As a result, the cam leg member 9482 is guided toward or away from the slide cam member 9481 by guiding the inner wall surface of the shaft support hole 9482b along the shaft portion 9471c of the back arm body 9471 (FIG. 86 (b). ) Slide displacement is possible in the horizontal direction).

  The raised fastening portions 491a and 492a of the operation members 491 and 492 are rotatably inserted into the first communication hole 9383d1 and the second connection hole 9383d2, and are fastened and fixed by fastening screws (see FIGS. 21 and 22). As a result, the operating members 491 and 492 are connected to the cam leg member 9483.

  An urging spring 484 (see FIG. 22) made of a coil spring is disposed between the pair of cam leg members 9482 in an elastically tensile state, and the urging spring 484 has an elastic recovery force. The pair of cam leg members 9482 are configured to act in directions close to each other. As a result, when the operating members 491 and 492 are closed in the opening / closing operation, the operating members 491 and 492 are brought into close contact with each other using the urging force of the urging spring 484 so that a gap is formed. Can be suppressed.

  As shown in FIG. 86 (b), according to the combined operation unit 9400 in the ninth embodiment, when the pair of cam leg members 9482 are not slid and displaced against the urging force of the urging spring 484, the opening / closing operation is performed. The second gear 452 has its connecting protrusion 452d drawn downward (downward in FIG. 86 (b)) by the slide cam member 9481, and the connecting groove 481c and the second in the direction of slide displacement (up / down direction in FIG. 86 (b)). A distance between the two axes 427 is a distance L1. The pair of cam leg members 9482 has a space W1 between the first connecting holes 9482d1.

  86B, for example, when the open / close second gear 452 is rotated counterclockwise (counterclockwise) about the second shaft 427 with respect to the back arm body 9471, the connecting protrusion 452d is By sliding in the connecting groove 481c of the slide cam member 9481, the movement of the connecting protrusion 452d moves upward (upward in FIG. 86 (a)) against the biasing force of the biasing spring 484. Displace the slide.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 86 (a), when the opening / closing second gear 452 is rotated to a predetermined rotational position, the connecting groove 481c and the second shaft 427 in the slide displacement direction (vertical direction in FIG. 86 (a)). Is reduced to a distance L2 (L2 <L1), and the slide cam member 9481 is slid upward by the difference between the distances L1 and L2.

  As the slide cam member 9481 slides upward, the cam portion 9481b (cam surface CS) of the slide cam member 9481 pushes the facing distance between the pair of cam leg members 9482 (main body portion 9482a) in the enlargement direction. The pair of cam leg members 9482 are each pushed outward (in a direction away from the main body portion 9481a of the slide cam member 9481). That is, the pair of cam leg members 9882 are slid in a direction away from each other, and the interval between the first connection holes 9482d1 is expanded to the interval W2. The same applies to the case of FIG. 86 (c) in which the open / close second gear 7452 is rotated in the reverse direction (counterclockwise (counterclockwise)), and the description thereof will be omitted.

  As described above, according to the ninth embodiment, since the first connecting hole 9482d1 and the second connecting hole 9482d2 are provided in the cam leg member 9482, the operation members 491 and 492 are formed by one member (cam leg member 9482). Each can be supported at a plurality of locations (two locations). For example, as in the case of the first embodiment, two members (first pinion leg portion 482 and second pinion leg portion 483, see FIG. 26). ) Is not necessary. As a result, as in the case of the eighth embodiment, the weight of the combined operation unit 9400 as a whole can be reduced, so the maximum output required for the drive motor 530 (see FIG. 21) can be reduced, and accordingly, The drive motor 530 can be downsized.

  In particular, according to the ninth embodiment, when starting the rotational operation of the operation members 491 and 492 in the stopped state, the influence of the inertial force is reduced, and compared with the case of the eighth embodiment, the drive motor Further downsizing of 530 can be achieved.

  That is, as described above, the slide cam member 9481 and the pair of cam leg members 9482 are operated when the operation members 491 and 492 are rotated about the second shaft 427 (see FIG. 27). According to the ninth embodiment, by adopting a cam mechanism, a slide cam for the back arm body 9471 and the front arm body 472 (not shown) is a member that is displaced about the second shaft 427 together with 492. The arrangement positions of the member 9481 and the pair of cam leg members 9482 are biased (adjacent) toward the second shaft 427 in the longitudinal direction of the back arm body 9471 and the front arm body 472 (the vertical direction in FIG. 86 (b)). be able to.

  Thereby, the front end side (the side opposite to the second shaft 427) in the longitudinal direction (vertical direction in FIG. 86 (b)) of the back arm body 9471 and the front arm body 472 can be reduced in weight, and the center of gravity of the composite operation unit 9400 can be reduced. Can be brought closer to the second shaft 425 side, and accordingly, the influence of the inertial force can be reduced when starting the rotational operation of the operation members 491 and 492 in the stopped state. As a result, the maximum output required for the drive motor 530 can be reduced, and further miniaturization thereof can be achieved.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 87 to 91, the first combined operation unit 500 and the second combined operation unit 600 in the tenth embodiment will be described.

  In the first embodiment, the lower surface 539e of the first coupling member 539 is brought into contact with the upper surfaces 630a of the pair of second coupling members 630, so that the first coupling member 539 and the pair of second coupling members 630 are in contact with each other. Although the case where it couple | bonds was demonstrated, the coupling | bonding of the 1st coupling member 10539 and a pair of 2nd coupling member 10630 in 10th Embodiment is the 1st and 2nd engagement of these 1st and 2nd coupling members 10539 and 10630. This is performed by engaging the portions 10539f and 10630f. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  Here, in the first embodiment described above, the angle α of the upper and lower surfaces 539e, 630a needs to be set in relation to the angle θ of each link member 621, 622. In the tenth embodiment, the first and first Since the first and second engagement members 10539 and 10630 are coupled using the engagement between the first and second engagement portions 10539f and 10630f provided on the two engagement members 10539 and 10630, the upper and lower surfaces 10539e , 10630a can be set to an arbitrary angle. That is, since the front view shape (protruding shape) of the first coupling member 10539 and the front view shape (concave shape) of the pair of second coupling members 10630 can be arbitrarily set, the protrusion is compared with the case of the first embodiment. The protruding height in the shape and the recessed depth in the recessed shape can be further increased.

  Thus, according to the tenth embodiment, when the first and second coupling members 10539 and 10630 are coupled (see FIG. 32), the first coupling member 10539 is interposed between the pair of second coupling members 10630. It is easy to remind the player that the first coupling member 10539 enters and pushes the pair of second coupling members 10630 away from each other (that is, a gap is formed between the opposing surfaces 630b). can do. As a result, it is possible to operate in a manner different from the player's expectation and enhance the effect. Hereinafter, detailed configurations of the first and second coupling members 10539 and 10630 will be described.

  FIG. 87 (a) is a front view of the first coupling member 10539 in the tenth embodiment, and FIG. 87 (b) is a bottom view of the first coupling member 10539 as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXXVIIb in FIG. 87 (a). is there. FIG. 88 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the first coupling member 10539 taken along line LXXXVIIIa-LXXXVIIIa in FIG. 87 (a), and FIG. 88 (b) is a view taken along line LXXXVIIIb-LXXXVIIIb in FIG. 87 (a). 88 is a cross-sectional view of the first coupling member 10539, and FIG. 88 (c) is a cross-sectional view of the first coupling member 10539 along the line LXXXVIIIc-LXXXVIIIc of FIG. 88 (a).

  As shown in FIGS. 87 and 88, the first coupling member 10539 forms a decorative portion that can be visually recognized by the player from the front side, and abuts against the pair of second coupling members 10630 of the second coupling operation unit 10600. Is a member for forming a coupled state (see FIG. 32), and the front view shape (see FIG. 87 (a)) on the lower surface 10539e side of the decorative portion 539c is in the downward direction of the first coupling member 10539 (see FIG. 87). 87 (a) downward (toward the lower direction).

  The lower surface 10539e of the first coupling member 10539 has a step between the back side lower surface 10539e1 located on the back side (the lower side in FIG. 87B) of the first coupling member 10539 and the back side lower surface 10539e1. It is formed from an inclined lower surface 10539e2 which is connected and has a downwardly inclined inclination from the connecting portion having the step toward the front side of the first coupling member 10539 (upper side in FIG. 87 (b)). That is, the inclined lower surface 10539e2 retreats upward from the rear side lower surface 10539e1 (upper side in FIG. 88 (a)), and then is inclined downward (lower side in FIG. 88 (a)) as it is separated from the rear side lower surface 10539e1. Each of the back-side lower surface 10539e1 and the inclined lower surface 10539e2 is formed by combining two flat surfaces that are inclined downward toward the center.

  In this case, the inclined lower surface 10539e2 has an edge on the inclined front end side (lower end side, front side in FIG. 87 (a)) on the entire lateral width direction (FIG. 87 (a) left-right direction) of the first coupling member 10539. It is arranged at the same height position as the back side lower surface 10539e1 or a height position slightly below the back side lower surface 10539e1 (downward in FIG. 87 (a)). Thereby, in the front view of the 1st coupling member 10539, the back side lower surface 10539e1 (opening of the recessed part 10539f mentioned later) can be made invisible to a player. Note that the inclined lower surface 10539e2 is in contact with the inclined upper surface 10630a2 of the second coupling member 10630 at the coupling position (see FIG. 91A), thereby the front of the second coupling member 10630 with respect to the first coupling member 10539. Restriction (positioning) of relative displacement to the (front side) is possible.

  On the back side lower surface 10539e1, a concave portion 10539f having a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front is provided in the center in the horizontal width direction (left and right direction in FIG. 87 (b)). The concave portion 10539f is a portion to which the convex portion 10630c protruding from the upper surface 10630a of the second coupling member 10630 is engaged at the coupling position, and a pair of left and right inner wall surfaces 10539f1 located on both sides in the longitudinal direction, A rear-side inner wall surface 10539f2 located on the lower side (FIG. 87 (b)).

  The pair of left and right inner wall surfaces 10539f1 are formed as flat surfaces that incline so that the facing interval becomes wider toward the lower side in the ascending / descending direction of the first coupling member 10539 (downward side, lower side in FIG. 88 (c)). That is, the pair of left and right inner wall surfaces 10539f1 are formed in a shape that expands toward the traveling direction when the first coupling member 10539 is lowered toward the coupling position. Note that the left and right inner wall surfaces 10539f1 are in contact with the left and right outer wall surfaces 10630c1 of the convex portion 10630c of the second coupling member 10630 at the coupling position (see FIG. 91B). The relative displacement of the two coupling members 10630 in the left-right direction (lateral width direction) can be restricted.

  The back side inner wall surface 10539f2 is formed as a flat surface that is inclined so as to approach the back side as it goes downward (downward side, lower side in FIG. 88 (a)) in the ascending / descending direction of the first coupling member 10539. That is, the back side inner wall surface 10539f2 is inclined in the direction opposite to the inclined lower surface 10539e2, and the opposing distance between the rear side inner wall surface 10539f2 and the inclined lower surface 10539e2 is lowered toward the coupling position of the first coupling member 10539. It is formed so as to gradually increase toward the traveling direction side (lower side in FIG. 88 (a)). Note that the rear side inner wall surface 10539f2 is in contact with the rear side outer wall surface 10630c2 of the convex portion 10630c of the second coupling member 10630 at the coupling position (see FIG. 91A), thereby the first coupling member 10539. It is possible to restrict (position) the relative displacement of the second coupling member 10630 to the rear (back side).

  89 (a) is a partially enlarged front view of the second coupling operation unit 10600, and FIG. 89 (b) is a top view of the second coupling member 10630 when viewed in the direction of the arrow LXXXIXb in FIG. 89 (a). 90A is a cross-sectional view of the second coupling member 10630 taken along the line XCa-XCa in FIG. 89B, and FIG. 90B is a cross-sectional view taken along the line XCb-XCb in FIG. 90A. FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 89 and 90, the second coupling member 10630 is a member that forms a decorative portion visually recognized by the player from the front side and is coupled to the first coupling member 10539 at the coupling position (FIG. 32). The shape of the second coupling member 10630 on the upper surface 10630a side as viewed from the front (see FIG. 89A) is formed into a shape that is inclined downward toward the facing surface 630b. That is, when the pair of second coupling members 10630 are coupled at the coupling position, the front view shape on the upper surface 10630a side of the pair of second coupling members 10630 is formed into a V shape with a recessed center (see FIG. 32). ).

  The upper surface 10630a of the second coupling member 10630 is connected with a step between the back-side upper surface 10630a1 located on the back side (the upper side in FIG. 89 (b)) of the second coupling member 10630 and the back-side upper surface 10630a1. And an inclined upper surface 10630a2 inclined downward from the connecting portion having the step toward the front side of the second coupling member 10630 (the lower side in FIG. 89 (b)). That is, the inclined upper surface 10630a2 rises upward (upper side in FIG. 90 (a)) from the rear-side upper surface 10630a1, and then descends downward (lower side in FIG. 90 (a)) as the distance from the rear-side upper surface 10630a1 increases. Further, each of the back-side upper surface 10630a1 and the inclined upper surface 10630a2 is formed as a flat surface that is inclined downward toward the facing surface 630b.

  The inclined upper surface 10630a2 is brought into contact with the inclined lower surface 10539e2 of the first coupling member 10539 at the coupling position (see FIG. 91A). It is possible to restrict (position) the relative displacement of the coupling member 10630 to the front (front side).

  On the back side upper surface 10630a1, a convex portion 10630c having a horizontally long rectangular shape in front view is projected on the opposite surface 630b side. The convex portion 10630c is a portion that is engaged with the concave portion 10539f provided in the lower surface 10539e of the first coupling member 10539 at the coupling position, and is located on the left and right sides that are opposite to the opposing surface 630b. An outer wall surface 10630c1 and a rear-side outer wall surface 10630c2 located on the back side (upper side in FIG. 89 (b)) are provided.

  The left and right outer wall surfaces 10630c1 are formed as flat surfaces that are inclined from the rear surface upper surface 10630a1 toward the facing surface 630b. That is, in a state where the pair of second coupling members 10630 couples the opposing surfaces 630b (see FIG. 91 (b)), the pair of left and right outer wall surfaces 10630c1 are tapered toward the first coupling member 10539. It is formed into a shape. As described above, the left and right outer wall surfaces 10630c1 are in contact with the left and right inner wall surfaces 10539f1 of the recesses 10539f of the left and right inner wall surfaces 10539f1 at the coupling position (see FIG. 91 (b)), whereby the first coupling member The relative displacement in the left-right direction (width direction) of the second coupling member 10630 with respect to 10539 can be restricted.

  Further, the rear side outer wall surface 10630c2 is formed as a flat surface that slopes downward from the top of the convex portion 10630a toward the back side of the second coupling member 10630. That is, the back side outer wall surface 10630c2 is inclined in the opposite direction to the inclined upper surface 10630a2, and the facing distance between the back surface outer wall surface 10630c2 and the inclined upper surface 10630a2 is the first coupling member 10539 side (upper side in FIG. 90 (a)). It is formed so as to gradually decrease as it goes to. Note that the rear-side outer wall surface 10630c2 is brought into contact with the rear-side inner wall surface 10539f2 in the recess 10539f of the first coupling member 10630 at the coupling position (see FIG. 91A). The second coupling member 10630 can be regulated (positioned) relative to the rear (back side) relative displacement.

  In this case, the inclined upper surface 10630a2 has an edge portion on the inclined base end side (upper end side, right side in FIG. 90 (a)) that protrudes in the entire width direction (FIG. 89 (b) left-right direction) of the second coupling member 10630. It is arranged at a height position (above FIG. 90 (a)) above the top of the portion 10630c. Thereby, in the front view of the 2nd coupling member 10630, convex part 10630c can be made invisible to a player.

  Here, the convex part 10630c is made so small that the thickness dimension in the front-back direction (FIG. 90 (a) left-right direction dimension) goes to the protrusion front-end | tip. That is, the outer wall surface on the front side (opposite side to the rear-side outer wall surface 10630c2 and the left side in FIG. 90A) of the convex portion 10630c is formed to be inclined in the same direction as the inclined upper surface 10630a2. Therefore, when the first coupling member 10539 and the second coupling member 10630 are coupled, the convex portion 10630f of the second coupling member 10630 can be easily inserted into the concave portion 10539f of the first coupling member 10539.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 91, the coupling operation of the first coupling member 10539 and the pair of second coupling members 10630 will be described.

  FIGS. 91A and 91B are cross-sectional views of the first coupling member 10539 and the second coupling member 10630 in a state of being arranged at the coupling position. 91A corresponds to FIGS. 88A and 90A, and FIG. 91B corresponds to FIGS. 88B and 90B.

  As described above, the first coupling member 10539 and the pair of second coupling members 10630 are coupled to each other from the retracted position (see FIG. 31) by bringing the pair of second coupling members 10630 closer to each other by the erection of the link mechanism. As shown in FIG. 91 (a) and FIG. 91 (b), the first coupling member 10539 is moved down toward the pair of second coupling members 10630 arranged side by side while being arranged side by side. The first coupling member 10539 and the pair of second coupling members 10630 are coupled to each other.

  In this case, in this embodiment, as described above, the concave portion 10539f of the first coupling member 10539 includes a pair of left and right inner wall surfaces 10539f1, and the left and right outer wall surfaces that are in contact with the pair of left and right inner wall surfaces 10539f1 of the recess 10539f. The projections 10630c of the pair of second coupling members 10630 are respectively provided with 10630c1, and the pair of left and right inner wall surfaces 10539f1 and the pair of left and right outer wall surfaces 10630c1 advance when the first coupling member 10539 is lowered toward the coupling position. The left and right inner wall surfaces 10539f1 of the recesses 10539f are formed in the right and left directions (lateral width direction, figure) on the left and right outer wall surfaces 10630c1 of the protrusions 10630c. 91 (b) left and right direction) A pair of second coupling portions by being in contact from both sides 10630 can be displaced to a mutually approaching direction (the direction to abut was what facing surface 630b). In other words, the pair of second coupling members 10630 can be coupled while reliably suppressing the formation of a gap between the opposing surfaces (between the opposed surfaces 630a).

  As described above, the lower surface 10539e of the first coupling member 10539 is formed with the inclined lower surface 10539e2 connected to the front surface of the first coupling member 10539, and the upper surface 10630a of the pair of second coupling members 10630 has the first surface thereof. (2) An inclined upper surface 10630a2 connected to the front surface of the coupling member 10630 is formed, and the inclined lower surface 10539e2 and the inclined upper surface 10630a2 are inclined in the same direction (in the present embodiment, inclined at the same inclination angle), and thus are disposed at the coupling position. In this state, the inclined lower surface 10539e2 and the inclined upper surface 10630a2 can be brought into contact with each other as shown in FIG. 91 (a).

  Even if the inclined lower surface 10539e2 and the inclined upper surface 10630a2 cannot be brought into full contact with each other due to dimensional tolerance, the first coupling member 10539 is caused by the inclined surfaces facing each other. In addition, the player can recognize the shape of the front view so that there is no gap between the facing of the second coupling member 10630. That is, even if there is a gap between the inclined lower surface 10539e2 and the inclined upper surface 10630a2, the background is not visually recognized through the gap, and the player can visually recognize the inclined upper surface 10630a2. Accordingly, it is possible to improve the effect of rendering by coupling the first coupling member 10539 and the pair of second coupling members 10630 at the coupling position.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, the concave portion 10539f of the first coupling member 10539 and the convex portion 10630c of the second coupling member 10630 are the first coupling member 10539 and the second coupling member 10630 on the back side of the inclined lower surface 10539e2 and the inclined upper surface 10630a2. When the player views the front, the player is placed so that it cannot be seen. Therefore, when the first coupling member 10539 and the pair of second coupling members 10630 are coupled at the coupling position, the pair of second coupling members 10630 are displaced in a direction close to each other (a direction in which the opposing surfaces 630b come into contact with each other). It is possible to prevent the player from visually recognizing the structure portion to be played.

  Thus, when the first coupling member 10539 is coupled to the pair of second coupling members 10630, the coupling operation is different from the player's expectation (that is, the shape of the first coupling member 10539 on the lower surface 10539e side when viewed from the front). Is formed in a protruding shape, and the front view shape on the upper surface 10630a side of the pair of second coupling members 10630 is formed in a concave shape, so that the first coupling member 10539 enters between the pair of second coupling members 10630, When the player recalls an aspect in which the first coupling member 10539 pushes and expands the pair of second coupling members 10630 away from each other (that is, an aspect in which a gap is formed between the opposing surfaces 630b), The coupling member 10630 is easily coupled with no gap), and the production effect can be enhanced.

  When the entire lower surface 539e and upper surface 630a are formed flush with each other like the first coupling member 539 and the second coupling member 630 in the first embodiment, the left and right inner wall surfaces 10539f1 (recess 1039f) and the left and right It is impossible for the player to make the outer wall surface 10630f1 (the convex portion 10630f) invisible from the player in front view, and the inclined lower surface 10539e2 and the inclined upper surface 10630a2 are connected to the lower surface 10539e and the front surface side of the upper surface 10630a (as in this embodiment). This is possible only when it is provided in the front, the left side of FIG. 88 (a) and FIG. 90 (a) (that is, the left and right inner wall surfaces 10539f1 (recess 1039f) and the left and right sides by the inclined lower surface 10539e2 and the inclined upper surface 10630a2). Player in front view of outer wall surface 10630f1 (convex portion 10630f) It can be et invisible).

  A rear-side inner wall surface 10539f2 is formed in the recess 10539f of the first coupling member 10539, and a rear-side outer wall surface 10630c2 that abuts the rear-side inner wall surface 10539f2 at the coupling position (see FIG. 91A) is the second. Since the back side inner wall surface 10539f2 and the back side outer wall surface 10630c2 are inclined in different directions with respect to the inclined lower surface 10539e2 and the inclined upper surface 10630a2, they are formed on the convex portion 10630c of the coupling member 10630. The positioning direction of the second coupling member 10630 (the direction in which relative displacement is restricted) is determined by the contact between the rear side inner wall surface 10539f2 and the rear side outer wall surface 10630c2, and the rear side inner wall surface 10539f2 and the rear side outer wall surface 10630c2. The direction opposite the direction of contact Door can be.

  As a result, the second coupling member 10630 can be positioned in the front-rear direction (the direction connecting the front and the back, FIG. 91 (a) left-right direction) with respect to the first coupling member 10539, so that the first coupling member 10539 and the second coupling The joint portion of the member 10630 (the inclined lower surface 10539e2 and the inclined upper surface 10630a2) is not only prevented from being stepped in the front-rear direction, but also the first coupling member 10539 and the second coupling member 10630 are held at the positioning positions in the front-rear direction. Therefore, it is possible to suppress relative displacement and rattling after being arranged at the coupling position.

  Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be guessed.

In each of the above-described embodiments, a part or all of the configuration in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with a part or all of the configuration in the other embodiments to form another embodiment. For example, as described in the second embodiment, the insertion shaft 2772 of the link member 2770 is inserted through the insertion hole 762c of the rack 762 so as to be axially displaceable, and as described in the third embodiment, the link The member 3770 is in contact with the inner wall surface of the third passage P3 (the front surface 2711a of the intermediate case body 2710), and the main body 771 of the link member 3770 is elastically deformed (that is, the second embodiment and the third embodiment). And form) may be combined.
The gaming machine 8 and the gaming machine 9 may be combined.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, a case is described in which the positioning holes 451e and 462e of the opening / closing first gear 451 and the rotating second gear 462 are formed through the main body portions 451a and 462a as through holes in the combined operation units 400 and 7400 to 9400. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the positioning holes 451e and 462e of the opening / closing first gear 451 and the rotating second gear 462 may be recessed bottoms. Even in the case of a bottomed recess, it is possible to position the mounting position etc. by inserting a jig into the recess by the same method as in the above embodiment, but compared with the case where it is formed as a through hole. Thus, the rigidity of the opening / closing first gear 451 and the rotating second gear 462 can be secured, so that the durability can be improved.

  In each of the above embodiments, the connection protrusion 452d is disposed on the open / close second gear 452, 7452, and the connection grooves 481c and 7481c through which the connection protrusion 452d is inserted are the slide rack members 481 and 7481 or the slide cam member 9481. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the arrangement positions thereof may be interchanged. That is, the connecting protrusion 452d is disposed on the slide rack members 481, 7481 or the slide cam member 9481, and the connecting grooves 481c and 7481c through which the connecting protrusion 452d is inserted are disposed on the open / close second gears 452 and 7452. It is good also as a structure. In this case, the connecting grooves 481c and 7481c provided in the opening / closing second gears 452 and 7452 are convex toward the slide rack members 481 and 7481 or the slide cam member 9481 in which the connecting protrusion 452d is provided. It is preferable to form a curved arc. This is because the maximum amount of movement of the slide rack members 481, 7481 or the slide cam member 9481 can be increased by increasing the amount of movement of the connecting projection 452d associated with the rotation of the opening / closing second gear 452, 7452.

  In the seventh embodiment, the case where the connecting groove 7481c is curved in a circular arc shape with a constant curvature has been described. May be formed. Thereby, for example, the slide rack with respect to the rotation (rotational speed) of the opening / closing second gear 452 by changing the curvatures of the first portion and the second portion of the connecting groove 7481c are different. The sliding amount (movement speed) of the member 7481 can be made different when the connecting protrusion 452d passes through the first portion and when it passes through the second portion. As a result, it is possible to change the opening / closing operation (opening / closing speed) of the operating members 491, 492 while rotating the opening / closing second gear 452 (drive motor 430) at a constant rotational speed. Note that the connecting groove 7481c may be formed by combining a curved portion curved in an arc shape and a linear straight portion (a part of the connecting groove 7481c is a linear portion extending linearly). May be)

  In the first to seventh embodiments and the tenth embodiment, the lengths of the first pinion leg member 482 and the second pinion leg member 483 in the combined operation units 400 and 7400 are made different from each other, thereby operating members 491 and 492. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the first pinion leg member 482 and the second pinion leg member 483 are operated with the same length. It is naturally possible to open and close the members 491 and 492 in parallel. Alternatively, the gear portion 482c of the first pinion leg member 482 and the gear portion 483c of the second pinion leg member 483 have different gear characteristics (that is, the rotation angle associated with the slide of the slide rack member 481 is the first pinion leg member). By setting the second pinion leg member 483 so as to be larger than the second pinion leg member 483, the opening and closing operations of the operation members 491 and 492 may be parallel opening and closing. In this case, two different types of gears corresponding to the gear portions 482c and 483c are provided on the rack portion 481b of the slide rack members 481 and 7481, respectively.

  Alternatively, in the first to eighth embodiments, the case where the connecting hole 482d and the second connecting hole 8383e are formed in a long hole shape in the composite operation units 400, 7400, and 8400 has been described. The dimension of the direction may be set as follows, and the opening / closing operation of the operation members 491, 492 may be parallel opening / closing. That is, the description will be made by paying attention to the operation member 491. When the pinion leg members 482, 483, and 8483 are rotated, the pair of connection raised portions 491a of the operation member 491 is connected to the connection hole 493d. The other connecting raised portion 491a is rotatably supported and rotatably supported by the connecting hole 482d and the second connecting hole 8383e so as to be slidable in the major axis direction. In this case, in a state before the second opening / closing gear 452 is rotated (see, for example, FIG. 26B), an imaginary line connecting the pair of connection raised portions 491a of the operation member 491 and the second opening / closing gear 452 after the rotation. In the state (for example, see FIG. 26A and FIG. 26C), the connection hole 482d and the second connection hole 8383e are arranged so that the imaginary line connecting the pair of connection raised portions 491a of the operation member 491 becomes parallel. Set the dimension in the major axis direction.

  In the first to seventh embodiments and the tenth embodiment, in the combined operation units 400 and 7400, the gear ratio between the gear portion 482c and the rack portion 481b of the first pinion leg member 482 and the second pinion leg member 483 are used. The case where the gear ratio between the gear portion 483c and the rack portion 481b of the first pinion leg member 482 is not necessarily limited to this, but the gear ratio between the gear portion 483c and the rack portion 481b is the same. The gear ratio may be different from the gear ratio between the gear portion 483c of the second pinion leg member 483 and the rack portion 481b. Thereby, the opening / closing operation | movement of the operation members 491 and 492 can be made into non-parallel opening / closing, and an effect can be heightened.

  In the first to seventh embodiments and the tenth embodiment, the case where both the first pinion leg member 482 and the second pinion leg member 483 are engaged with the rack portion 481b in the combined operation units 400 and 7400 is described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Only one of the first pinion leg member 482 and the second pinion leg member 483 is meshed with the rack part 481b, and the other is not meshed with the rack part 481b. It is also possible to pivotally support the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472 in a rotatable manner. Thereby, the opening / closing operation | movement of the operation members 491 and 492 can be made into non-parallel opening / closing, and an effect can be heightened.

  In each of the embodiments described above, in the combined operation units 400 and 7400 to 9400, as the opening / closing operation and the rotation operation of the operation members 491, 492, the rotation first gear 461 and the opening / closing first gear 451 are continuously operated from the rotation angle θ0 to the rotation angle θ4. Although the rotation operation is described as one unit, it is not necessarily limited to this, and it is naturally possible to divide the operation unit within the range of the rotation angles θ0 to θ4.

  In each of the above embodiments, in the first combined operation unit 500, 4500-6500, the case where two insertion shafts 531c are arranged in parallel on the back surface of the A-layer base plate 531 is described. The number of insertion shafts 531c in each row may be two or less, or four or more.

  In the first to third embodiments and the seventh to tenth embodiments, the central insertion shaft of the three insertion shafts 531c arranged vertically on the back surface of the A-layer base plate 531 in the first combined operation unit 500. Although the case where the 1st link member 541 and the 2nd link member 542 are connected to 531c was demonstrated, it is not necessarily restricted to this, The upper insertion shaft 531c or the lower of the three insertion shafts 531c arranged vertically The first link member 541 and the second link member 542 may be coupled to the insertion shaft 531c on the side. The same applies to the fourth embodiment, and the second link member 542 may be connected to the upper insertion shaft 531c or the lower insertion shaft 531c among the three insertion shafts 531c arranged vertically.

  In the first to third embodiments and the seventh to tenth embodiments, in the first coupling operation unit 500, the support shaft 527 inserted through the shaft support hole 541a and the slide hole 541c of the first link member 541 and the insertion. A retaining ring E is attached to the shaft 531c as a retaining member or a fastening screw is fastened, while a retaining ring E is disposed as a retaining member or a fastening screw is fastened to the connecting shaft 526 inserted through the connecting hole 541b. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and it is only necessary that at least one of these three locations is fitted with a retaining ring E or a fastening screw as a retaining stopper. .

  In the second and third embodiments, the case where the passage P is formed by combining linear passages (first passage P1, second passage P2, and third passage P3) in a top view (see FIG. 65) is described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the offset amount to the front side (front) in a state where the link members 2770 and 3770 are erected substantially vertically and the ring forming member 790 is disposed at the coupling position is at least The shape of the passage P from the retracted position to the coupling position can be arbitrarily set as long as it is larger than the offset amount to the front side (front) in the state in which the circle forming member 790 is disposed at the retracted position. For example, only the third passage P3 may be formed as a passage that curves in an arc shape when viewed from above. If at least the amount of offset to the front side at the coupling position is larger than the amount of offset to the front side at the retracted position, the drive necessary to hold the lifting base body 2780 (ring-forming member 790) at the coupling position. It is possible to achieve both the suppression of the energy consumption of the motor 740 and the suppression of the energy consumption of the drive motor 740 necessary for raising and lowering the lifting base body 2780 (ring forming member 790) between the coupling position and the retracted position. it can.

  In the tenth embodiment, in the coupling position, the convex portions 10630c of the pair of second coupling members 1630 are adjacent to each other, and the concave portion 10539f that receives the pair of convex portions 10630c arranged adjacent to each other is an integral concave portion. The case where the first coupling member 10539 is recessed on the back side lower surface 10539e1 has been described as (one recess), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the projections 10630c of the pair of coupling members 1630 are not necessarily limited to each other. Are separated from each other, and separate concave portions (two concave portions) that can receive the pair of convex portions 10630c are respectively provided in the rear side lower surface 10539e1 of the first coupling member 10539. good.

  In the tenth embodiment, the lower surface 10539e of the first coupling member 10539 has a vertical surface (hereinafter referred to as “connection surface”) that connects the rear-side lower surface 10539e1 and the inclined lower surface 10539e2 (elevation of the first coupling member 10539). Direction, which is parallel to the vertical direction in FIG. 88 (a), is not necessarily limited to this. In this case, it is preferable that the connection surface of the first coupling member 10539 be inclined in a direction opposite to the inclined lower surface 10539e2 (that is, the same direction as the rear-side inner wall surface 10539f2). When the first coupling member 10539 is coupled to the second coupling member 10630, the first coupling member 10539 is relatively in front of the second coupling member 10630 (frontward, front view) due to influences such as shaking due to disturbance. 91 (a) left side), the connection surface of the first coupling member 10539 is brought into contact with the rising end (the right end in FIG. 91 (a)) of the inclined upper surface 10630a2 of the second coupling member 10630. be able to. Accordingly, the ascending end (corner portion) of the inclined upper surface 10630a2 can be slid along the inclined surface in accordance with the lowering operation of the first connecting member 10539 with respect to the second connecting member 10630, and both the connecting members 10539, 10630 can be slid. Can be guided (positioned in the front-rear direction) to a regular position.

  In the tenth embodiment, the back side lower surface 10539e1 of the first coupling member 10539 is a flat surface, and the height position in the vertical direction (the up and down direction of the first coupling member 10539) is entirely the same height position. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the height position of a part of the back side lower surface 10539e1 may be arranged below the height position of other parts. Specifically, only the portion of the rear side lower surface 10539e1 of the first coupling member 10539 located on the front side (front side, left side in FIG. 91 (a)) of the convex portion 10630c of the second coupling member 10630, The height position is arranged below (lower side in FIG. 91 (a)) the part located on the back side (rear side, right side in FIG. 91 (a)) from the convex portion 10630c. Thereby, when lowering the first coupling member 10539 with respect to the second coupling member 10630, the portion of the rear side lower surface 10539e1 where the height position is disposed downward (the front side of the convex portion 10630c (FIG. 91 ( The timing at which the portion a) located on the left side) abuts on the outer wall surface of the convex portion 10630c (the outer wall surface on the opposite side of the rear-side outer wall surface 10630c2, the left side in FIG. 91 (a)) It is possible to precede the timing at which the back side (the part located on the right side in FIG. 91 (a)) contacts the outer wall surface (back side outer wall surface 10630c2) of the convex portion 10630c. Can achieve a good bond.

  You may implement this invention in the pachinko machine etc. of a different type from said each embodiment. For example, once a big hit, a pachinko machine that raises the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, two times or three times) including that (for example, a two-time right item, a three-time right item) May also be implemented. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a special area such as a V-zone and has a special gaming state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as various game machines such as an alepatchi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating a control lever in a state where a symbol effective line is determined by inserting coins, and a symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating a stop button. Is. Accordingly, the basic concept of the slot machine is that it is provided with a display device for confirming and displaying the identification information after variably displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and resulting from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variation display of the identification information is started, and the variation display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific condition. In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, etc. Take as an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided that displays a symbol after a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is variably displayed, and has a handle for launching a ball. What is not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of spheres based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the change of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or With the passage of time, the variation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the determined symbol at the time of stoppage is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large amount of balls are paid out to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only a ball can be handled as a gaming value in the gaming hall. Therefore, the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall in which pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed is used. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of the gaming machine can be solved.

  The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention is shown below.

  A moving member formed to be movable between the first position and the second position, a driving means for generating a driving force for moving the moving member, and a driving force generated by the driving means for the moving member A transmission means for transmitting to the transmission member, wherein the transmission means transmits the driving force of the driving means to the moving member, and transmits the driving force from the driving means to the moving member. When the movement of at least the moving member at the first position to the second position is started, the transmission state is formed after the blocking state is formed. A gaming machine A1 that is characterized by being played.

  According to the gaming machine A1, when the movement member at the first position starts to move to the second position, the transmission state is formed after the transmission unit forms the blocking state. The driving force required for the driving means to start the movement can be suppressed, and as a result, the driving means can be reduced in size.

  That is, when movement of the moving member at the first position to the second position is started, the stationary object is moved, so that a force exceeding the inertial force generated at the moving member at the start of movement is applied. It is necessary to act on such a moving member, and the driving force required for the driving means increases. As a result, the driving means has been increased in size (see, for example, JP 2011-120640 A). On the other hand, after the movement of the moving member is started, the inertial action to maintain the moving state of the moving member acts, so that the driving force required for the driving means does not move the moving member. It becomes smaller compared to the driving force required at the start. In other words, after the movement of the moving member is started, it can be said that the driving means having an unnecessarily large maximum output is in use.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine A1, when the movement of the moving member at the first position to the second position is started, the transmission state is formed after the transmission unit forms the shut-off state. Even if the driving force that can be generated by the means is small, the movement of the moving member can be started. In other words, since the transmission unit first forms the shut-off state, it is possible to generate a driving force in the driving unit in a no-load state, and it is possible to give momentum (inertial force) to the driving state of the driving unit. . Thereafter, a transmission state is formed by the transmission means (switched from the shut-off state to the transmission state), so that the driving means is in a state where the driving state is momentum (a state where the inertial force is large) and the driving force is applied to the moving means. Can be transmitted. Thereby, even if a drive means is reduced in size, the movement of a moving member can be started. In other words, after the movement of the moving member is started, it is possible to suppress a state in which the driving unit having an unnecessarily large maximum output is used.

  In the gaming machine A1, the transmission means is formed such that teeth to which driving force is transmitted from the driving means are formed at least partially or entirely, and the driving means side member can be engaged with the driving means side member. A moving member side member having teeth for transmitting a driving force transmitted from the driving means side member to the moving member at least partly or entirely around the driving member side member or at least one of the moving member side member. One of the gaming machines A2 is provided with a non-forming portion in which the teeth are not formed and cannot be engaged with the other of the driving means side member or the moving member side member.

  According to the gaming machine A2, the transmission means is formed so that the driving means side member and the moving member side member can be engaged with each other. Therefore, when the driving means side member is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, the transmission means side The moving member side member engaged with the member is rotated, and the driving force is transmitted to the moving member through the rotation of the moving member side member (a transmission state is formed). In this case, since one of the driving means side member and the moving member side member is formed with a non-formed portion where teeth are not formed, the driving means side member is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and the driving means side When the non-forming portion is disposed at the meshing position of the member and the moving member side member, the driving means side member and the moving member side member are incapable of meshing, and transmission of driving force from the driving means to the moving member is cut off. (Blocking state is formed).

  Therefore, when the movement of the moving member at the first position to the second position is started, the drive means side member can be idled by forming a shut-off state using the non-forming portion first. Therefore, the driving means can be driven in a no-load state, and the driving state of the driving means can be given force (inertial force on the driving means side member). Thereafter, the driving means side member that idles is engaged with the moving member side member (that is, a transmission state is formed), so that the driving means starts driving the moving means in a state in which the driving state is energized. be able to. Thereby, even if a drive means is reduced in size, the movement of a moving member can be started.

  As described above, according to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1, the transmission means includes the driving means side member and the moving member side member, and the at least one of the driving means side member or the moving member side member is provided. Since the non-forming part where the teeth are not formed is provided, the shut-off state and the transmission state according to the relative rotation position (rotation position of the non-forming part) between the driving means side member and the moving member side member And can be switched. In other words, since the configuration for achieving the switching of the state does not require an actuator device and can be configured only from gears, the structure can be simplified and the product cost can be reduced.

  Here, the teeth formed on the driving means side member and the moving member side member are mechanical elements used for transmission of power through meshing with the mating teeth. In this case, the shape of the teeth is not limited. For example, the gear teeth exemplified below can be applied to the teeth of the driving means side member and the moving member side member. Examples of the gear include a spur gear, a helical gear, a helical gear, a bevel gear, a spiral bevel gear, a screw gear, a crown gear, a miter gear, an internal gear, a hypoid gear, and a worm gear. The same applies to the concepts of various inventions described below.

  In the gaming machine A2, each of the driving means side member and the moving member side member includes the non-forming part, and the non-forming part of the driving means side member and the non-forming part of the moving member side member face each other, A gaming machine A3 characterized in that a blocking state is formed.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A2, each of the driving means side member and the moving member side member includes a non-forming part, and the non-forming part of the driving means side member and the non-forming part of the moving member side member Since the formation portions face each other, a blocking state is formed, so that the outer diameters of the non-formation portions of the drive means side member and the movement member side member are secured, and the rigidity of the drive means side member and the movement member side member is secured. Improvements can be made.

  That is, when only one of the driving means side member or the moving member side member has a non-forming portion (that is, the other of the driving means side member or the moving member side member is formed with teeth around the entire circumference). The non-forming portion needs to be retracted to a position where the engagement with the other tooth of the driving means side member or the moving member side member can be avoided. Specifically, the non-forming portion needs to be retracted to the rotating shaft side from the valley bottom in one tooth of the driving means side member or the moving member side member. As a result, the amount of retraction in the non-forming portion increases, so that the outer diameter in one non-forming portion of the driving means side member or the moving member side member decreases, and accordingly one of the driving means side member or the moving member side member. This leads to a decrease in rigidity.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A3, since each of the driving means side member and the moving member side member includes the non-forming portion, both the non-forming portions retreat to a position where they do not interfere with the opposing non-forming portions. If it is, it is enough. Specifically, both non-forming portions can be positioned between the valley bottom and the mountain top of the teeth of the driving means side member and the moving member side member, and it is not necessary to move backward from the valley bottom to the rotating shaft side. As a result, the amount of retraction in the non-forming portion can be reduced, so that the outer diameters of the non-forming portions of the driving means side member and the moving member side member are secured, and the rigidity of the driving means side member and the moving member side member can Improvements can be made.

  In the gaming machine A3, the non-formation portion in one of the driving means side member or the moving member side member is curved and formed in an arc shape around the one rotation axis of the driving means side member or the moving member side member. The non-formation part in the other of the driving means side member or the moving member side member is separated from the other tooth of the driving means side member or the moving member side member in the circumferential direction, and the driving means side member or the moving member side member A gaming machine A4, characterized in that it has a shape projecting toward a non-forming portion in one of the above.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A3, the non-forming part provided in each of the driving means side member and the moving member side member is the non-forming part in one of the driving means side member or the moving member side member. The drive means side member or the moving member side member is formed in an arcuate shape around the one rotation axis, and the non-formation portion in the other of the driving means side member or the moving member side member is the driving means side member or the movement A shape that protrudes toward a non-forming portion formed on one of the driving member side member or the moving member side member as it is separated from the other tooth of the member side member in the circumferential direction (that is, the driving means side member or the moving member side member) Therefore, it is possible to form a cut-off state while avoiding interference between these non-forming portions, while allowing the drive means side member or moving member to be formed. By increasing the outside diameter of the other non-formation portion of the member, the other of the rigid drive means side member or the moving member side member can be further enhanced.

  In the gaming machine A3 or A4, the driving means side member and the moving member side member are respectively at the first phase position and the second phase position which is a phase position different from the first phase position. The gaming machine A5 is characterized in that the non-formed part of the side member and the non-formed part of the moving member side member face each other to form the blocking state.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A3 or A4, the driving means side member and the moving member side member form a blocking state at two locations, the first phase position and the second phase position. Since the first phase position and the second phase position correspond to the first position and the second position of the moving member, the movement of the moving member at the first position to the second position is started. When the movement of the moving member at the second position to the first position is started, the transmission state is formed after the shut-off state is formed, so that the driving state of the driving means is achieved. Momentum (inertial force) can be given. That is, even when the driving force that can be generated by the driving means is small, the movement of the moving member can be started both when the moving member is in the first position and when it is in the second position.

  A game comprising a movable member formed so as to be movable, a driving means for generating a driving force for moving the moving member, and a transmission means for transmitting the driving force generated by the driving means to the moving member. In the machine, the moving member includes a first moving member and a second moving member, and the transmission means transmits a driving force of the driving means to the second moving member, and the driving means A gaming machine B1 that can simultaneously form a blocking state in which transmission of driving force to the first moving member is blocked.

  According to the gaming machine B1, when the driving force of the driving means is generated, the driving force is transmitted to the first moving member and the second moving member by the transmitting means, and the first moving member and the second moving member move. Is done. In this case, the transmission unit can simultaneously form a transmission state in which the driving force of the driving unit is transmitted to the second moving member and a blocking state in which transmission of the driving force from the driving unit to the first moving member is blocked. Therefore, the operation mode of stopping the first moving member while moving the second moving member can be achieved by one driving means.

  That is, when the first moving member and the second moving member are moved by one driving means, in the conventional product, the driving means has two driving states: a state in which the driving means generates a driving force and a state in which the generation of the driving force is stopped. Since the operation mode of the first moving member and the second moving member is switched by forming the first moving member and the second moving member, both the first moving member and the second moving member move together or only the operation mode in which both stop. Can be formed, and the first moving member could not be stopped while moving the second moving member. Therefore, in order to stop the first moving member while moving the second moving member, a driving means for moving the first moving member and a driving means for moving the second moving member are individually provided. There was a necessity (for example, refer to JP, 2011-139766, A).

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, as described above, the operation mode of stopping the first moving member while moving the second moving member can be achieved by one driving means, so the first moving member and the second moving member can be achieved. It is possible to reduce the product cost by reducing the number of driving means while making it possible to achieve the effect of the movement and stop of the members.

  In the gaming machine B1, the transmission means transmits a driving force generated by the driving means to the first moving member and a driving force generated by the driving means to the second moving member. A second transmission member, and the first transmission member includes a first driving means side member on which teeth to which the driving force is transmitted from the driving means are formed at least partially or entirely, and the first driving means. A first moving member-side member formed on at least a part or the entire circumference of a tooth that is formed on the side member so as to be capable of meshing with the driving force transmitted from the first driving means side member to the first moving member; , And at least one of the first driving means side member or the first moving member side member is not formed with the teeth, and cannot engage with the other of the first driving means side member or the first moving member side member. Characterized by having non-formed parts formed Game machine B2.

  According to the gaming machine B2, when the driving force of the driving means is generated, the driving force is transmitted to the first moving member by the first transmitting member and transmitted to the second moving member by the second transmitting member, The first moving member and the second moving member are respectively moved.

  In this case, the first transmission member is formed such that the first driving member side member and the first moving member side member can be engaged with each other. Therefore, when the first driving member side member is rotated by the driving force of the driving member, The first moving member side member meshed with the first driving means side member is rotated, and the driving force is transmitted to the first moving member through the rotation of the first moving member side member. Is moved. In addition, since one of the first driving means side member or the first moving member side member includes a non-forming portion in which teeth are not formed, the first driving means side member is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and the first driving means side member is rotated. When the non-forming portion is arranged at the meshing position of the first driving means side member and the first moving member side member, the first driving means side member and the first moving member side member are incapable of meshing, and the driving means Transmission of the driving force to the first moving member is blocked (a blocked state is formed). That is, the formation of the blocking state by the first transmission member can be performed independently of the transmission of the driving force to the second moving member by the second transmission member. Thereby, the operation | movement aspect which stops a 1st moving member, moving a 2nd moving member can be achieved by one drive means.

  Thus, according to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B1, the first transmission member is composed of the first driving means side member and the first moving member side member. Since at least one of the first moving member side member is configured not to form teeth and a non-forming portion is provided, the relative rotational position between the first driving means side member and the first moving member side member (of the non-forming portion) Depending on the rotation position), the blocking state and the transmission state can be switched. In other words, since the configuration for achieving the switching of the state does not require an actuator device and can be configured only from gears, the structure can be simplified and the product cost can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine B2, the second transmission member receives the second transmission member from the driving unit when the transmission state in which the driving force of the driving unit is transmitted to the first moving member is formed by the first transmission member. A gaming machine B3 that is capable of forming a blocking state that blocks transmission of driving force to the moving member.

  According to the gaming machine B3, the second transmission member moves from the driving unit to the second moving member when a transmission state for transmitting the driving force of the driving unit to the first moving member is formed by the first transmission member. Since it is possible to form a shut-off state in which the transmission of the driving force is cut off, an operation mode in which the second moving member is stopped while moving the first moving member can be achieved by one driving means. That is, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B2 (that is, the effect that the operation mode of stopping the first moving member while moving the second moving member can be achieved by one driving means), while moving the first moving member The operation mode for stopping the second moving member can be achieved by one driving means. Thereby, while reducing the number of drive means and reducing the product cost, the variation of the operation modes of the movement and stop of the first moving member and the second moving member can be increased, and the effect of the production can be enhanced. it can.

  In the gaming machine B3, the second transmission member includes a groove-shaped groove portion and a pin portion formed so as to be movable along the groove portion, and the groove portion and the pin portion extend from the driving means to the second moving member. The driving force transmission path is disposed, and the pin portion is moved along the groove portion so that a transmission state for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the second moving member can be formed. The gaming machine B4, wherein the pin portion is stopped with respect to the groove portion so that a blocking state in which transmission of driving force from the driving means to the second moving member is blocked can be formed.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B3, the pin portion is moved along the groove portion, so that a transmission state in which the driving force of the driving means is transmitted to the second moving member can be formed. On the other hand, since the pin portion is stopped with respect to the groove portion, it is possible to form a cut-off state that interrupts transmission of the driving force from the driving means to the second moving member. When the transmission state to be transmitted to the member is formed by the first transmission member (that is, the first moving member is moved), the transmission of the driving force from the driving means to the second moving member is blocked. When the driving force from the driving means to the first moving member is interrupted by the first transmission member (that is, the first moving member is stopped), the second moving member is stopped. Is transmitted to the second moving member to move the second moving member. Rukoto can.

  In the gaming machine B4, the second transmission member includes a second driving means side member in which a tooth to which driving force is transmitted from the driving means is formed at least partially or entirely, and the second driving means side member. Teeth that are formed so as to be able to mesh with each other and that transmit a driving force transmitted from the second driving means side member to the second moving member are formed on at least a part or the entire circumference, and the pin portion is disposed. 2 The moving member side member and the groove portion are disposed, and the pin portion moves along the groove portion as the second moving member side member rotates. A groove portion disposing member that moves in the separating direction and moves the second moving member, and the groove portion of the groove portion disposing member is curved in an arc shape that is convex toward the second moving member side member side. A gaming machine B5 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine B5, when the second driving means side member is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and the second moving member side member engaged with the second driving means side member is rotated, the second driving means side member is rotated. The pin member of the moving member side member is moved along the groove portion of the groove portion disposing member. As a result, the groove portion arranging member is moved in a direction approaching or separating from the second moving member side member, and the second moving member is moved along with the movement of the groove portion arranging member. In this case, since the groove portion of the groove portion arranging member is curved in an arc shape convex toward the second moving member side member, the movement amount of the groove portion arranging member accompanying the rotation of the second moving member side member is increased. Accordingly, the maximum movement amount of the second moving member can be increased accordingly.

  In the gaming machine B4, the second transmission member includes a second driving means side member in which a tooth to which driving force is transmitted from the driving means is formed at least partially or entirely, and the second driving means side member. Teeth that are formed so as to be able to engage with each other and that transmit a driving force transmitted from the second driving means side member to the second moving member are formed at least partially or entirely, and the second groove is disposed. A moving member side member and the pin portion are disposed, and the pin portion moves along the groove portion as the second moving member side member rotates, so that the second moving member side member approaches or A pin portion disposing member that is moved in a separating direction and moves the second moving member, and the groove portion of the second moving member side member is curved in an arc shape that protrudes toward the pin portion disposing member. A gaming machine B6 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine B6, when the second driving means side member is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and the second moving member side member meshed with the second driving means side member is rotated, the second driving means side member is rotated. The pin portion of the pin portion disposing member is moved along the groove portion of the moving member side member. Thereby, the pin portion arrangement member is moved in a direction approaching or separating from the second moving member side member, and the second moving member is moved along with the movement of the pin portion arrangement member. In this case, since the groove portion of the second moving member side member is curved in an arc shape convex toward the pin portion arranging member, the amount of movement of the pin portion arranging member accompanying the rotation of the second moving member side member And the maximum amount of movement of the second moving member can be increased accordingly.

  In any one of the gaming machines B4 to B6, the first moving member is movably supported and is interposed between the groove portion arranging member or the pin portion arranging member and the second moving member, A second transmission member configured to transmit the movement of the groove portion arrangement member or the pin portion arrangement member to the second movement member and move the second movement member; A gaming machine B7 that is connected to a member.

  According to the gaming machine B7, when the groove portion disposing member or the pin portion disposing member is moved in the direction approaching or separating from the second moving member side member, the movement of the groove disposing member or the pin portion disposing member is the first. 2 is transmitted to the second moving member via the transmitting member, and the second moving member is moved. In this case, in order to enable the second moving member to move in a stable posture, the second transmission member is preferably connected to a plurality of locations (for example, two locations) of the second moving member. However, in the configuration in which the second transmission member is disposed at each of the connection points to the second moving member, the number of members for movably supporting the second transmission member on the first moving member is increased (the above-described example). Then, two members for supporting the second transmission member on the first moving member are required).

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B7, since a plurality of locations of the second transmission member are connected to the second moving member, the number of second transmission members can be reduced while securing the number of connection locations. (For example, when securing two connection locations, according to the gaming machine B7, two second transmission members are not required and the number of second transmission members can be reduced to one). 2 The number of members for supporting the transmission member to be movable by the first moving member can be suppressed. Thereby, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B4 to B6, the weight of the first moving member as a whole can be suppressed and reduced in weight, so that the driving means can be used to move the first moving member accordingly. The required maximum output can be reduced, and the drive means can be reduced in size. In particular, the weight reduction of the moving member contributes to the downsizing of the driving means by reducing the influence of the inertial force when starting the movement of the first moving member in the stopped state.

  In the gaming machine B7, the first moving member is rotated about the rotation axis of the first moving member side member, and the second transmission member is movable with respect to the first moving member. The gaming machine B8 is characterized in that the position to be supported is closer to the rotating shaft side of the first moving member side member than the longitudinal center of the first moving member.

  According to the gaming machine B8, the second moving member is movably supported by the first moving member, and is connected to the first moving member and the second moving member via the second transmitting member. When the is moved, the second moving member is moved together with the first moving member. That is, the load of the driving means required for moving the first moving member is the total weight of both the first moving member and the second moving member. In this case, according to the gaming machine B8, the position at which the second transmission member is movably supported with respect to the first moving member is the rotational axis of the first moving member side member relative to the longitudinal center of the first moving member. Therefore, the second moving member can be brought closer to the rotating shaft side of the first moving member. Thereby, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B7, the position of the center of gravity in the structure in which both the first moving member and the second moving member are integrated can be brought closer to the rotating shaft side of the first moving member. When starting the movement of the first moving member in the stopped state, the influence of the inertial force can be reduced. As a result, the maximum output required for the drive means can be reduced, and the drive means can be miniaturized.

  In any one of the gaming machines B4 to B6, the second transmission member includes a second driving means side member in which a tooth to which a driving force is transmitted from the driving means is formed at least partially or entirely, and a second thereof. Teeth that are formed so as to be able to mesh with the driving means side member and that transmit the driving force transmitted from the second driving means side member to the second moving member are formed at least partially or around the circumference, and the groove or pin A second moving member side member on which one of the parts is disposed, wherein the second driving means side member is disposed coaxially with the first driving means side member of the first transmission member, and 2. A gaming machine B7, wherein the two moving member side members are arranged coaxially with the first moving member side member of the first transmission member.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines B4 to B6, the second driving member side member and the second moving member side member of the second transmission member are the first driving member side of the first transmission member. Since the member and the first moving member side member are arranged coaxially, the backlash between the second driving means side member and the second moving member side member of the second transmission member, and the first of the first transmission member The backlash between the driving means side member and the first moving member side member can be generated in the same direction, thereby suppressing the production timing between the first moving member and the second moving member from shifting. it can.

  In the gaming machine B6, the second driving means side member of the second transmission member may be fixed to the first driving means side member of the first transmission member. According to this, since the second drive means side member of the second transmission member is fixed to the first drive means side member of the first transmission member, to both the first drive means side member and the second drive means side member. There is no need for a member for transmitting the driving force of the driving means, but a member for transmitting to either the first driving means side member or the second driving means side member is sufficient. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced, or the parts can be miniaturized to reduce the product cost.

  Here, the phrase “fixed to the first drive means side member to the first drive means side member” means that it is sufficient if the rotations of the first drive means side member and the second drive means side member are synchronized. Therefore, the first drive means side member and the second drive means side member may be formed as separate bodies and fixed to each other, or may be formed integrally. When they are formed separately, for example, as a method of fixing them, for example, bonding with an adhesive, welding with ultrasonic waves, fastening with screws, and a method of fitting a protrusion provided on one side into a recess or hole provided on the other side A method combining these is exemplified.

  A game comprising a movable member formed so as to be movable, a driving means for generating a driving force for moving the moving member, and a transmission means for transmitting the driving force generated by the driving means to the moving member. In the machine, the transmission means is a drive means side member in which a tooth to which a driving force is transmitted from the drive means is formed at least partially or all around, and the drive means side member is formed so as to be engageable with the drive means side member. A moving member side member formed with teeth that transmit a driving force transmitted from the means side member to the moving member at least partially or around the entire circumference, and the driving means side member and the moving member side member are When the non-forming portions are formed so that the teeth are not formed and cannot be engaged with each other, and the non-forming portions are arranged at the engaging positions of the driving means side member and the moving member side member, the moving member side Non-forming parts Gaming machine C1 but which is characterized in being capable of abutting to form a non-formation portion of the driving means side member.

  According to the gaming machine C1, when the driving means side member is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, the moving member side member engaged with the driving means side member is rotated, and with the rotation of the moving member side member. The moving member is moved. When the driving means side member is further rotated by the driving force of the driving means and the non-forming portions are arranged at the meshing positions of the driving means side member and the moving member side member, the driving means side member and the moving member side member Is considered impossible to mesh. As a result, transmission of the driving force from the driving means to the moving member is blocked (a blocking state is formed), and the moving member is stopped. That is, the moving member is arranged at the end of the moving range. In this case, since the non-forming portion of the moving member side member is formed so as to be able to contact the non-forming portion of the driving means side member, the non-forming portion of the moving member side member contacts the non forming portion of the driving means side member. The rotation of the moving member side member in the direction of contact can be restricted. That is, the movement of the moving member can be restricted.

  In this case, the moving member is conventionally stopped as follows. That is, when a sensor device for detecting the rotational position of the driving means side member or the moving member side member is provided, and when the rotation of the driving means side member or the moving member side member to a predetermined rotational position is detected by the sensor device, It is determined that the moving member has reached the end of the moving range, and the driving of the driving means is stopped. Alternatively, when the drive amount of the drive means (for example, the number of steps when the drive means is constituted by a step motor) is detected (counted) and the drive amount reaches a predetermined amount, the moving member is at the end of the movement range. The driving of the driving means is stopped (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-120640). In this case, for example, due to a rotation position or a drive amount detection failure due to the influence of electrical noise, the drive means may not be stopped even though the moving member has reached the end of the moving range. obtain. Therefore, the conventional gaming machine has a structure in which a stopper is provided at the end of the moving range of the moving member, and the movement of the moving member is restricted by the stopper when the driving means is not properly stopped. However, in the structure in which the movement of the moving member is regulated by the stopper in this way, when the moving member collides with the stopper, not only the moving member and the stopper may be damaged, but also the driving means has an excessive load. There is a possibility that the driving means may be damaged due to the action.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, as described above, when the moving member reaches the end of its moving range, the driving means side member and the moving member side member are incapable of engaging with each other. Since the transmission of the driving force to the moving member is interrupted, the moving member can be stopped even when the driving force of the driving means continues to be generated. Therefore, damage due to the collision between the moving member and other members can be avoided. Also, even if the moving member collides with another member, the moving member is disconnected from the driving means, and the driving means is idle, so that an excessive load acts on the driving means. Can be avoided.

In addition, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine includes a movable member formed to be movable, and a driving unit that applies a driving force to the moving member, and the moving member is moved within a predetermined movement range by the driving force of the driving unit. There is a gaming machine (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-120640).
In this case, for example, when the end of the moving range of the moving member is the ascending position and gravity is applied to the moving member disposed at the end of the moving range, the moving member is moved (lowered) by the action of gravity. It is necessary not to do. However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the movement (downward movement) of the moving member is regulated by causing the driving force of the driving means to oppose gravity (the weight of the moving member) (that is, the moving member is at the end of the moving range). The energy consumption necessary for holding the moving member is increased.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, as described above, when the moving member is disposed at the end of the moving range, the non-forming portion of the moving member-side member is brought into contact with the non-forming portion of the driving means side member. Thereby, rotation (movement of a movement member) of a movement member side member can be controlled. That is, in the gaming machine C1, when the moving member is arranged at the end of the moving range, the moving member and the driving means are separated from each other, so that the moving member cannot be held at the end using the driving force of the driving means. The moving member can be mechanically held at the end of the moving range by utilizing the contact of the non-forming portion. As a result, energy consumption necessary for holding the moving member can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine C1, the non-forming portion of the driving means side member and the non-forming portion of the moving member side member are arranged at the meshing positions of the driving means side member and the moving member side member, and are in contact with each other In this case, the gaming machine C2 is formed in a shape capable of restricting the rotation of the moving member side member in both directions.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1, the non-forming portion of the driving means side member and the non-forming portion of the moving member side member are arranged at the meshing positions of the driving means side member and the moving member side member. In the case where they are brought into contact with each other (that is, when the moving means is disposed at the end of the moving range), the moving member side member is formed in a shape capable of restricting the rotation in both directions. The moving member when reaching the end of the moving range compared to the case where the side member is formed in a shape that can regulate the rotation only in one direction (for example, only the direction in which the moving member is moved by the action of gravity). The movement member can be quickly positioned at the end of the movement range, and the movement member can be stably held at the end of the movement range. The game board The external force) generated in the Ku or shake it possible to suppress the vibration and displacement.

  In the gaming machine C2, the non-forming portion of the driving means side member is formed to be curved in an arc shape around the rotation axis of the driving means side member, and the non-forming portion of the moving member side member is the driving When arranged at the meshing position of the means side member and the moving member side member, the arc is centered on the rotation axis of the driving means side member and has the same diameter as the arc of the non-forming portion of the driving means side member Alternatively, the gaming machine C3 is formed to be curved in a slightly larger diameter arc shape.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C2, the non-formation portion of the driving means side member is formed to be curved in an arc shape around the rotation axis of the driving means side member, and the moving member side The non-forming portion of the member has an arc shape centered on the rotation axis of the driving means side member when the driving means side member and the moving member side member are arranged at the meshing positions, and the driving means side member is not formed. Since it is formed to be curved in the shape of an arc having the same or slightly larger diameter as the arc of the part, the non-formed part of the moving member side member can be smoothly brought into contact with the non-formed part of the driving means side member, Both can be easily brought into contact with each other by surface contact. Thereby, the non-formed parts are brought into contact smoothly with each other, the impact when the moving member reaches the end of the moving range and stopped can be moderated, and the contact pressure between the non-formed parts is reduced, The durability of the driving means side member and the moving member side member can be improved.

  Further, since the non-forming portion of the driving means side member and the non-forming portion of the moving member side member are curved in a concentric arc shape, the moving member side member is not affected by the rotational position (phase) of the driving means side member. The non-forming part can be brought into contact with the non-forming part of the driving means side member, and the rotation of the moving member side member in both directions can be restricted. That is, even if the drive side gear is further rotated after the moving member reaches the end of the moving range, the rotation of the moving member side member can be restricted in both directions, and as a result, the moving member is held at the end of the moving range. can do.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the moving member side member includes a plurality of fastened portions, and the moving member is fastened and fixed to the moving member side gear via the plurality of fastened portions. A gaming machine C4 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine C4, since the moving member is fastened and fixed to the moving member side member via the plurality of fastened portions, a single structure is formed by the moving member side member and the moving member connected at the plurality of locations. it can. That is, the rigidity of the moving member side member can be increased using the rigidity of the moving member. That is, since the moving member side member receives a reaction force from the driving means side member when the non-forming portion is brought into contact with the non-forming portion of the driving means side member, the moving member side member secures rigidity to resist the reaction force. On the other hand, for example, when the thickness is increased, the weight is increased, and when a highly rigid material is used, the material cost is increased. According to the gaming machine C4, the rigidity of the moving member is used (that is, the movement is performed). In order to increase the rigidity of the moving member side member, it is not necessary to increase the thickness of the moving member side member or adopt a highly rigid material. Accordingly, it is possible to improve the durability of the moving member side member while reducing the weight and cost of the moving member side member.

  In the gaming machine C4, the moving member side member is disposed at a position where the fastened portion faces the driving means side member across a non-forming portion of the moving member side member. C5.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in the gaming machine C4, the moving member side member moves because the fastened portion is disposed at a position facing the driving means side member across the non-forming portion of the moving member side member. When the non-forming portion of the member side member is brought into contact with the non-forming portion of the driving means side member, the rigidity of the portion that receives the reaction force from the driving means side member can be effectively increased. As a result, it is possible to further achieve both reduction in weight and cost of the moving member side member and improvement in durability of the moving member side member.

  More preferably, the fastened portion of the moving member gear is disposed at a position facing the rotation shaft of the driving means side member with the non-forming portion of the moving member side member interposed therebetween. The reaction force received by the moving member-side member when the non-forming portion of the moving member-side member is brought into contact with the non-forming portion of the driving means-side member is the rotation force of the driving means-side member and the non-forming portion of the moving member-side member. Since the portion to be fastened is disposed at a position facing the rotation axis of the driving means side member, the effect of increasing the rigidity of the portion that receives the reaction force from the driving means side member is achieved. This is because it can be further demonstrated.

  A gaming machine comprising: a moving member formed to be rotatable about a first axis between a first position and a second position; and a driving means for generating a driving force for rotating the moving member. A rotating member that is rotated about the second axis by a driving force transmitted from the driving means; and a pin member that is disposed on the rotating member and is eccentrically positioned with respect to the second axis. The member includes a groove-shaped guide groove portion that guides the pin member along the inner wall surface, and the guide groove portion is recessed in the inner wall surface of the guide groove portion and formed to receive the pin member. And at least in the first position, the moving member is mechanically held in the first position by the pin member being received in the recess.

  According to the gaming machine D1, when the driving force of the driving means is generated, the rotating member is rotated around the second axis by the driving force transmitted from the driving means, and the pin member disposed on the rotating member Is guided along the guide groove of the moving member. Since the pin member is located eccentrically from the second axis of the rotating member, the moving member moves between the first position and the second position as the pin member is guided along the inner wall surface of the guide groove. It is rotated around one axis.

  Here, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine includes a first shaft, a moving member that rotates about the first shaft, and a driving unit that applies a driving force to the moving member, and the driving force of the driving unit. There is a gaming machine in which the moving member is rotated between the first position and the second position about the first axis as a center of rotation (see, for example, JP 2011-120640 A). In this case, for example, when the first position is the ascending position, it is necessary to prevent the moving member disposed at the first position from moving (lowering) due to the action of gravity. However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the movement (lowering) of the moving member is restricted (that is, the moving member is held in the first position) by causing the driving force of the driving means to oppose gravity (the weight of the moving member). Therefore, the energy consumption required for holding the moving member is increased.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, at least in the first position, the moving member is mechanically held in the first position by receiving the pin member in the concave portion formed in the inner wall surface of the guide groove portion. . That is, even if the driving force of the driving means is released, the moving member can be mechanically held at the first position, and accordingly, the energy consumption of the driving means can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, since the pin member is received in the recess provided in the inner wall surface of the guide groove and the moving member is mechanically held at the first position, the moving member is moved to the first position only by the inner wall surface of the guide groove. Therefore, the degree of freedom of arrangement of the guide groove portion and the rotating member can be increased as compared with the structure to be held in a mechanical manner.

  In addition, the recessed part does not need to be bottomed and may penetrate. That is, it is only necessary to have inner wall surfaces that communicate with the guide groove and face each other. The same applies to the concepts of various inventions described below.

  In the gaming machine D1, at least at the first position, the inner wall surface of the recess is substantially parallel to the direction connecting the first shaft and the pin member, and the direction connecting the second shaft and the pin member. A gaming machine D2 characterized by being substantially orthogonal to.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D1, at least in the first position, the inner wall surface of the recess is arranged in a direction substantially parallel to the direction connecting the first shaft and the pin member, And since it is arranged in a direction substantially orthogonal to the direction connecting the second axis and the pin member, even when the driving force of the driving means is released, the rotation about the first axis of the moving member Since the inner wall surface of the recess presses the pin member in a direction parallel to the direction connecting the second shaft and the pin member, depending on the pressing of the pin member accompanying the rotation of the moving member, A rotation around the second axis cannot be formed. Thereby, holding | maintenance in the 1st position of a moving member can be performed more firmly. Therefore, for example, even when the moving member is shaken by the player hitting or shaking the gaming machine, the moving member can be reliably held at the first position and moved downward in the direction of gravity ( Can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine D1 or D2, the inner wall surface of the recess is formed to be curved in an arc shape around the second axis of the rotating member in a state where the moving member is disposed at the first position. A gaming machine D3.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D1 or D2, the inner wall surface of the recess is curved in an arc shape around the second axis of the rotating member in a state where the moving member is disposed at the first position. Therefore, after the moving member is arranged at the first position, the pin member can be received in the concave portion while suppressing the posture of the moving member from fluctuating.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the recess is an inner wall surface facing the guide groove, and the pin member slides when the moving member is moved from the second position to the first position. A gaming machine D4, wherein the gaming machine D4 is recessed in the inner wall surface.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the recess is an inner wall surface facing the guide groove, and the moving member is moved from the second position to the first position. Since the pin member is recessed in the inner wall surface on the sliding side, the moving member is moved from the second position to the first position without switching the driving direction of the driving means (the rotating direction of the rotating member), and The pin member can be received in the recess and the moving member can be held in the first position.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the concave portion is an inner wall surface facing the guide groove portion, and is recessed in an inner wall surface closer to the first shaft.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the recess is an inner wall surface facing the guide groove, and is recessed on the inner wall surface closer to the first axis. The concave portion can be disposed in a region that becomes a dead space between the guide groove portion and the first shaft, and the size can be reduced accordingly. Furthermore, since the concave portion is arranged on the first shaft side in this way, the distance between the first shaft and the pin member in a state where the moving member is disposed at the first position can be further shortened. With the rotation about the first axis, the force with which the inner wall surface of the recess presses the pin member can be reduced. Thereby, holding | maintenance in the 1st position of a moving member can be performed more firmly.

  A movable member formed so as to be slidable; a driving unit that generates a driving force for sliding the moving member; and a transmission unit that transmits the driving force generated by the driving unit to the moving member. The gaming machine further comprises a base member having a slide hole formed as an opening extending along the direction of slide movement of the moving member, and the moving member is inserted into the slide hole of the base member. The transmission means is disposed on the other surface side of the base member opposite to the one surface side of the base member on which the moving member is disposed, and moves the driving force of the driving means. A first member that transmits to the member, and the first member is a small one of the plurality of protrusions of the moving member that protrudes to the other surface side of the base member through the slide hole of the base member; Gaming machine E1, characterized in that also connected to the projecting portion of the 1.

  According to the gaming machine E1, when the driving force of the driving means is generated, the first member of the transmission means is displaced by the driving force transmitted from the driving means, and the displacement of the first member is the protrusion of the moving member. Is transmitted to. Thereby, the moving member is slid by the protrusion of the moving member being moved along the slide hole.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a moving member formed to be slidable, a driving unit that generates a driving force for sliding the moving member, and a driving force generated by the driving unit are moved. There is a gaming machine that includes a transmission unit that transmits to a member, and transmits the driving force of the driving unit to the moving member by the transmitting unit to slide the moving member (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-229885). . In this case, in order to stably perform the sliding movement of the moving member, it is preferable to increase the number of protrusions inserted through the slide holes. On the other hand, when the number of protrusions is increased, the number of parts for holding the protrusions (preventing removal from the slide holes) also increases, and the cost increases. Therefore, there has been a demand for a method for reducing the cost while stabilizing the sliding movement of the moving member.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, the transmission means includes a first member that transmits the driving force of the driving means to the moving member, and the first member is one surface side of the base member on which the moving member is disposed. At least one of the plurality of protrusions of the moving member that is disposed on the other surface side of the base member opposite to the base member and protrudes to the other surface side of the base member through the slide hole of the base member. Since it is connected, at least one part of the parts for holding the protruding portion can be used as the first member. As a result, it is possible to secure the number of protrusions and enable stable sliding movement of the moving member, while reducing the number of parts for holding the protrusions, thereby reducing the cost.

  In the gaming machine E1, the transmission means includes a connection member that is connected to the first member and transmits a driving force transmitted from the driving means to the first member, and the base member is a connection formed as an opening. A drive member and a connection member of the transmission means are disposed on one surface side of the base member, and the connection member is connected to the first member via the connection hole of the base member. A gaming machine E2 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E1, the transmission means includes a connection member that is connected to the first member and transmits the driving force transmitted from the driving means to the first member, and is formed as an opening. The connecting member is connected to the first member via the connecting hole of the base member, and the driving member and the connecting member of the transmitting means are disposed on one surface side of the base member together with the moving member. can do. As a result, the constituent members can be concentrated on one surface side of the base member (that is, the arrangement of the constituent members on the other surface side of the base member can be suppressed). As a result, the space can be used efficiently, The overall size can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine E2, the first member of the transmission means is rotatably supported by the base member on the other surface side of the base member.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E2, the driving force of the driving means can be stably transmitted to the moving member. That is, the transmission means includes a connection member disposed on one surface side of the base member and a first member disposed on the other surface side of the base member, and the connection member and the first member are connected via the connection hole of the base member. Therefore, the transmission path of the driving force formed by these connecting members and the first member becomes long. For this reason, when the driving force of the driving means is transmitted, the connecting member and the first member may be deformed and cannot be stably transmitted to the moving member. On the other hand, since the first member is rotatably supported by the base member on the other surface side of the base member, the rigidity of the connecting member and the first member as a whole can be increased by utilizing the rigidity of the base member. As a result, the driving force of the driving means can be stably transmitted to the moving member via the connecting member and the first member.

  In particular, in the gaming machine E3, the first member of the connection member and the first member is pivotally supported on the base member, so that it is required compared to the case where the connection member is pivotally supported on the base member. The distance from the shaft support location to the base member to the protruding portion of the moving member can be shortened, and as a result, stabilization of the transmission of the driving force of the drive means to the moving member can be achieved with fewer shaft support locations.

  In the gaming machine E1, the first member is connected to at least one projecting portion of the plurality of projecting portions of the moving member projecting to the other surface side of the base member via a slide hole of the base member. And a rack member formed as a rack having teeth engraved on one side along the sliding movement direction of the moving member, and a pinion engaged with the rack member, and transmitted from the driving means A gaming machine E4, comprising: a pinion member that transmits a driving force to the rack member.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine E1, the first member is formed as a rack and pinion (rack member and pinion member), and the teeth of the rack member are cut along the direction of sliding movement of the moving member. Therefore, the driving force of the driving means can be transmitted to the moving member as a driving force in the linear direction through the first member, and as a result, the sliding movement of the moving member can be stabilized. Can be planned.

  In the gaming machine E4, the rack member is connected to at least two or more of the plurality of projecting portions of the moving member that project to the other surface side of the base member through the slide hole of the base member. A gaming machine E5 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E4, the rack member is formed of the plurality of protrusions of the moving member that protrudes to the other surface side of the base member through the slide hole of the base member. Since it is connected to at least two or more protrusions, at least two or more of the parts for holding the protrusions can be used as the rack member. As a result, it is possible to secure the number of protrusions and enable stable sliding movement of the moving member, while reducing the number of parts for holding the protrusions, thereby reducing the cost.

  In this way, connecting two or more protrusions of the plurality of protrusions of the moving member that slides to the first member means that the driving force of the driving means is applied to the moving member by swinging (turning). In the first member configured to transmit, the movement trajectory of the connecting portion with the projecting portion becomes an arc shape, which is impossible.By forming the first member as a rack and pinion like the gaming machine E7, This is possible for the first time (the movement trajectory of the rack member can be used as a straight line and can be adapted to the sliding movement of the moving member), thereby ensuring the number of protrusions and stable sliding movement of the moving member. The number of parts for holding the protruding portion can be reduced and the cost can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine E4 or E5, the base member includes a plurality of rows of slide holes extending along the direction of slide movement of the moving member, and the rack member of the first member is provided in each row of the slide holes. Each gaming machine E6 is connected to at least one protrusion.

  According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E4 or E5, the base member includes a plurality of rows of slide holes extending along the direction of sliding movement of the moving member. Thus, it is possible to guide each of the plurality of protrusions of the moving member, and accordingly the sliding movement of the moving member can be performed stably. In this case, since the rack member of the first member is connected to at least one protrusion in each row of the slide holes, it is possible to suppress the inclination of the moving member when the moving member slides. it can. In addition, it is possible to reduce the number of parts for holding the protrusions and reduce costs while securing the number of protrusions and enabling stable sliding movement of the moving member.

  In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E6, the base member is formed in a plate shape and disposed in a posture in which the extending direction of the slide hole is perpendicular to the moving member along the slide hole of the base member Is slid in the vertical direction.

  According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines E1 to E6, the base member is formed in a plate shape and arranged in a posture in which the extending direction of the slide hole is perpendicular to the base member. Since the moving member is slid in the vertical direction along the slide hole, the configuration in which the first member is disposed on the other surface side of the base member is effective, and the moving member can be stably slid. That is, when the base member is arranged in a posture in which the extending direction of the slide hole is a vertical direction, the moving member is inclined forward in a direction away from one surface side of the base member due to the action of gravity. Since the base member is interposed between the first member connected to the moving member and the moving member, the forward tilting posture of the moving member is determined not only by the parts for holding the protruding portion but also by the first member. As a result, the moving member can be slid in a stable state.

  In the gaming machine E7, the first member is connected to a projecting portion located at least above the center of the moving member.

  According to the gaming machine E8, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine E7, the first member is connected to the protruding portion located above the center of at least the moving member. The first member can effectively regulate the forward tilting posture of the moving member with respect to the moving member that is tilted forward toward the direction away from the first member, and as a result, the moving member slides in a more stable state. Can be made.

  A game comprising a movable member formed so as to be movable, a driving means for generating a driving force for moving the moving member, and a transmission means for transmitting the driving force generated by the driving means to the moving member. In the machine, the transmission means includes a pinion to which a driving force is transmitted from the driving means, and a tooth surface meshed with the pinion arranged substantially parallel to a horizontal plane, and is displaced in the horizontal direction as the pinion rotates. And a link member having one end connected to the rack and the other end connected to the moving member and rising or tilting as the rack moves in the horizontal direction. The moving member is arranged at the raised position, and the moving member is arranged at the lowered position by the tilt of the link member. At the raised position of the moving member, one end of the link member and Gaming machine F1, characterized in that the direction connecting the end is close to the plane perpendicular to the respective direction of movement of the tooth surface and the rack of the rack.

  According to the gaming machine F1, when the pinion is rotated by the driving force of the driving means and the rack is displaced to one side in the horizontal direction by the rotation of the pinion, the link member is moved along with the displacement of the rack to one side in the horizontal direction. As the link member is tilted and the link member is tilted, the moving member moves downward (lowers) toward the lower position. On the other hand, if the rack is displaced to the other side in the horizontal direction by the rotation of the pinion, The link member is erected along with the displacement to the side, and the moving member is moved upward (raised) toward the raised position as the link member is erected.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a movable member formed to be movable, a driving unit that generates a driving force applied to the moving member, and a transmission unit that transmits the driving force of the driving unit to the moving member There is a gaming machine in which the transmission means is formed by including a rack and pinion in a part of the transmission path of the driving force (see, for example, JP 2012-065923 A). In this case, when the moving member is arranged at the raised position, it is necessary to prevent the moving member from moving (lowering) due to the action of gravity. However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the movement (lowering) of the moving member is restricted (that is, the moving member is held in the raised position) by making the driving force of the driving means oppose gravity (the weight of the moving member). ) Because of the structure, the energy consumption required for holding the moving member was increased.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, in the ascending position of the moving member, the direction connecting the one end and the other end of the link member is close to the plane orthogonal to the rack tooth surface and the rack moving direction. As a force component acting on the rack from the link member, generation of a force component in the direction of moving the rack in the horizontal direction can be suppressed. Thereby, even if the driving force of the driving means is released, the moving member can be held in the raised position, and as a result, the energy consumption required for holding the moving member can be suppressed.

  In addition, being close to a plane (hereinafter referred to as “reference plane”) orthogonal to each of the tooth surface of the rack and the moving direction of the rack means between the reference plane and a direction connecting one end and the other end of the link member. It means that the angle is set to at least 30 degrees or less (preferably 15 degrees or less). Therefore, an aspect in which the direction connecting the one end and the other end of the link member is located within the reference plane is also included in the example of the gaming machine F1.

  In the gaming machine F1, the pinion and the rack of the transmission means each include a base member that is rotatably and movable, and the transmission means includes at least a pair of the rack and the link member, and the link member includes the link member. The base members are disposed to face each other along the moving direction of the rack, and the base member is interposed between the opposed surfaces of the pair of link members when the moving member is disposed at the raised position, and the pair of links. A gaming machine F2 including an interposed portion formed so as to be able to contact the opposing surface of the member.

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F1, when the moving member is disposed at the raised position, the gaming machine F2 is interposed between the opposed surfaces of the pair of link members and is disposed on the opposed surfaces of the pair of link members. Since the base member includes the interposed portion formed so as to be able to contact, the posture of the moving member can be stabilized at the raised position. In other words, in the raised position, the pair of link members are erected, so that it is difficult to maintain the posture, and the posture of the moving member is likely to be unstable. There is an interposed portion between the opposing surfaces of the pair of link members. By doing so, it is possible to regulate the displacement of the pair of link members in the facing direction (that is, the movement direction of the rack) by the interposed portion. Thereby, a pair of link member can be maintained in an upright state, and the attitude | position of a moving member can be stabilized in a raise position.

  In the gaming machine F1 or F2, a pinion and a rack of the transmission means each include a base member disposed rotatably and movable, and the transmission means includes at least a pair of the rack and the link member, and the link member. Are arranged opposite to each other along the direction of movement of the rack, and the base member includes a pair of opposing wall portions that extend along the direction of movement of the rack and are opposed to each other at a predetermined interval. The game machine F3 is characterized in that one end side of the pair of link members is interposed between the opposing surfaces of the pair of opposing wall portions.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F1 or F2, the base member includes a pair of opposing wall portions that extend along the moving direction of the rack and are opposed to each other at a predetermined interval. Therefore, the moving member can be moved in a stable posture. That is, a moving member is connected to the other end of the link member, and the position of the center of gravity is likely to fluctuate due to the input of disturbance, and it is difficult to maintain its posture (stable movement). Since the racks are arranged so as to face each other in the direction of movement of the rack, the pair of link members arranged opposite to each other in the direction of movement of the rack can cancel each other's displacement. Can be maintained. On the other hand, since one end of each of the pair of link members is interposed between the opposing surfaces of the pair of opposing wall portions, the direction orthogonal to the moving direction of the rack of the pair of link members by the pair of opposing wall portions. The displacement to can be regulated. Thereby, the attitude | position of a pair of link member can be maintained, and a moving member can be moved with the stable attitude | position.

  In the gaming machine F3, the standing height of at least one of the pair of opposing wall portions of the base member is increased as the moving member approaches the raised position.

  According to the gaming machine F4, as the moving member approaches the raised position (that is, as the link member is erected), the standing height of the opposing wall portion is increased (that is, one end of the link member with respect to the opposing wall portion). Therefore, it is possible to stabilize the movement of the moving member while improving the appearance. That is, it is possible to suppress the appearance from being damaged by the facing wall portion by raising the height of the opposed wall portion rather than the entire standing height, and to raise the link member (that is, As the moving member becomes more difficult to move in a stable posture), the effect of maintaining the posture of the link member by the opposing wall portion can be enhanced. As a result, the moving member can be moved in a stable posture while suppressing the appearance from being damaged.

  In this case, at least one of the pair of opposing wall portions of the base member, the portion where the standing height is increased is a state where the moving member is disposed at the lowered position (that is, the link member is laid down). It is preferable that the height is set so that it can face the other end side (side connected to the moving member) of the link member. According to this configuration, the effect of maintaining the posture of the moving member arranged at the lowered position can be obtained at the same time by using the portion where the standing height is increased in order to stabilize the posture of the moving member during movement. Can do.

  In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F4, an extension member extending in a direction orthogonal to the tooth surface of the rack is provided, and the moving member is slidably connected to the extension member and the extension A guide portion guided along an extending direction of the member, wherein the moving member is offset in a direction parallel to a tooth surface of the rack and perpendicular to the moving direction of the rack, and the extending member is The gaming machine F5 is disposed between the link member and the moving member in a direction in which the moving member is offset.

  According to the gaming machine F5, in any of the gaming machines F1 to F4, the extending member that extends in the direction orthogonal to the tooth surface of the rack and guides the guide portion of the moving member along the extending direction is provided. Since the extending member is disposed between the link member and the center of gravity of the moving member in the direction in which the moving member is offset, the effect of offsetting the moving member (ie, necessary for holding the moving member) Smooth movement of the moving member can be ensured while exhibiting a sufficient suppression of energy consumption).

  In addition, when providing a pair of link members and providing an interposed part between these pairs of link members, it is preferable to arrange an extending member inside the interposed part. The extension member is arranged in the central part where the pair of link members face each other, and while improving the guiding effect of the movement of the moving member, the inside of the interposed portion that becomes a dead space is effectively utilized, and the overall size can be reduced. Because you can.

  In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F5, the moving member is offset in a direction parallel to the tooth surface of the rack and perpendicular to the moving direction of the rack.

  According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines F1 to F5, the moving member is offset in a direction parallel to the tooth surface of the rack and perpendicular to the moving direction of the rack. When the moving member is arranged at the raised position, the rack can be acted on via the link member even if the weight of the moving member is directed in the offset direction of the moving member. That is, a force component in the offset direction of the moving member can be generated as a force component applied to the rack from the link member. Accordingly, since the force component in the direction in which the weight of the moving member moves the rack in the horizontal direction can be reduced accordingly, the energy consumption of the driving means necessary to hold the moving member in the raised position can be suppressed. .

  When the moving member is offset in a direction parallel to the tooth surface of the rack and perpendicular to the moving direction of the rack, the position of the center of gravity is likely to change due to the input of the disturbance. The configuration of the gaming machine F3 is particularly effective.

  In the gaming machine F6, the amount of the offset of the moving member can be changed as the rack moves in the horizontal direction, and the amount of the offset of the moving member at the raised position is at least the movement at the lowered position. A gaming machine F7 that is made larger than the amount of offset of the member.

  Here, when the moving member is offset in a direction parallel to the tooth surface of the rack and perpendicular to the moving direction of the rack, the force component in the offset direction is obtained in the state where the moving member is disposed at the raised position. The rack can be prevented from moving in the horizontal direction due to the weight of the moving member. Therefore, the energy consumption of the drive means necessary for holding the moving member in the raised position can be suppressed accordingly. On the other hand, when the moving member is moved between the lowered position and the raised position, the force component in the offset direction becomes resistance, and accordingly, the energy consumption of the driving means necessary for moving the moving member increases. .

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F6, the amount of offset of the moving member can be changed as the rack moves in the horizontal direction, and the amount of offset of the moving member at the raised position is reduced. Since it is larger than at least the amount of offset of the moving member at the lowered position, the force component in the offset direction is secured at the raised position, and the rack is prevented from moving horizontally due to the weight of the moving member. it can. On the other hand, when the moving member is moved between the lowered position and the raised position, the force component in the offset direction can be reduced to reduce the resistance. From the above, it is possible to suppress the energy consumption of the driving means necessary for holding the moving member in the raised position, and to suppress the energy consumption of the driving means required to move the moving member between the raised position and the lowered position. Both can be achieved.

  In the gaming machine F7, the gaming machine F7 includes a pair of opposing wall portions that extend along the moving direction of the rack and are opposed to each other at a predetermined interval, and one end of the link member is in the offset direction with respect to the rack The movable member is connected to the rack in a displaceable manner along the pair, and is interposed between the facing portions of the pair of facing wall portions, and the moving member is disposed at the raised position between the facing portions of the pair of facing wall portions. The portion where the one end of the link member is interposed in the offset direction from the rack is more than the portion where the one end of the link member is interposed at least when the moving member is disposed at the lowered position. The gaming machine F8 is characterized in that the amount of separation is increased.

  According to the gaming machine F8, one end of the link member is connected to the rack while being displaceable along the offset direction with respect to the rack, and is interposed between the opposing surfaces of the pair of opposing wall portions. When the link member is moved in the horizontal direction, one end of the link member is guided along the opposite side of the pair of opposing wall portions, so that the link member is moved up along the offset direction while standing or tilting. Can be made. As a result, as the link member stands or tilts, the moving member can also be moved along the offset direction, and the amount of offset of the moving member can be changed.

  In this case, when the moving member is disposed at the raised position (when the link member is erected), at least a portion where the one end of the link member is interposed is lowered between the pair of opposing wall portions. Since the amount of separation in the offset direction from the rack is larger than the portion where one end of the link member is interposed when the link member is disposed at the position (when the link member is tilted), the offset of the moving member at the raised position Can be larger than at least the amount of offset of the moving member in the lowered position. As a result, in the raised position, a force component in the offset direction can be secured, the energy consumption of the driving means necessary to hold the moving member in the raised position can be suppressed, and the movement between the lowered position and the raised position can be achieved. When the member is moved, the force component (that is, the resistance) in the offset direction can be reduced to suppress the energy consumption of the driving means necessary for moving the moving member between the raised position and the lowered position.

  In particular, in the gaming machine F8, since one end of the link member is connected to the rack in a state displaceable along the offset direction with respect to the rack, the one end of the link member is guided along the facing of the pair of opposing wall portions. In this case, the link member itself can be moved along the offset direction. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of resistance when the link member moves along the opposing portion of the pair of opposing wall portions, and as a result, the driving means necessary for moving the link member between the raised position and the lowered position. Energy consumption can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine F7, the gaming machine F7 includes a pair of opposing wall portions that extend along the moving direction of the rack and are opposed to each other at a predetermined interval, and one end of the link member is in the offset direction with respect to the rack Are connected to the rack in a state in which displacement is impossible, and the other end side of the portion connected to the rack is interposed between the opposing portions of the pair of opposing wall portions, Between the opposing portions, a portion where one end of the link member is interposed when the moving member is disposed at the raised position, and at least one end of the link member is disposed when the moving member is disposed at the lowered position. The gaming machine F9 is characterized in that the distance from the rack in the offset direction is larger than the portion to be played.

  According to the gaming machine F9, one end of the link member is connected to the rack in a state in which it cannot be displaced along the offset direction with respect to the rack, and the other end side of the portion connected to the rack is a pair of opposing wall portions. Therefore, when the rack is moved in the horizontal direction, one end of the link member is guided between the opposing surfaces of the pair of opposing wall portions, It is possible to stand or tilt while elastically deforming along the offset direction. As a result, as the link member stands or tilts, the moving member can be moved along the offset direction, and the amount of offset of the moving member can be changed.

  In this case, when the moving member is disposed at the raised position (when the link member is erected), at least a portion where the one end of the link member is interposed is lowered between the pair of opposing wall portions. Since the amount of separation in the offset direction from the rack is larger than the portion where one end of the link member is interposed when the link member is disposed at the position (when the link member is tilted), the offset of the moving member at the raised position Can be larger than at least the amount of offset of the moving member in the lowered position. As a result, in the raised position, a force component in the offset direction can be secured, the energy consumption of the driving means necessary to hold the moving member in the raised position can be suppressed, and the movement between the lowered position and the raised position can be achieved. When the member is moved, the force component (that is, the resistance) in the offset direction can be reduced to suppress the energy consumption of the driving means necessary for moving the moving member between the raised position and the lowered position.

  In particular, in the gaming machine F9, one end of the link member is connected to the rack in a state in which it cannot be displaced along the offset direction with respect to the rack, and the other end side of the portion connected to the rack is a pair of opposing wall portions. Since it is interposed between the opposed members, when the link member is erected (when placed at the raised position), a state is formed in which the elastically deformed link member is pressed against one of the pair of opposed wall portions. be able to. Thereby, in the state where the moving member is arranged at the raised position, in addition to the force component in the offset direction due to the offset of the moving member, the rack is caused by an increase in resistance caused by pressing the link member against the opposing wall portion. It can suppress moving to a horizontal direction with the weight of a moving member. Therefore, the energy consumption of the drive means necessary for holding the moving member in the raised position can be suppressed accordingly.

  A game comprising a movable member formed so as to be movable, a driving means for generating a driving force for moving the moving member, and a transmission means for transmitting the driving force generated by the driving means to the moving member. In the machine, the transmission member has teeth at least in part and a first transmission member to which the moving member is connected, and a second tooth having at least a part of teeth that can mesh with the teeth of the first transmission member. A transmission member and a connection member connected to the second transmission member and transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the second transmission member, the connection member being continuous with the teeth of the second transmission member. A gaming machine G1 in which teeth are formed.

  According to the gaming machine G1, when the driving force of the driving means is transmitted to the second transmission member via the connecting member, the second transmission member is rotated, and the rotation of the second transmission member is engaged with each other. Is transmitted to the first transmission member, and the first transmission member is rotated. As a result, the moving member connected to the first transmission member is moved along with the rotation of the first transmission member.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a movable member formed to be movable, a driving unit that generates a driving force for moving the moving member, and a driving force generated by the driving unit are applied to the moving member. A first transmission member connected to the moving member, and a second transmission member that engages with the first transmission member and transmits the driving force of the drive unit to the first transmission member via the engagement. There is a gaming machine in which a part of driving means is formed by a transmission member (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-110376). In this case, the second transmission member is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and the first transmission member engaged with the second transmission member is rotated, so that the moving member connected to the first transmission member is moved. It is moved with the rotation of the first transmission member. However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since the moving member is connected to the first transmission member, the moving member is moved by rotating the first transmission member and the second transmission member by the driving force of the driving means. When the moving member sways, the first transmission member is displaced along with the swaying of the moving member, and the engagement with the second transmission member may be lost. Even if it is possible to avoid the disengagement of the first transmission member and the second transmission member, the meshing area with the teeth of the second transmission member is equivalent to the displacement of the first transmission member due to the shaking of the moving member. When the surface pressure is reduced and concentrated on a part of the tooth surface, uneven wear of the tooth is caused, and the durability may be lowered.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G1, the connecting member is formed with teeth that are continuous with the teeth of the second transmission member, so even if the first transmission member is displaced due to the shaking of the moving member, The teeth of the first transmission member can be meshed with the teeth formed on the connecting member. Thereby, it can suppress that the mesh | engagement of a 1st transmission member and a 2nd transmission member remove | deviates. Further, when the first transmission member is displaced with the movement of the moving member, it is possible to secure a meshing area between the teeth of the first transmission member and the teeth of the second transmission member and the connecting member. Wear can be suppressed and durability can be improved.

  Note that the teeth of the first transmission member and the teeth of the second transmission member do not need to be formed over the entire circumference, and it is sufficient if they are formed in a part of the circumferential direction. The same applies to the following. The same applies to other gears.

  In the gaming machine G1, the connecting member is erected along the axial direction of the second transmission member from the axial end surface of the second transmission member, and the tooth forming portion where the teeth are formed, and the tooth formation A body portion connected to a standing tip of the portion, and the tooth forming portion has a surface opposite to the side on which the teeth are formed curved in an arc shape centering on the axis of the second transmission member A gaming machine G2 formed as a concave curved surface.

  According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G1, the tooth forming portion of the connecting member is erected along the axial direction of the second transmission member from the axial end surface of the second transmission member, and the second Since the surface opposite to the side where the teeth that are continuous with the teeth of the transmission member are formed is formed as a concave curved surface that is curved in an arc shape around the axis of the second transmission member, the tooth forming portion of the connecting member is Even when connecting to the axial end face of the second transmission member, the area of the axial end face of the second transmission member can be secured, and the fixing member attached to the axial end face of the second transmission member is increased accordingly. Diameter can be increased. Further, when the second transmission member and the connecting member are integrally formed from a resin material, the surface opposite to the surface on which the teeth are formed is formed as a concave curved surface as described above, thereby forming the tooth forming portion. It is possible to make the wall thickness uniform in order to improve the moldability.

  In the gaming machine G2, the gaming machine G3 is characterized in that the teeth are formed in a tooth forming portion of the connecting member over a range from an axial end surface of the second transmission member to the main body portion.

  According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G2, teeth are formed in the tooth forming portion of the connecting member over the range from the axial end surface of the second transmission member to the main body portion. It is possible to secure a sufficient area and prevent the meshing between the first transmission member and the second transmission member from deviating more reliably. Further, when the second transmission member and the connecting member are integrally formed from a resin material, the teeth are formed over the entire tooth forming portion as described above, so that the thickness of the tooth forming portion is reduced as a whole. It is possible to improve the moldability by making it uniform.

  In any one of the gaming machines G1 to G3, the first transmission member and the second transmission member are disposed and the second movement member formed to be movable, and the guide for guiding the second movement member in a linear direction. The transmission means includes a pinion to which a driving force is transmitted from the driving means, and a rack that is engaged with the pinion and is displaced as the pinion rotates. The gaming machine G4 has one end connected to the rack and the other end connected to the second transmission member.

  According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines G1 to G3, the gaming machine G4 includes the second moving member in which the first transmission member and the second transmission member are disposed, and the second moving member is a guide member. The transmission means includes a pinion to which the driving force is transmitted from the driving means, and a rack that is engaged with the pinion and displaced as the pinion rotates, and the connecting member is attached to the rack. Since one end is connected and the other end is connected to the second transmission member, the coupling member is displaced by operating the rack and pinion by the driving force of the driving means, and the second is accompanied by the displacement of the coupling member. The rotation of the transmission member and the linear movement of the second moving member can be performed simultaneously. That is, since the moving member is connected to the first transmitting member meshed with the second transmitting member, the moving member can be linearly moved together with the second moving member while rotating the moving member. As a result, the production effect can be enhanced. In addition, since the transmission of the driving force of the driving means to the moving member and the transmission to the second moving member can be shared by one member (connecting member), the number of parts can be reduced and the product cost can be reduced. Can be planned.

  In the gaming machine G4, the rack has a tooth surface meshed with the pinion disposed substantially parallel to a horizontal plane, and is displaced in the horizontal direction as the pinion rotates, and the second moving member is disposed horizontally in the rack. In accordance with the displacement in the direction, the guide member is guided in the vertical direction, and when the second moving member is arranged at the raised position, the connecting member is configured such that the teeth formed in the tooth forming portion are the first transmission. A gaming machine G5, which is disposed at a position corresponding to a tooth of a member.

  According to the gaming machine G5, the rack has a tooth surface meshed with the pinion disposed substantially parallel to the horizontal plane and is displaced in the horizontal direction as the pinion rotates, and the second moving member is moved in the horizontal direction of the rack. Since the guide member is guided in the vertical direction along with the displacement, the pinion is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and when the rack is displaced to one side in the horizontal direction by the rotation of the pinion, the one side in the horizontal direction of the rack is moved. As the connecting member is tilted, the second moving member is moved downward (lowered) toward the lower position while the rack is displaced to the other side in the horizontal direction by the rotation of the pinion. Then, as the rack is displaced to the other side in the horizontal direction, the connecting member is raised, and the second moving member is moved upward (raised) toward the raised position as the connecting member is raised.

  In this case, in a state where the second moving member is arranged at the raised position, the connecting member is erected, so that it is difficult to maintain the posture, and the posture of the second moving member becomes unstable. As a result, the posture of the moving member disposed on the second moving member becomes more unstable. For this reason, the shaking of the second moving member makes the shaking of the moving member more remarkable, and the displacement of the first transmission member accompanying the shaking of the moving member increases. That is, in a state where the second moving member is disposed at the raised position, the engagement between the first transmission member and the second transmission member is likely to be disengaged.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G4, when the second moving member is arranged at the raised position, the connecting member is configured such that the teeth formed in the tooth forming portion are the first transmission. Since it is disposed at a position corresponding to the tooth of the member, the displacement of the first transmission member is increased due to the shaking of the moving member, and the engagement between the first transmission member and the second transmission member is most easily disengaged. The teeth formed in the tooth forming part can be effectively used. Thereby, it can suppress effectively that the mesh | engagement with a 1st transmission member and a 2nd transmission member remove | deviates.

  In the gaming machine G4 or G5, the transmission means includes the rack, a connecting member connected at one end to the rack, a second transmitting member connected at the other end of the connecting member, and teeth at the second transmitting member. The pair includes a pair of a first transmission member and a moving member coupled to the first transmission member, and the first transmission member and the second transmission member of one set are the first transmission of the other set. One set and the other set may be arranged so as to face each other along the moving direction of the rack in a state of being engaged with the member and the second transmission member. According to this, it is possible to improve the synchronization accuracy between the moving member in one set and the moving member in the other set. Further, even if only the first transmission members or only the second transmission members are meshed, the synchronization accuracy of the moving member can be improved. The first transmission member and the second transmission member are By being engaged with each other, it is possible to increase the number of toothed locations (toothed area) and to disperse the surface pressure of the tooth surface accordingly, so that the durability can be improved.

  A plurality of moving members formed to be movable, a driving means for generating a driving force for moving each of the plurality of moving members, and a transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the plurality of moving members, respectively. And a plurality of the moving members are retracted to different retracted positions, and are moved from the different retracted positions and arranged at a reference position so that the plurality of moving members are coupled to each other. The plurality of moving members are moved in directions close to each other and are arranged adjacent to each other at the reference position, and directions in which the first moving member and the second moving member are adjacent to each other. A third moving member that is brought into contact with each of the first moving member and the second moving member from a substantially orthogonal direction, wherein the third moving member is the reference The first moving member and the second moving member in contact with each other to form a force in a direction in which the first moving member and the second moving member are brought close to each other, the first moving member, A gaming machine H1 characterized in that the second moving member and the third moving member are combined.

  According to the gaming machine H1, the driving force of the driving means is transmitted to the first moving member, the second moving member, and the third moving member by the transmitting means, so that the first moving member, the second moving member, and the third moving member are transmitted. The moving members are retracted to different retracted positions, and are moved from the different retracted positions and arranged at the reference position.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a plurality of moving members formed to be movable, a driving unit that generates a driving force for moving each of the plurality of moving members, and a driving force of the driving unit A plurality of moving members, each of which is retracted to a different retracted position and moved from a different retracted position and disposed at a reference position. There is a gaming machine to which is coupled (see, for example, JP 2012-115300 A). In this case, if the plurality of moving members at the reference position are not appropriately combined, the effect of combining the plurality of moving members is impaired. However, as in the conventional gaming machine described above, it is relatively easy to connect a pair of symmetrical moving members face to face, but it is difficult to connect three or more moving members.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine H1, at the reference position, the first moving member and the second moving member are arranged adjacent to each other, and substantially orthogonal to the adjacent directions of the first moving member and the second moving member. When the third moving member moved from the direction toward the first moving member and the second moving member comes into contact with each of the first moving member and the second moving member, the first moving member and the second moving member are moved. Since forces in directions to make them approach each other are formed, the first moving member, the second moving member, and the third moving member can be appropriately combined. As a result, it is possible to ensure a presentation effect by combining a plurality of moving members.

  In the gaming machine H1, the first moving member and the second moving member have a first contact portion and a second contact portion, respectively, and are in contact with the first contact portion and the second contact portion, respectively. The third moving member has a third abutting portion, and the third abutting portion of the third moving member is a first abutting portion and a second abutting portion of the first moving member and the second moving member. By abutting each other, a force in a direction in which the first moving member and the second moving member are brought close to each other is formed, and the shape of the first moving member and the second moving member in a front view is the first contact. While the concave portion is formed by the contact portion and the second contact portion and is recessed toward the contact surfaces of the first moving member and the second moving member, the shape of the third moving member in front view is Formed by the third contact portion and the Gaming machine 1 in response to the concave shape of the moving member and the second moving member center, characterized in that it is a projecting shape protruding H2.

  According to the gaming machine H2, the first moving member and the second moving member are arranged adjacent to each other at the reference position, and the first moving member and the second moving member are in contact with each other. When the third contact portion of the third moving member comes into contact, a force is generated in a direction in which the first moving member and the second moving member are brought close to each other, whereby the first moving member and the second moving member are formed. And the third moving member are coupled.

  In this case, the shape of the first moving member and the second moving member in a front view (combination of the first contact portion and the second contact portion) is a concave shape in which the center is recessed, while the front view of the third moving member. Since the shape (third contact portion) is a protruding shape with the center protruding corresponding to the concave shape of the first moving member and the second moving member, the first moving member, the second moving member, and the second moving member It is possible to improve the production effect by moving the three moving members from the retracted position to the reference position and coupling them at the reference position.

  That is, the first moving member, the second moving member, and the third moving member have a front view shape in which, as described above, the first moving member and the second moving member that are arranged adjacent to each other have a concave shape. In the form in which the third moving member moved toward the shape has a protruding shape, when the third moving member is disposed from the retracted position to the reference position, the first moving member is disposed between the first moving member and the second moving member that are disposed adjacent to each other. When the three moving members enter and the player is reminded of a mode in which the first moving member and the second moving member are pushed away from each other, according to the gaming machine H2, according to the gaming machine H2, the third moving member (third Is in contact with the first moving member and the second moving member (the first abutting portion and the second abutting portion), so that the first moving member and the second moving member are brought closer to each other. These first movements form a force Wood, can be bound to the second moving member and the third movable member. Thereby, in addition to the effect which game machine H1 plays, it can be operated in the mode different from a player's expectation, and the production effect can be heightened.

  In the gaming machine H2, the first moving member and the second moving member are supported on the base member by the first link mechanism and the second link mechanism, respectively, and the first moving member and the second moving member are at the reference position. In the state of being arranged next to each other, the first link mechanism and the second link mechanism may be arranged in a letter C shape in which the distance between the first moving member and the second moving member side is narrower than the base member side. preferable. By setting the angle formed between the first contact portion and the second contact portion and the third contact portion with respect to the angle formed between the first link mechanism and the second link mechanism, the first movement is performed at the reference position. This is because a force in a direction in which the member and the second moving member are brought close to each other can be formed.

  In the gaming machine H1, the front view shapes of the first moving member and the second moving member are concave shapes that are recessed toward the contact surfaces of the first moving member and the second moving member. A gaming machine H3, wherein a shape of the moving member in front view is a protruding shape with a center protruding corresponding to the concave shape of the first moving member and the second moving member.

  According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H1, the front view shape of the first moving member and the second moving member is a concave shape with the center recessed, while the front view shape of the third moving member is Since the center of the first moving member and the second moving member has a protruding shape corresponding to the concave shape, the first moving member, the second moving member, and the third moving member are referenced from the retracted position. It is possible to improve the production effect by moving to the position and combining at the reference position.

  That is, the first moving member, the second moving member, and the third moving member have a front view shape in which, as described above, the first moving member and the second moving member that are arranged adjacent to each other have a concave shape. In the form in which the third moving member moved toward the shape has a protruding shape, when the third moving member is disposed from the retracted position to the reference position, the first moving member is disposed between the first moving member and the second moving member that are disposed adjacent to each other. When the player is reminded of a mode in which the three moving members enter and push the first moving member and the second moving member away from each other, according to the gaming machine H3, the third moving member abuts at the reference position. Thus, a force in a direction in which the first moving member and the second moving member are brought close to each other can be formed, and the first moving member, the second moving member, and the third moving member can be coupled. Thereby, it can be made to operate | move in the aspect different from a player's expectation, and the presentation effect can be heightened.

  In the gaming machine H3, the first moving member and the second moving member include a first restricting portion and a second restricting portion, and a third restricting portion that is in contact with each of the first restricting portion and the second restricting portion. The third moving member includes at least one of the third restricting portion, the first restricting portion, and the second restricting portion when the third moving member is moved toward the reference position. The first moving member and the second moving member are formed by inclining and forming in a shape that expands toward the traveling direction side, and the third restricting portion comes into contact with both sides of the first restricting portion and the second restricting portion. A gaming machine H4 that is displaced in a direction close to each other.

  According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H3, at least one of the third regulating unit, the first regulating unit, and the second regulating unit is moved toward the reference position. The first movement member and the second movement are formed by inclining into a shape that becomes wider toward the traveling direction side when the third restriction portion is in contact with both sides of the first restriction portion and the second restriction portion. Since the members are displaced in the directions close to each other, the first moving member and the second moving member can be reliably displaced in the directions close to each other. Therefore, the structure that allows the first moving member and the second moving member to move can be simplified, and the degree of freedom in designing the structure can be increased.

  In the gaming machine H4, the first restricting portion and the second restricting portion are respectively disposed on the back side of the portion forming the front view shape of the first moving member and the second moving member, and the third restricting portion. Is arranged on the back side of the portion forming the front view shape of the third moving member.

  According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H4, the first regulating portion and the second regulating portion are disposed on the back side of the portion forming the front view shape of the first moving member and the second moving member, respectively. In addition, since the third restricting portion is disposed on the back side of the portion forming the front view shape of the third moving member, the first restricting portion, the second restricting portion, and the third restricting portion are provided to the player. It can suppress being visually recognized. Therefore, by setting the concave shape and the protruding shape as the external shapes of the first moving member, the second moving member, and the third moving member, it is possible to enhance the effect of operating in a manner different from the player's expectation.

  In the gaming machine H4 or H5, the first moving member and the second moving member are inclined downward or upward toward the front side of the first moving member and the second moving member, and the first moving member and the second moving member. The first moving surface includes a first inclined surface and a second inclined surface continuous to the front surface of the moving member, and the third moving member is inclined in the same direction as the first inclined surface and the second inclined surface, and the third moving member. A gaming machine H6, comprising a third inclined surface that is connected to the front surface of the first inclined surface and contacts the first inclined surface and the second inclined surface at the reference position.

  According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H4 or H5, the first moving member and the second moving member are connected to the front surface of the first moving member and the second moving member. Each of the third moving members includes a third inclined surface that is inclined in the same direction as the first inclined surface and the second inclined surface and is continuous with the front surface of the third moving member. Since the surface, the second inclined surface, and the third inclined surface are in contact with each other, the contact between the inclined surfaces causes the front-rear direction (front and back surfaces) of the first moving member, the second moving member, and the third moving member. Positioning in the direction of connecting the two. Further, when the first moving member, the second moving member, and the third moving member are coupled at the reference position by contact between the inclined surfaces, the first moving member, the second moving member, and the third moving member are combined. The player can recognize the shape of the front view so that there is no gap between them, and as a result, it is possible to improve the presentation effect by combining at the reference position.

  In the gaming machine H6, the first restricting portion and the second restricting portion are disposed on the back side of the first inclined surface and the second inclined surface, respectively, and the third restricting portion is provided on the third inclined surface. A gaming machine H7, which is disposed on the back side.

  According to the gaming machine H7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H6, the first regulating portion and the second regulating portion are disposed on the back side of the first inclined surface and the second inclined surface, respectively, and the third inclined surface Since the 3rd control part is arranged in the back side of these, it can control that these 1st control parts, the 2nd control part, and the 3rd control part are visually recognized by a player. Therefore, by setting the concave shape and the protruding shape as the front view shapes in the first moving member, the second moving member, and the third moving member, it is possible to enhance the effect of operating in a manner different from the player's expectation. .

  Here, the first restricting portion and the second restricting portion are formed in the inclined shape that is not visible in the front view, and the first restricting surface and the second inclined surface are formed, and the third restricting portion is not visible in the front view. The third inclined surface may be formed in an inclined shape. In addition, in this way, making each restricting portion invisible in front view by each inclined surface means that the first restricting portion is configured in a structure in which the front of each restricting portion (the front side of each moving member) is formed as a horizontal plane. And even if one of the second restricting portion and the third restricting portion is disposed invisible on the back side of the horizontal plane, the other is exposed, so that it is impossible. As with the gaming machine H7, each restricting portion It is possible for the first time by forming an inclined surface in front of (the front side of each moving member) (without exposing both the first restricting portion and the second restricting portion and the third restricting portion, The rear side of each inclined surface can be made invisible in front view), whereby the player can recognize that the first restricting portion, the second restricting portion, and the third restricting portion are visually recognized by the player. Even during movement between positions, it can be reliably suppressed. As a result, by combining the concave shape and the protruding shape, the effect of operating in a manner different from the player's expectation can be further enhanced.

  In the gaming machine H7, the first moving member and the second moving member have a first positioning surface and a second positioning surface that are inclined upward or downward in a direction opposite to the first inclined surface and the second inclined surface. The third moving member is inclined upward or downward in the same direction as the first positioning surface and the second positioning surface, and is in contact with the first positioning surface and the second positioning surface at the reference position, respectively. A gaming machine H8 comprising three positioning surfaces.

  According to the gaming machine H8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H7, the first moving member and the second moving member have the first positioning surface and the second positioning surface, respectively, and the third moving member has the third positioning surface. The first positioning surface, the second positioning surface, and the third positioning surface are brought into contact with each other at the reference position, and the first movement member, the second movement member, and the third movement are brought into contact with each other by the contact between the inclined surfaces. Positioning with a member can be performed. In particular, the first positioning surface and the second positioning surface are inclined upward or downward in a direction opposite to the first inclined surface and the second inclined surface, and the third positioning surface is the first positioning surface and the second inclined surface. Since it is inclined in the same direction as the positioning surface, the positioning direction due to the contact between these positioning surfaces is opposite to the positioning direction due to the contact between the first inclined surface and the second inclined surface and the third inclined surface. Can be direction. As a result, the first moving member, the second moving member, and the third moving member can be positioned not only in the front-rear direction (the direction connecting the front and back surfaces), but also held in the positioning position in the front-rear direction. As a result, it is possible to prevent the third moving member from being displaced relative to the first moving member and the second moving member after being joined at the reference position and the occurrence of rattling.

  A movable member formed so as to be movable; a driving unit that generates a driving force for moving the moving member; and a transmission unit that transmits the driving force generated by the driving unit to the moving member. In a gaming machine, wherein the transmission means includes a first transmission member and a second transmission member meshed with the first transmission member at a predetermined phase, the second transmission member with respect to the first transmission member A gaming machine I1 comprising positioning means for positioning a meshing position at the predetermined phase.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a movable member formed to be movable, a driving unit that generates a driving force for moving the moving member, and a driving force generated by the driving unit are applied to the moving member. There is a gaming machine including a transmission means for transmitting, the transmission means including a first transmission member and a second transmission member engaged with the first transmission member at a predetermined phase (for example, a special feature). (See JP 2009-125092). According to this gaming machine, when one of the first transmission member or the second transmission member is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, the other of the first transmission member or the second transmission member is rotated by the rotation of the one, The moving member is moved by the other rotation. However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when the second transmission member is not meshed with a predetermined phase with respect to the first transmission member, a shift occurs in the moving range of the moving member. Therefore, when assembling (meshing) the first transmission member and the second transmission member, it is necessary to assemble after positioning the meshing position of the second transmission member with respect to the first transmission member at a predetermined phase, The positioning work was complicated.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine I1, since the positioning means for positioning the meshing position of the second transmission member with respect to the first transmission member at a predetermined phase is provided, the first transmission member and the second transmission member are assembled (tooth). The first transmission member and the second transmission member can be assembled using such positioning means. That is, when positioning the meshing position of the second transmission member with respect to the first transmission member at a predetermined phase, the workability of the positioning operation can be improved.

  Note that, as described above, the teeth of the first transmission member and the teeth of the second transmission member do not have to be formed over the entire circumference, and it is sufficient if they are formed in a part of the circumferential direction.

  The gaming machine I1 includes a base member on which the first transmission member and the second transmission member are rotatably supported, and the positioning means includes a first base positioning portion and a second base positioning portion formed on the base member. And a first transmission member positioning portion and a second transmission member positioning portion respectively formed on the first transmission member and the second transmission member at positions corresponding to the first base positioning portion and the second base positioning portion. A gaming machine I2 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine I1, the base member is formed with the first base positioning portion and the second base positioning portion, and corresponds to the first base positioning portion and the second base positioning portion. Since the first transmission member positioning portion and the second transmission member positioning portion are formed on the first transmission member and the second transmission member, respectively, the first transmission member positioning portion is made to coincide with the first base positioning portion, and By assembling the first transmission member and the second transmission member to the base member while matching the second transmission member positioning portion with the second base positioning portion, the second transmission member is brought into a predetermined phase with respect to the first transmission member. Can be positioned. As a result, the workability of the positioning work can be improved.

  In particular, when at least one of the first base positioning portion or the first transmission member positioning portion and at least one of the second base positioning portion or the second transmission member positioning portion is formed as a through hole, the one penetration By positioning the second transmission member in a predetermined phase with respect to the first transmission member by inserting the jig through the hole and bringing the tip of the inserted jig into contact (or insertion) with the other, the positioning operation is simplified. And accurately.

  In the gaming machine I2, the base member includes a first shaft and a second shaft that project from the front of the base member and are inserted through the first transmission member and the second transmission member, and the first base positioning The gaming machine I3 is characterized in that the portion and the second base positioning portion are formed as through holes.

  According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I2, when the base member includes a first shaft and a second shaft that protrude from the front surface of the base member and are inserted through the first transmission member and the second transmission member. Since the first base positioning portion and the second base positioning portion are formed as through holes, the first transmission member and the second transmission are positioned while positioning the second transmission member at a predetermined phase with respect to the first transmission member. When the member is assembled to the base member, the positioning operation and the assembling operation can be performed at the same time, and the workability can be improved.

  That is, according to the gaming machine I3, since the first base positioning portion and the second base positioning portion are formed as through holes, the jig is inserted from the back surface of the base member to the first base positioning portion and the second base positioning portion. Thus, the jig can be protruded from the front surface of the base member together with the first shaft and the second shaft. Thus, simultaneously with the operation of assembling (inserting) the first transmission member and the second transmission member to the first shaft and the second shaft from the front of the base member, the tips of the jigs are connected to the first transmission member and the second transmission member, respectively. Positioning work for contacting (or inserting) the first transmission member positioning portion and the second transmission member positioning portion can be performed. As a result, the positioning work and the assembling work can be performed at the same time, and the workability can be improved accordingly.

  In the gaming machine I2 or I3, the first transmission member is composed of a pair of members that are coaxially overlapped in the axial direction, and the first transmission member positioning portions are formed as through holes at positions corresponding to each other of the pair of members. A gaming machine I4 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I2 or I3, the first transmission member is composed of a pair of members that are coaxially overlapped in the axial direction, and the first transmission member is located at a position corresponding to the pair of members. Since the positioning portions are respectively formed as through holes, the positioning operation of the pair of gears can be performed simultaneously, and the workability of the positioning operation can be improved accordingly. In addition, since the positioning operation of the pair of gears can be performed using a common jig, the product cost can be reduced accordingly. Further, since it is not necessary to couple the pair of gears, the pair of gears can be pivotally supported on a common shaft so as to be relatively rotatable. The second transmission member may be configured similarly.

  In any one of the gaming machines I2 to I4, the second transmission member includes a pair of members that are coaxially overlapped in the axial direction, and the pair of members includes a protruding portion that protrudes from one member, and the protruding portion. A recess formed in the other member for receiving, and the second transmission member positioning portion is formed on a member disposed on the base member side of the pair of members. Game machine I5.

  According to the gaming machine I5, in any of the gaming machines I2 to I4, the second transmission member is composed of a pair of members that are coaxially overlapped in the axial direction, and the member that is disposed on the base member side of the pair of members. Since the second transmission member positioning portion is formed on the base member, the second transmission member positioning portion can be used to position the member disposed on the base member side of the pair of members at a predetermined phase. . In this case, the pair of members can be positioned at a predetermined phase by allowing the protrusions of one member to be received in the recesses of the other member, and cannot be relatively rotated (ie, synchronized). Can be supported on a common shaft. In particular, since the protrusions are received and fitted into the recesses of the pair of members, the rigidity as a whole can be increased accordingly.

  In addition, the recessed part does not need to be bottomed and may be formed as a through-hole. That is, it is sufficient that the concave portion is formed so as to be capable of positioning in the circumferential direction (rotational direction) by receiving the connecting protrusion when the pair of members are coaxially stacked.

  A game comprising a liquid crystal display device, a plurality of winning holes arranged below the liquid crystal display device, and an out port for discharging game balls that have flowed down without being won in the plurality of winning holes from the gaming area In the machine, the first winning port of the plurality of winning ports is close to the lower edge of the gaming area until the position where the gaming ball cannot pass between the lower edge of the gaming area or the The abutment is disposed in contact with a lower edge of the game area, and the out port is a first out port disposed on one side in the width direction of the game area with respect to the first winning port, and the first A gaming machine J1 comprising: a second out port disposed on the other side in the width direction of the gaming area with respect to the winning port.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a liquid crystal display device, a plurality of winning holes disposed below the liquid crystal display device, and a game ball that has flowed down without winning a prize in the plurality of winning holes There is a gaming machine provided with an outlet opening that discharges from the outlet (see, for example, JP 2012-143268 A). In recent years, an increase in the size of a liquid crystal display device has been required in order to enhance the effect. However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, in order to increase the size of the liquid crystal display device, if the position of the lower edge of the liquid crystal display device is lowered downward, it is necessary to lower the position of the winning opening accordingly. When the position of the winning opening is lowered too much, there is no space for the game ball to flow down below the winning opening (between the lower edge of the gaming area, for example, the inner rail). That is, the game balls that have flowed down without winning a prize can not be discharged from the outlet. For this reason, there is a limit to lowering the position of the winning opening, and as a result, the liquid crystal display device cannot be sufficiently enlarged.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine J1, the out port includes a first out port disposed on one side in the width direction of the game area with respect to the first winning port of the plurality of winning ports, And a second out port disposed on the other side in the width direction of the game area with respect to the winning port of the game, so that the first winning port is not won and the first winning port is positioned on one side in the width direction. The game balls that have flowed down can be discharged from the game area through the first out port, while the game balls that have not flowed into the first winning port and have flowed down to the other side in the width direction from the first winning port are second. It can be discharged from the game area by the out port. Thereby, it is not necessary to secure a space for the game ball to flow down below the first winning opening (lower edge of the game area, for example, between the inner rail). Therefore, the position of the first winning opening can be lowered further (that is, to a position where the game ball cannot be passed between the lower edge of the game area), and accordingly, the liquid crystal display device Can be enlarged.

  The gaming machine J1 includes an effect member that provides an effect associated with winning a game ball to a second winning port of the plurality of winning ports, and a gaming board in which the gaming area is formed on the front side transmits light. The effect member is disposed at a position corresponding to the second prize opening on the back side of the game board, and the second prize opening and the effect member are provided in the first prize opening. On the other hand, the gaming machine J2 is arranged on one side in the width direction or the other side in the width direction of the gaming area.

  According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine J1, it is provided with a production member that produces an effect in accordance with the winning of the game ball to the second winning port out of the plurality of winning ports, Since it is arranged at a position corresponding to the second prize opening on the back side of the game board made of a light-transmitting material, the scene for the player who visually recognizes the scene where the game ball is won to the second prize opening. The effect by the effect member can be simultaneously recognized behind the player, and the effect accompanying the winning of the game ball to the second winning opening can be effectively performed.

  In this case, since the second prize opening and the production member are arranged on the one side in the width direction or the other side in the width direction of the game area with respect to the first prize opening, the position of the second prize opening and the production member Can be lowered, and accordingly, the position of the lower edge of the liquid crystal display device can be lowered. As a result, the liquid crystal display device can be increased in size even when the effect member is provided.

  That is, disposing an effect member on the back side of the game board at a position corresponding to the second prize opening obstructs an increase in size of the liquid crystal display device because the effect member interferes with the liquid crystal display device. Become. On the other hand, as described above, the first out-port and the second out-port are disposed on one side in the width direction and the other side in the width direction of the game area with respect to the first winning port. In addition to being able to lower the position of the first prize opening, it is possible to secure the degree of freedom of the arrangement position on the one side in the width direction or the other side in the width direction of the game area of the first prize opening. As a result, according to the gaming machine J2, a layout in which the effect members are disposed on the back side of the game board at the position corresponding to the second prize port. Became possible.

  In the gaming machine J2, the gaming machine J3 is characterized in that the second winning opening is disposed at a substantially center in the width direction of the gaming area.

  According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine J2, the second prize opening is arranged at the approximate center in the width direction of the gaming area, so that the size of the liquid crystal display device can be increased while the gaming area is limited. By effectively utilizing the space provided, it is possible to secure a wider space for arranging the production members. That is, with this layout, it is possible to efficiently increase the size of both the liquid crystal display device and the effect member. In addition, the second winning a prize opening is arranged at the substantially center in the width direction of the game area, so that the flow path of the game ball to the second winning award can be lengthened. Thereby, it is possible to improve the gameability for winning the game ball to the second winning opening, and it is possible to enhance the expectation for the effect by the effect member accompanying the winning to the second winning opening.

  The gaming machine J2 or J3 includes a second effect member disposed on the back side of the game board, and the second effect member is arranged at a position where at least a part thereof overlaps the effect member in a front view. A gaming machine J4 characterized by being installed.

  According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine J2 or J3, the gaming machine J4 includes the second effect member disposed on the back side of the game board, and the second effect member is at least one in the front view. Since the part is arranged at a position overlapping the effect member, when the game board is formed of a light-transmitting material, only the necessary part of the second effect member is visually recognized and the other part is effected. The member can be shielded from the player. Thereby, since it is not necessary to design the 2nd production member on the assumption that the whole is visually recognized from a player, the improvement of the freedom degree of the design can be aimed at.

  In any one of the gaming machines J2 to J4, the effect member is formed in a circular shape that can rotate around the second winning prize opening.

  According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines J2 to J4, the effect member is formed in a circular shape that can rotate around the second winning opening, and therefore surrounds the second winning opening. It is possible to produce an effect in the entire area, and it is possible to enhance the effect of producing the effect accompanying winning in the second prize opening.

  In this case, the second winning opening needs to be disposed at a position where a space for allowing the game ball to flow down can be secured both above and below the second winning opening, and the game area of the gaming area is relative to the second winning opening. Since the first winning port is arranged at a position on one side in the width direction or the other side in the width direction and below the game area, the effect member is formed in a circle centered on the second winning port. Thus, the space that can be secured around the second winning opening can be utilized to the maximum extent, and as a result, the area of the effect member can be increased and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A5, B1 to B6, C1 to C5, D1 to D5, E1 to E7, F1 to F9, G1 to G5, H1 to H8, I1 to I5, J1 to J5, A gaming machine K1 that is a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A5, B1 to B6, C1 to C5, D1 to D5, E1 to E7, F1 to F9, G1 to G5, H1 to H8, I1 to I5, J1 to J5, A gaming machine K2, which is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port disposed at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A5, B1 to B6, C1 to C5, D1 to D5, E1 to E7, F1 to F9, G1 to G5, H1 to H8, I1 to I5, J1 to J5, A gaming machine K3, which is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
13 Game board 64 1st prize opening (2nd prize opening)
71 1st out port (out port)
72 Second Out (Out)
81 3rd symbol display device (liquid crystal display device)
300 Rotation unit (Director)
410 Mounting base (part of base member)
410a Positioning hole (first base positioning part)
410b Positioning hole (second base positioning part)
421 Back case body (part of base member)
421a Positioning hole (first base positioning part)
421b Positioning hole (second base positioning part)
426 First shaft 427 Second shaft 430 Drive motor (drive means)
451 Opening and closing first gear (part of transmission means, first transmission member, second transmission member, second drive means side member)
451d Connecting protrusion (positioning means, protrusion)
451e Positioning hole (positioning means, first transmission member positioning portion)
452 Open / close second gear (part of transmission means, first transmission member, second transmission member, second moving member side member)
452d Connecting protrusion (pin part)
452e Positioning hole (positioning means, second transmission member positioning portion)
461 Rotating first gear (part of transmission means, drive means side member, first transmission member, second transmission member)
461a1 Cylindrical surface (part of the non-formed part)
461d Connecting hole (positioning means, recess)
462 Rotating second gear (part of transmission means, moving member side member, first transmission member, second transmission member)
462a1 non-formation surface (part of non-formation part)
462d Connection protrusion (fastened part)
462e Positioning hole (positioning means, second transmission member positioning portion)
471 Back arm body (first moving member or part of second moving member)
472 Front arm body (first moving member or part of second moving member)
481,7481 Slide rack member (groove portion arrangement member)
481c Connection groove (connection groove)
9482 Cam leg member (second transmission member)
8483 Second pinion leg member (second transmission member)
491,492 Operating members (moving member, first moving member, second moving member)
510 Substrate member (base member)
511 Guide groove (slide hole)
522 Drive motor (drive means)
524 Crank gear (part of transmission means)
525 Connecting rod (part of transmission means)
526 connecting shaft (part of transmission means, connecting member)
530 Slide mechanism (moving member)
531c Insertion shaft (protrusion)
539 1st coupling member (a part of moving member, 3rd moving member)
539e bottom surface (third contact portion, third restriction portion)
10539e2 inclined lower surface (third inclined surface)
10539f1 left and right inner wall surfaces (third regulating part)
10539f2 Back side inner wall surface (third positioning surface)
541 First link member (part of transmission means, first member)
4543 Pinion gear (pinion member)
4544, 6544 Rack (rack member)
600 Second combined operation unit (second effect member)
621 Inner link member (part of transmission means)
622 Outer link member (part of transmission means)
630 2nd coupling member (a part of moving member, 1st moving member, and 2nd moving member)
630a Upper surface (first contact portion, second contact portion, first restricting portion, second restricting portion)
10630a2 inclined upper surface (first inclined surface, second inclined surface)
630b Opposing surface (contact surface)
10630c1 Left and right outer wall surfaces (first restriction part, second restriction part)
10630c2 Rear side outer wall surface (first positioning surface, second positioning surface)
640 Drive motor (drive means)
650a Second specific prize opening (first prize opening)
700 Circular motion unit (second effect member)
710 Intermediate case body (part of base member)
711a Front (opposite wall)
713a Front (opposite wall)
720 Rear case body (part of base member)
730 Front case body (part of base member)
731a Back (opposite wall)
732 Pillar part (intermediate part)
733 Guide rod (extension member, part of guide member)
740 Drive motor (drive means)
761 Pinion gear (part of transmission means, pinion)
762 rack (part of transmission means)
770 Link member (part of transmission means, connecting member)
771 Main body 773 Projecting wall (part of connecting member, tooth forming part)
774 Gear part (second transmission member)
774b Teeth 780 Elevating base body (moving member, part of second moving member)
784 Guided part (guide part, part of guide member)
790 Ring forming member (moving member)
792 Gear portion (first transmission member)
811 axis (first axis)
820 Arm member (moving member)
822a First groove (guide groove)
822b Second groove (concave)
830 Drive motor (drive means)
831 Drive shaft (second axis)
832 Drive arm (rotating member)
833 Projection pin (pin member)

Claims (3)

A game comprising a movable member formed so as to be movable, a driving means for generating a driving force for moving the moving member, and a transmission means for transmitting the driving force generated by the driving means to the moving member. In the machine
The moving member includes a first moving member and a second moving member, and the transmission means transmits a driving force of the driving means to the second moving member, and the first movement from the driving means. A gaming machine characterized by being capable of simultaneously forming a blocking state for blocking transmission of driving force to a member. The transmission means includes a first transmission member that transmits the driving force generated by the driving means to the first moving member, and a second transmission member that transmits the driving force generated by the driving means to the second moving member. With
The first transmission member is formed such that teeth to which a driving force is transmitted from the driving means are formed at least partially or entirely, and can be engaged with the first driving means side member. And a first moving member side member on which teeth for transmitting the driving force transmitted from the first driving means side member to the first moving member are formed at least partially or entirely.
At least one of the first driving means side member or the first moving member side member is not formed with the teeth not formed and cannot be engaged with the other of the first driving means side member or the first moving member side member. The gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising a unit.   The second transmission member is driven from the driving unit to the second moving member when a transmission state in which the driving force of the driving unit is transmitted to the first moving member is formed by the first transmission member. The gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein a blocking state for blocking transmission of force can be formed.

Images